USE AND MAINTENANCE

AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001

AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001
AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.00.02

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.00.03
 USE AND MAINTENANCE

AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001

AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001
AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.00.03

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.00.03
 PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes the operation and maintenance of your tractor in its most generic and common configuration. The standard
configuration of the tractor and its equipment may vary from country to country. For further information on the equipment packages
available in your market, please contact your nearest dealer.
Follow the instructions provided in this manual carefully.
Should you need any further clarification regarding the contents of this manual, please do not hesitate to contact one of our service
centres, which will gladly provide you with any information you need in order to operate and maintain your loader correctly and safely
and thus avoid risk of personal injury or damage.
The manufacturer declines all liability for damage caused by operations performed but not envisaged in this document; or for any
damage derived from the improper use of the tractor or lack of expertise in performing maintenance operations, or failure to follow
the prescribed procedures.
This Operation and Maintenance Manual constitutes an integral part of the tractor.
It must therefore be kept with care and, if one day you decide to resell the tractor, please hand over this manual to the new owner.
Important
WARNING
Always consult your dealer before carry out any modifications to the tractor. Any unauthorised modifications to the
machine shall automatically release the manufacturer from all liability for any resulting damage or injury.

1. Do NOT attempt to operate the tractor without having first read and understood this manual. It is the responsibility of the pur-
chaser and of the user to read this Operation and Maintenance Manual and to follow the safety recommendations, operating
and maintenance instructions herein.
2. Make sure that you are familiar with all the safety instructions on the warning notices represented in this manual and on the
tractor. If you do not understand any of the instructions, contact your authorised dealer to obtain further clarification.
3. If this tractor is to be lent or hired out to anyone, it is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that any prospective users have read
and fully understood the Operation and Maintenance manual before using the tractor, and that they have received suitable
instruction on the safe and correct use of the vehicle.
4. The operator is responsible for carrying out a daily inspection of the tractor and its maintenance and must make sure that any
parts are repaired or renewed when their continued use could render the tractor unsafe or when they could damage or cause
the premature wear of other components. NEVER attempt to carry out repairs or adjustments unless fully competent.
5. When renewing parts, it is essential to use original parts only. The use of NON original parts, in addition to invalidating the
manufacturer’s warranty, could cause extensive damage to the tractor.
6. This tractor has been designed to be used in various agricultural applications. Any use of the tractor for an application for
which it is not intended shall be deemed incorrect use. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage or injuries sus-
tained as a result of the incorrect use of the tractor.

Warnings
Since the production process may be modified subsequent to the printing of this manual, the instructions, illustrations, specifications
or other information in this manual may not correspond exactly to your tractor.
In any event the manufacturer reserves the right to apply modifications to the product at any time without notice.
Handover of the tractor to the customer
l Ensure that the customer is aware of the important safety instructions contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
l Indicate to the client the importance of observing current standards, regarding above all speed of operation and braking sys-
tems for trailers.
l Provide detailed explanations of the instructions given in the handbook on using the controls, transmission, digital display,
maintenance, starting and stopping the tractor, using components such as the lift, and front and rear PTO.

To the owner of the new tractor

Practical experience in the field is the key to the success of your new tractor, as regards both its design and manufacture. For many
years, our tractors have been used for the widest range of applications in all possible conditions. However even the best products
require proper care and maintenance from the user.
To obtain the best performance from your tractor, read this manual carefully before starting work or carrying out any maintenance.
Make sure that you understand the meaning of all the warning notices on the tractor and the safety instructions contained in this
manual. Keep this manual ready to hand for consultation whenever a problem or query arises. Do not attempt to make any repairs or

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.00.03

 PREFACE
adjustments unless you fully understand the correct procedure and the implications. Always contact your dealer if you require further
information or assistance.
This manual has been prepared with the aim of helping the owner and/or operator to carry out all the operations related to ��������
the ope-
ration and maintenance of the tractor.
This manual has been divided up into different main sections as follows:
l Introduction
l Identification
l Safety
l Getting to know the tractor
l Using the tractor
l Parking the tractor
l Routine maintenance
l Fault diagnosis
l Wheels
l Electrical equipment
l Technical data
An index of the subjects dealt with in the various sections is found at the start of the Manual.
An alphabetical index is provided at the end of the Manual.
The indications in the manual regarding left, right, front and rear refer to the point of view of the operator sitting in the operator’s seat.
Consequently, the right and left sides of the tractor correspond respectively to the right and left side of the driving seat.

II

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.00.03

 CONTENTS
PrefaceI
ImportantI
WarningsI
Handover of the tractor to the customer I
To the owner of the new tractor I

1 - IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - List of model serial numbers 1-2
1.2 - Identification plates 1-3
1.2.1 - Tractor identification plates 1-3
1.2.2 - Tractor serial number 1-3
1.2.3 - Engine number 1-3
1.2.4 - Engine identification plate 1-4
1.2.5 - ROPS identification plate 1-4
1.2.6 - Gearbox identification plate 1-4
1.2.7 - Front axle identification plate 1-4
1.3 - Original spare parts 1-5
1.4 - Warranty 1-6
1.4.1 - Delivery and installation 1-6
1.4.2 - Warranty procedure 1-6
1.4.3 - Transport 1-7
1.4.4 - Post-warranty assistance 1-7

2 - SAFETY
2.1 - Introduction 2-2
2.2 - Practical advice on safe working procedures 2-3
2.2.1 - Protect the Environment 2-3
2.3 - General safety rules 2-4
2.4 - Accident prevention and personal safety 2-7
2.4.1 - Safety clothing and equipment 2-7
2.4.2 - Exposure to noise 2-7
2.4.3 - Protection and safety devices 2-8
2.4.4 - Daily check of the tractor and implements 2-8
2.4.5 - Boarding and alighting from the tractor 2-8
2.4.6 - Parking the tractor 2-9
2.4.7 - Cleaning the tractor 2-10
2.5 - Operation 2-11
2.5.1 - Start 2-11
2.5.2 - Checking indicator lights 2-11
2.5.3 - Starting fluids 2-11
2.5.4 - Auxiliary equipment 2-11
2.5.5 - Towing safely 2-12
2.5.6 - Driving on the road 2-13
2.5.7 - Overturning 2-13
2.6 - Maintenance 2-15
2.7 - Safety cab 2-16
2.7.1 - Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) 2-16
III

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.00.03

 CONTENTS
2.7.2 - Emergency exits 2-16
2.7.3 - Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS) 2-16
2.7.4 - Operator Protective Structure (OPS) 2-17
2.7.5 - Use of hazardous substances 2-17
2.8 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor 2-19
2.8.1 - Decommissioning the tractor 2-19
2.8.2 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor 2-19
2.9 - Safety warning notices 2-20
2.9.1 - Adhesive safety warning decals 2-20
2.9.2 - Adhesive safety warning decals - North America version 2-25

3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR

3.1 - Exterior views of the tractor 3-2
3.1.1 - External views 3-2
3.2 - Access to the driving position 3-3
3.2.1 - Access to the driving position 3-3
3.3 - Operator seat 3-5
3.3.1 - Operator seats 3-5
3.3.2 - “MSG95A/721” seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery 3-5
3.3.3 - GRAMMER MSG95G/721 seat with pneumatic suspension 3-9
3.3.4 - Multifunction armrest - adjustment 3-12
3.3.5 - Seat belt 3-12
3.3.6 - Passenger seat 3-13
3.3.7 - Passenger seat belt 3-14
3.4 - Steering wheel 3-15
3.4.1 - Adjusting the steering wheel 3-15
3.5 - Rear-view mirrors 3-16
3.5.1 - External rear-view mirrors 3-16
3.5.2 - Interior rear-view mirrors 3-16
3.6 - Instruments and tractor controls 3-18
3.6.1 - Instruments and controls 3-18
3.6.2 - Instrument panel 3-19
3.6.3 - Console switches 3-26
3.6.4 - Steering column controls 3-27
3.6.5 - Right-hand console 3-29
3.6.6 - Multifunction armrest 3-32
3.6.7 - Braking system air pressure gauge 3-32
3.6.8 - LH console 3-32
3.6.9 - Ventilation system 3-33
3.6.10 - Heating system 3-36
3.6.11 - Air conditioning system 3-37
3.6.12 - Cab air filter 3-38
3.6.13 - Cab 3-39
3.6.14 - Hazard warning triangle 3-43
3.6.15 - Fire extinguisher 3-43
3.6.16 - Operation & Maintenance Manual 3-44
3.6.17 - Wheel chock 3-44

IV

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.00.04

 CONTENTS
3.6.18 - Tool box 3-45
3.7 - Other controls 3-46
3.7.1 - Control pedals 3-46
3.7.2 - Clutch control 3-46
3.7.3 - Brake pedal 3-47
3.7.4 - Parking brake lever 3-47
3.7.5 - Accelerator pedal 3-49
3.7.6 - Electronic hand throttle 3-49
3.7.7 - Transmission controls 3-50

4 - USING THE TRACTOR

4.1 - Introduction 4-2
4.1.1 - Engine - first 50 operating hours 4-2
4.2 - Starting - Stopping the engine 4-3
4.2.1 - Starting the engine: 4-3
4.2.2 - Switching off the engine 4-6
4.2.3 - Turbocharging using the turbocharger 4-6
4.3 - Transmission 4-7
4.3.1 - Transmission 4-7
4.3.2 - Creeper 4-9
4.3.3 - Electro-hydraulically controlled shuttle 4-10
4.4 - Four-wheel drive - Differential lock 4-12
4.4.1 - Engaging front-wheel drive 4-12
4.4.2 - Front and rear differential lock 4-12
4.4.3 - ASM/SBA system” 4-13
4.4.4 - Front axle suspension 4-14
4.5 - Braking 4-15
4.5.1 - Hydraulic trailer braking 4-15
4.5.2 - Hybrid automatic-pneumatic braking device 4-15
4.6 - Rear PTO 4-18
4.6.1 - Power take-off 4-18
4.6.2 - Rear PTO (540-1000 rpm) 4-19
4.6.3 - Automatic power take-off 4-22
4.7 - Front PTO 4-24
4.7.1 - Front power take-off (1000 rpm) 4-24
4.8 - Hydraulic rear lift 4-26
4.8.1 - Hydraulic lift 4-26
4.8.2 - Electrohydraulically controlled rear lift 4-26
4.9 - Hydraulic front lift 4-34
4.9.1 - Front lift 4-34
4.10 - 3-point linkage 4-40
4.10.1 - 3-point linkage 4-40
4.11 - Hydraulic system 4-45
4.11.1 - Hydraulic system 4-45
4.11.2 - Remote valve 4-45
4.11.3 - Types of remote control valve 4-47

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.00.04

 CONTENTS
4.11.4 - Remote valve controls 4-47
4.11.5 - Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic couplers 4-51
4.11.6 - Remote control valve operation 4-52
4.11.7 - Front hydraulic service couplers 4-55
4.12 - Towing devices 4-56
4.12.1 - Vertical loads (Agrotron M 600 -> 20001, Agrotron M 610 -> 20001) 4-56
4.12.2 - Vertical loads (Agrotron M 620 -> 20001) 4-57
4.12.3 - Towing devices 4-58
4.12.4 - Towing devices for 50 km/h tractors 4-63
4.12.5 - Adjusting the height of the towing hitch 4-65
4.12.6 - Drawbar 4-66
4.12.7 - Standard long hitch support frame 4-67
4.12.8 - Towing hitch with safety lock 4-68
4.12.9 - Towing hitch with lock pin 4-68
4.12.10 - Automatic towing hitch 4-69
4.12.11 - Sliding Piton-Fix or ball towing hitch 4-69
4.12.12 - Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch 4-70
4.12.13 - Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame 4-72
4.12.14 - Drawbar with Piton Fix or Ball 4-73
4.12.15 - Machined drawbar 4-74
4.12.16 - Standard short hitch support frame 4-75
4.12.17 - Semi-automatic towing hitch 4-75
4.12.18 - Mechanical Pick-up Hitch 4-76
4.12.19 - Front towing hitch 4-77
4.12.20 - Front towing hitch on front support 4-78
4.12.21 - Front towing hitch on block 4-78
4.12.22 - Front towing hitch for tractors with front lift and front PTO 4-78

5 - STORING THE TRACTOR

5.1 - Operations prior to long term garaging 5-2
5.2 - Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of inactivity 5-3

6 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.1 - Maintenance operations 6-2
6.1.1 - Maintenance intervals 6-3
6.1.2 - Washing the tractor/attached implements 6-3
6.2 - Fluids / lubricants and fill volumes 6-4
6.3 - Service intervals 6-6
6.4 - Maintenance and inspection schedule 6-7
6.5 - Accessing the engine compartment 6-9
6.5.1 - Accessing the engine compartment 6-9
6.6 - Daily intervention 6-10
6.6.1 - General inspection of the tractor 6-10
6.6.2 - Checking the engine oil level 6-10
6.6.3 - Checking the coolant level 6-11
6.6.4 - Checking the fuel level 6-11
6.6.5 - Check the electrical system 6-13

VI

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.00.04

 CONTENTS
6.7 - Maintenance at 50 hours (1st service) 6-14
6.7.1 - Checking the braking distance 6-14
6.7.2 - Checking engine belt tension 6-14
6.7.3 - Changing the engine oil 6-15
6.7.4 - Changing the engine oil filter cartridge 6-16
6.7.5 - Checking that the radiator/coolers are clean 6-17
6.7.6 - Changing the fuel filter 6-18
6.7.7 - Checking the parking brake lever 6-19
6.7.8 - Checking the window washer system 6-19
6.7.9 - Cleaning the cab ventilation system filters 6-19
6.7.10 - Checking the oil pipelines 6-20
6.7.11 - Maintenance of the compressed air braking system 6-21
6.8 - Maintenance every 50 hours 6-22
6.8.1 - Checking the transmission oil level 6-22
6.8.2 - Greasing the front axle 6-22
6.8.3 - Checking the brake reservoir oil level 6-23
6.8.4 - Check the battery 6-24
6.8.5 - Front lift maintenance 6-25
6.8.6 - Greasing the rear 3-point linkage 6-25
6.8.7 - Checking wheels and tyres 6-26
6.9 - Maintenance every 250 hours 6-27
6.9.1 - Checking the oil level of the rear axle final drives 6-27
6.9.2 - Front axle oil level check 6-27
6.9.3 - Check front PTO oil level 6-28
6.10 - Maintenance at 500 hours 6-30
6.10.1 - Changing the transmission oil 6-30
6.11 - Maintenance every 500 hours 6-31
6.11.1 - Changing the fuel prefilter 6-31
6.11.2 - Changing the gearbox and rear axle oil filter 6-32
6.11.3 - Changing the Load Sensing oil filter 6-34
6.11.4 - Changing the hydrostatic steering supply line filter 6-35
6.11.5 - Checking the differential lock system 6-37
6.11.6 - Changing front PTO oil and oil filter cartridge 6-37
6.12 - Maintenance every 1000 hours or at least once a year 6-39
6.12.1 - Fuel injection pump maintenance 6-39
6.12.2 - Cleaning engine air filter - Changing air filter cartridge and internal safety cartridge 6-39
6.12.3 - Bleeding the fuel circuit 6-42
6.12.4 - Starter motor maintenance 6-43
6.12.5 - Changing the rear axle final drives oil 6-44
6.12.6 - Changing the differential oil and final drives oil (4WD) 6-45
6.12.7 - Cab air conditioning system maintenance 6-46
6.13 - Maintenance every 1000 hours or at least every two years 6-48
6.13.1 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit 6-48

7 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.1 - Towing the tractor 7-2
7.1.1 - Towing with the engine running 7-2

VII

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.00.04

 CONTENTS
7.1.2 - Towing with the engine off 7-3
7.2 - Safe transport of the tractor 7-4
7.3 - Lifting the tractor 7-5
7.4 - Engine troubleshooting 7-6
7.5 - Gearbox troubleshooting 7-8
7.6 - Front and rear power take-off troubleshooting 7-9
7.7 - Front-wheel drive troubleshooting 7-10
7.8 - Brakes troubleshooting 7-11
7.9 - Lift troubleshooting 7-12
7.10 - Hydraulic system troubleshooting 7-13
7.11 - Hydraulic remote valves troubleshooting 7-14
7.12 - Cab troubleshooting 7-15
7.13 - Electrical system troubleshooting 7-16
7.14 - Fault diagnosis 7-17
7.15 - Engine alarms 7-18
7.16 - Transmission alarms 7-23
7.16.1 - Display of alarms 7-23
7.16.2 - Operating programs in the event of transmission errors or faults 7-23
7.16.3 - List of error codes 7-24
7.17 - Remote control valve alarms 7-28
7.18 - HLHP ECU alarms 7-29

8 - WHEELS
8.1 - Introduction 8-2
8.1.1 - General information regarding tyres 8-2
8.1.2 - Punctures 8-3
8.1.3 - Wheel nut/bolt tightening torques 8-4
8.2 - Tyre combinations 8-5
8.2.1 - Permissible tyre combinations 8-5
8.2.2 - Calculation of the mechanical lead 8-6
8.3 - Track width calculation 8-8
8.3.1 - Minimum track width 8-8
8.3.2 - Track width adjustment 8-8
8.3.3 - Adjustment of steering front fenders 8-12
8.3.4 - Adjustment of fixed front fenders 8-13
8.4 - Ballasting 8-15
8.4.1 - Handling ballast weights 8-15
8.4.2 - Ballast for tractor 8-16
8.4.3 - Front ballast with cast-iron blocks 8-16
8.4.4 - Front one-piece ballast block 8-17
8.4.5 - Ballast for wheels with water-filled tyres 8-18

9 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.1 - Battery 9-2
9.1.1 - Battery 9-2
VIII

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.00.04

 CONTENTS
9.2 - Cab fuse box 9-4
9.2.1 - Fuse box 9-4
9.2.2 - Key to fuse symbols in fuseholder box 9-5
9.3 - Lights for road use 9-12
9.3.1 - Lights for road use 9-12
9.3.2 - Lights for road use, North America 9-15
9.3.3 - Headlight alignment 9-17
9.3.4 - Adjusting the repeater headlights 9-18
9.4 - Worklights 9-20
9.4.1 - Worklights 9-20
9.4.2 - Interior courtesy light 9-22
9.5 - Accessories 9-25
9.5.1 - Power outlet sockets - diagnosis 9-25
9.5.2 - On-board radar 9-27
9.5.3 - Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment 9-28

10 - TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - Declaration of conformity 10-2
10.2 - Technical data of the tractor 10-4
10.2.1 - Technical data 10-4
10.2.2 - Fuel technical characteristics 10-6
10.2.3 - Biofuels - technical characteristics 10-8
10.2.4 - Coolant 10-10
10.2.5 - Noise levels 10-11
10.2.6 - Vibration referred to the operator position 10-12
10.3 - Dimensions and weights 10-13
10.3.1 - Tractor dimensions, weights and speeds 10-13
10.4 - Implement attachment diagrams 10-16
10.4.1 - Implement coupling holes diagram (Agrotron M 600 -> 20001, Agrotron M 610 -> 20001) 10-16
10.4.2 - Implement coupling holes diagram (Agrotron M 620 -> 20001) 10-17

IX

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.00.05

 CONTENTS

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.00.05

 1
2
3
4
1 - IDENTIFICATION

5
6
7
8
9
10

1-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.00.05

 IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - LIST OF MODEL SERIAL NUMBERS
This Operation and Maintenance Manual covers the following models:
1

Table 1 - Technical data

AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

VARIANTS
Identifying serial number -> 20001 -> 20001 -> 20001
2

SUPPORT 4WD 4WD 4WD

Safety cab X X X
X - Standard O - Optional
The authorised dealer is obliged to provide the necessary Technical Assistance and to offer technical support through his own service
centre and specialised personnel to ensure that the tractor is capable of offering its maximum performance.
3

Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:

l Tractor model:
l Tractor identification number:
l Engine model
l Engine number:
l Date of purchase:
4

l Dealer’s name:
l Dealer’s telephone number:
5
6
7
8
9
10

1-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.00.05

 IDENTIFICATION
1.2 - IDENTIFICATION PLATES
1.2.1 - Tractor identification plates

1
Tractor identification data are stamped on two aluminium plates located on the RH
side of the instrument panel.
1. Type of tractor
2. Tractor serial number (V.I.N. - Alphanumeric code consisting of 17 char-
acters)

2
3
Fig. 1

1. Designation of the tractor

2. Year of manufacture

4
5
Fig. 2

1.2.2 - Tractor serial number

The tractor’s serial number is punched on the right-hand side of the front axle
support.

Fig. 3
6
7
1.2.3 - Engine number
8

The engine serial number is punched on the right-hand side of the engine block.
9
10

Fig. 4

1-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.00.06

 IDENTIFICATION
1.2.4 - Engine identification plate
The engine identification plate is fixed to the right side of the crankcase.
1

1. ENGINE TYPE
2. Engine number
2

Fig. 5
3

1.2.5 - ROPS identification plate

The safety frame identification plate is fixed to the right-hand side of the cab
The identification plate contains the following information:
1. Manufacturer
2. Cab/ROPS type
4

3. Serial number
4. Tractor model
5. O.C.D.E. approval number.
6. Homologation number
7. Structure class in compliance with EN 15695-1 (Hazardous substances)
5

Fig. 6

1.2.6 - Gearbox identification plate

The plate is located on the RH side of the gearbox.
6

1. transmission type
2. Gearbox serial number
3. Lubricants table
7

Fig. 7
8

1.2.7 - Front axle identification plate

The plate is located on the right side of the front axle.
1. Axle type
2. Serial number
3. Total transmission ratio
9

4. Direction of rotation
5. Type of differential
10

Fig. 8

1-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.00.07

 IDENTIFICATION
1.3 - ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS
When ordering replacement parts it is essential that the user communicates all the information that identifies the exact tractor model

1
and its serial number, the engine model and the engine serial number. This information is also important to obtain the best possible
technical service.
Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:
l Tractor model
l Tractor serial number

2
l Engine model
l Engine number
l Date of purchase
l Dealer’s name
l Dealer’s telephone number
IMPORTANT:

3
The use of ORIGINAL PARTS will ensure that the perfect operating efficiency of your tractor is maintained and that
running costs are kept to a minimum.

When ordering replacement parts, please supply the following information:

1. Tractor and engine serial number (if the replacement part belongs to the engine).
2. Part name and part number.

4
The use of non-original parts or improper installation of parts will automatically invalidate the tractor’s warranty.
The spare parts catalogue is not included in the use and maintenance manual but is instead managed by the dealer, which offers
service assistance directly
IMPORTANT:

5
To be informed on the serial numbers position (tractor and engine) refer to the “Identification plates” chapter in the
section.

6
7
8
9
10

1-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.00.08

 IDENTIFICATION
1.4 - WARRANTY
1.4.1 - Delivery and installation
1

The dealer is required to perform certain tasks on delivery of the tractor to the customer. Carry out a complete check in order
������������
to en-
sure the tractor can be used immediately; illustrate the safety regulations and provide detailed explanations of the instructions given
in the “Use and Maintenance” manual on using the controls, maintenance procedures, starting and stopping the tractor, and the use
of all equipment, including the lift and PTO. All persons who will be using the tractor must attend the training session.
Note
2

The manufacturer accepts no liability for any claims arising following the installation of non-approved components,
implements or connections or unauthorised modifications or replacements.

For the period of coverage of your tractor check the terms in the warranty certificate.
The warranty includes the replacement of defective parts and the relative labour, excluding tractor transport costs from the �������
end cu-
3

stomer to the dealer/importer and/or its authorised workshops and vice versa.
The warranty only applies if the tractor has been used in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and has not been subject
to tampering. The warranty will be invalidated immediately if modifications and/or repairs are executed by persons lacking the neces-
sary authorisation from SAME DEUTZ-FAHR.
The warranty will be invalidated also in the following situations:
4

l Failure to observe and execute the maintenance programmes and the obligatory services prescribed by the manufacturer;
l Modifications carried out without the permission of SAME DEUTZ-FAHR;
l Repairs or maintenance work performed with non-original spare parts;
l Incorrect use of the tractor;
l Improper use of implements or incorrect mounting of implements;
l Use of lubricants/fuel with specifications other than the specifications prescribed and recommended by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR.
5

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR cannot be held liable for any damage to the tractor occurring due to improper use or malfunctions of other
equipment connected to the tractor.
The warranty covers exclusively damage and/or malfunctions of the tractor. Users are not entitled to any coverage in respect of lost
production, or presumed or proven damage occurring to implements coupled to the tractor.
Exclusions from the warranty:
6

l All consumable materials and materials subject to normal wear and tear (e.g. batteries, clutch/brake discs, lubricants, filters,
belts, fuel...);
l All consumable materials such as oil and fluids;
l Damage and/or breakages deriving from failure to observe/perform the operations prescribed in the periodic maintenance
programmes illustrated in the “Use and Maintenance Handbook”;
l Damage caused by incorrect repairs performed by unauthorised workshops or personnel;
7

l Damage due to lost production and/or loss of crops;

l Costs arising from the hire of replacement tractors during downtime of the tractor caused by repairs carried out under war-
ranty;
l Breakage of all types of glass, windows (doors, rear window, windscreen).

1.4.2 - Warranty procedure

Proper use of the tractor combined with regular maintenance is essential to prevent malfunctions. However, if malfunctions occur
8

during the period of validity of the warranty, observe the following procedure:
l contact the dealer from which the tractor was purchased immediately, specifying the tractor model and serial number. The end
customer is obliged to report all faults or defects concerning the tractor no later than 8 days after any such faults or defects
are first observed, on pain of invalidation of the warranty;
l provide your dealer with as much information as possible. The dealer should therefore know the number of operating hours,
9

the type of work performed by the tractor and the symptoms of the problem. Remember that standard maintenance operations
such as, for example, setup and adjustment of brakes/clutch, and the supply of service materials (oil, filters, fuel and antifreeze
liquid) are not covered by the warranty.
10

1-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.00.08

 IDENTIFICATION
1.4.3 - Transport
The dealer from which you purchased the tractor is solely responsible for the warranty so we strongly advise that all maintenance and

1
any repairs that may become necessary be entrusted to your dealer. If the tractor is moved to a different location, inform your dealer
so that the warranty responsibility can be transferred to the dealer closest to the area in which the tractor is being used.
If no arrangements are made with the new dealer, all services provided by the latter will be charged at standard rates.
1.4.4 - Post-warranty assistance
To get the most from your tractor it is essential to continue to carry out regular maintenance checks and servicing even after the end

2
of the warranty term. Consult your dealer for all the main service operations: have the tractor checked over by a skilled technician
between one service and the next.
Workshop technicians and dealers authorised by the SAME DEUTZ-FAHR group are fully trained and kept up to date on the tractors,
service procedures and the use of modern diagnostic instruments and equipment. They are regularly provided with service bulletins
and are in possession of all the relevant workshop manuals and all the necessary technical information to ensure that repairs and

3
service operations are performed to the highest standards.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.00.08

 IDENTIFICATION
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

1-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.00.08

 1
2
3
4
2 - SAFETY

5
6
7
8
9
10

2-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.00.09

 SAFETY
2.1 - INTRODUCTION
The symbol shown below, associated with the words Danger, Warning or Caution, used in this manual and on the decals affixed to
1

the tractor, indicates the degree of risk encountered. Failure to observe the Danger, Warning or Caution notices may result in serious
injury or death. These notices are accompanied by appropriate safety instructions, generally contained within a box.
DO NOT ignore these instructions; your safety is at risk!
2
3

Fig. 9

DANGER
Indicates an imminent risk of serious damage, injury or death.
4

WARNING
Indicates an imminent risk of serious damage, injury or death.
5

CAUTION
Indicates a potential risk of minor or moderate damage. The word also serves as a warning against actions that could
lead to a hazardous situation.

Make sure that anyone who uses the tractor has read this manual carefully and has fully understood the procedures for working in
complete safety.
6

Observe all the safety instructions given in this manual and the safety warning notices on the tractor itself.
Use the tractor in a safe and responsible manner.
Each time this symbol appears it signifies: Caution! Be careful! Your safety is at risk.
The instructions on the use of the tractor must be given to each person prior to using the tractor for the first
time and at least once a year thereafter.
7
8
9
10

2-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.00.10

 SAFETY
2.2 - PRACTICAL ADVICE ON SAFE WORKING PROCEDURES
Read this manual in its entirety before using the tractor; make sure you understand how to operate all the controls. All control systems

1
and devices have their operating limits, so make sure that you know the characteristics of the tractor as regards speed control, bra-
king, steering, stability and loading capacities before putting the tractor to work.
The safety information provided in this manual does not replace national or local safety regulations, which may be supported ������
by le-
gislative provisions or the terms of insurance agreements. Check, therefore, that your tractor is fitted with the correct equipment, as
prescribed by local laws and regulations.

2
It is not possible to foresee all potentially hazardous situations. The safety precautions and danger warnings in this manual cannot
therefore by themselves guarantee total safety. If you choose to operate and/or maintain the tractor in a manner that departs from
the prescribed methods, it is your responsibility to ensure that by doing so you are not putting the safety of yourself or others at risk.
Make sure that the tractor is not damaged or rendered unsafe by your chosen methods of use/maintenance.
Make sure that all personnel who are required to use the tractor have practical experience of how to operate the controls and that
they have read all the information regarding maintenance and safety regulations given in this Manual.

3
Make sure that all operators have read and understood this Manual. Failure to adhere to these recommendations could result in
serious injury or even death.
Ensure that all operators are in possession of an appropriate driving licence and meet the minimum age limits in accordance with the
requirements of local law.
2.2.1 - Protect the Environment

4
It is illegal to pollute wells, water courses and the soil. Use depots for the disposal
of wastes especially authorised for the collection of spent oil, thinners, etc. If in
doubt or for more detailed information consult your Dealer or local authorities.

5
6
Fig. 10

7
8
9
10

2-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.00.10

 SAFETY
2.3 - GENERAL SAFETY RULES
l In addition to the instructions given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual, observe all general safety and accident pre-
1

vention rules.
l Always follow the highway code when driving on public roads.
l Before starting work, familiarise yourself with all the controls and instruments and their respective functions. It may be too late
to do this once you are already working.
l The tractor is equipped with roll bar or cab designed to protect the operator.
l Before starting the engine, check that all the tractor controls are in neutral position.
2

l Always fasten the seat belt. If the tractor is fitted with a roll bar, the seat belt
should NOT be fastened when the roll bar is in the lowered position.
l Ensure that the seat belt is properly tensioned. Make sure that the seat belt
is not twisted or trapped in the seat frame before fastening it.
l Check the condition of the seat belt frequently; if damaged or worn it MUST
3

be replaced.
4

Fig. 11

l Start engine ONLY when seated in operator’s seat.

5
6

Fig. 12

l NEVER start the engine by shorting the starter motor connections to avoid
sudden unexpected movement of the tractor.
DANGER
7

Make sure that the rubber cover is installed on the starter motor
relay.
8

Fig. 13

l Before starting work check that the tractor/implement operating area is clear (e.g. check for the presence of persons, children,
etc.). Ensure that you always have a good field of view.
l Make sure that that there is plenty of space in all directions for tractor, cab, roll bar and implements.
9
10

2-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.00.11

 SAFETY
l Never start the engine in an closed space. Ensure the area is adequately
ventilated.

1
l Do not weld or heat any painted parts. Toxic fumes could be given off. Re-
move paint by abrasion first, before heating the part. Always perform these
operations in a suitable well-ventilated area.

2
Fig. 14

l Before refuelling always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

3
NEVER refuel when the engine is still hot
l NEVER refuel in the presence of naked flames or sparks: diesel fuel is
highly inflammable. Clean up any fuel spills immediately! Do not smoke
during refuelling.
l DO NOT fill the fuel tank right to the filler neck; always allow room for ex-
pansion of the fuel.

4
Fig. 15

Wear close-fitting clothing. Avoid wearing loose-fitting jackets, shirts or ties.

5
l
l Passengers may only be carried safely if the tractor is equipped with a proper passenger seat and all the relevant require-
ments of the local highway code are satisfied. If not, the carrying of passengers is PROHIBITED.
l DO NOT allow anyone to sit on the roll bar or on the fenders.
WARNING
DO NOT allow anyone to climb on the implement or other equipment, including trailers, except for certain harvesting

6
machines specifically designed to carry one or more persons during harvesting operations (not for transportation).

l Before leaving the operator position, remember to lower the 3-point linkage and/or any implement mounted on the tractor. Put
all controls in neutral, apply the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (on tractors with mechanical gearbox),
remove the key from the ignition switch and to turn the battery earth switch to “off” (where present).

7
l When the tractor is in operation, do not allow anyone to approach the drive
shaft, hooks, swinging drawbar, link arms, PTO shafts, lifting cylinders,
drive belts, pulleys or any other moving parts. Make sure that all protections
and guards are correctly installed in their respective locations.
DANGER
8

Perform maintenance work on the cardan shaft and on the power

take-off solely with the PTO disengaged, the engine switched off
and the ignition key removed.

Fig. 16
9
10

2-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.00.11

 SAFETY
l The tractor may be equipped with a radar for measuring ground speed. The
radar emits microwaves at low power, but it is anyway advisable to KEEP
1

CLEAR of the emission zone when the radar is operating.

2

Fig. 17

l Keep heat well away from pipes and hoses containing pressurised fluids.
3

Heating pressurised pipes and hoses can cause inflammable fluids to spray
out and cause serious burns to you and others nearby.
4

Fig. 18

Avoid contact with pesticides. Tractor cabs, when fitted, do NOT protect you against inhaling dangerous pesticides. Meticu-
5

lously follow the manufacturer’s directions for using and handling pesticides. Always wear the required personal protective
equipment (respirator, face mask, etc.) even in the cab.
6
7
8
9
10

2-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.00.12

 SAFETY
2.4 - ACCIDENT PREVENTION AND PERSONAL SAFETY
WARNING

1
Some of the illustrations in this manual show the tractor with panels or guards and panels removed for the sake of clar-
ity. Do not use the tractor unless these guards and panels are fitted correctly. If it is essential to remove these guards
or panels in order to repair the tractor, they MUST be refitted before starting the tractor.

2.4.1 - Safety clothing and equipment

2
Wear the appropriate protective clothing and safety equipment for the task in hand.
Equip yourself with the following:
l a hard hat
l safety spectacles or face shield visor
l protective gloves (neoprene for chemical products, leather for heavy work)
l ear defenders

3
l respirator or filter mask
l waterproof clothing
l reflective clothing
l safety footwear

4
Fig. 19

For safety reasons, it is also advisable to keep a fire extinguisher and first aid kit
in the tractor.

5
6
Fig. 20

DO NOT wear loose fitting clothing, jewellery, chains or other accessories. ALWAYS tie back long hair, which otherwise could become
entangled in control levers or in other parts of the tractor.
Do not wear headphones to listen to the radio or music while operating the tractor.

7
2.4.2 - Exposure to noise
The tractor and any implements mounted or attached to it constitute a source of noise, the intensity and frequency of which can be
measured using the appropriate instruments.
Anyone who uses the tractor must know that:
exposure to excessive and/or prolonged noise can cause serious damage, not just to the hearing but also to general health.
8
l

The higher the noise level (dbA) and the greater the duration of exposure, the higher the risk. The combination of both these
factors can expressed in the value LEP (level of personal exposure to noise).
l you therefore need to know the noise level generated by the tractor. For further information, refer to the “Technical Data” Sec-
tion in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
l the use of hearing protection is essential when the noise level exceeds a certain value and/or when operating the tractor for
prolonged periods. The point at which action is to be taken is generally when the level of personal exposure reaches or ex-
9

ceeds 85 db(A). Various types of protection are available, including ear defenders, ear plugs and helmets.
10

2-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.00.12

 SAFETY
2.4.3 - Protection and safety devices
Ensure that all the tractor safety devices are in places and properly secured. Make sure that all guards, protections and safety signals
1

are properly installed in accordance with specifications and are in good condition.
Some of these devices are NECESSARY and, depending on local regulations, may be legally required in order to operate your tractor
in safety.
DO NOT remove or disconnect any of the safety devices.
To improve the safety of the operator and other personnel in the vicinity, check that the tractor is equipped with:
2

l seat belts
l PTO shaft shield
l Rear-view mirrors
l SMV (slow moving vehicle) sign, additional safety guards, additional lights and decals.
l hazard warning triangle.

2.4.4 - Daily check of the tractor and implements

3

l Before starting work, check over the tractor and any attached implements and make sure that all the devices are in place and
in good working order.
l Carry out all the maintenance/adjustment operations indicated in the “Maintenance” Section of this Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual.
WARNING
4

Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is still hot. The radiator is under pressure when hot, and if
5

opened, boiling liquid and steam can escape and cause serious injury to yourself and anyone else in the vicin-
ity. Before removing the radiator cap, stop the engine and wait for the circuit to cool down.
l Inspect the roll bar/cab and seat belt for signs of damage.
Damaged protective devices and damaged/worn seat belts MUST be renewed.
l Make sure that any implements or attachments are installed correctly and, in the case of PTO-driven implements, that the PTO
shaft rpm matches the rotation speed of the implement.
6

l Check inflation pressures and check tyres for cuts or swellings. Worn or damaged tyres must be changed immediately.
l Check the efficiency of the service and parking brakes. If necessary, adjust the parking brake or have it adjusted by your dealer
or authorised service centre.
l Check that the PTO shaft shield and the cover are installed when the PTO is NOT in use.
l Check the hydraulic systems of the tractor and the implement. Any leaks or damaged parts MUST be repaired or replaced.
WARNING
7

Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death.
High-pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER
use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate
attention from medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
l Before pressurising the fuel or hydraulic circuits, check that the connections are tight and that the hoses, unions, etc, are not
damaged. Before disconnecting any components in the fuel or hydraulic circuits, make sure that circuit is depressurised.
8

2.4.5 - Boarding and alighting from the tractor

Climb up and down from the operator position slowly, facing the tractor, using the handrail and access steps.
9
10

2-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.00.13

 SAFETY
To avoid falling, always maintain three points of contact at a time (both hands on
the handrails and one foot on the steps or one hand on the handrail and both feet

1
on the steps).

2
Fig. 21

l DO NOT use the control levers for handholds.

DO NOT climb up using the pedals as footholds.

3
l
l DO NOT attempt to board or alight from the tractor when it is moving; wait until it has come to a complete stop.
l NEVER jump down from the tractor, unless in an emergency.
Carry out the following operations before alighting from the tractor:
l Apply the parking brake.
l Move all controls to the neutral position, (remember to disengage the PTO).

4
l Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor to the ground;
l Stop the engine.
l Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes; on tractors with hydraulic gearboxes, always place chocks under
the wheels.
l Remove the ignition key.
l Alight from the tractor.

5
2.4.6 - Parking the tractor
The tractor must be parked differently depending on the terrain and operational status of the engine:
l Parking the tractor with the engine off
l Parking the tractor with the engine running;
l Parking the tractor on steep slopes

6
Parking the tractor with the engine off
l Apply the handbrake.
l Move all controls to the neutral position;
l Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor, to the ground;
l Stop the engine;
Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes.

7
l

Parking the tractor with the engine running

l Check that no-one is in the vicinity of the tractor;
l Check that the tractor is parked on level ground;
l Apply the handbrake.
l Move all drive controls to the neutral position.
8

Parking the tractor on steep slopes

To park the tractor on slopes, proceed as indicated previously depending on the situation.
If it is necessary to park the tractor on a steep slope, even for a short time, position chocks under the rear wheels to prevent it from
moving. It is in any case preferable not to park the tractor on sloping terrain.
The chocks should normally be positioned under the rear wheels by a second person, who must stand to the side of the tractor at
9

all times.
If no assistant is available for this purpose, before alighting from the tractor the operator must fully engage the parking brake, check
that tractor is not moving, and then carefully position the chocks under the wheels while standing to the side of the tractor.
10

2-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.00.13

 SAFETY
2.4.7 - Cleaning the tractor
l Keep the area under the hood and the operator position clean.
1

l Clean the access steps, the pedals and the floor of the operator position. Clean up any oil and grease. Brush away dust and
mud. During winter months, remove snow and ice.
l Remove all tools, buckets, chains and hooks.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.00.13

 SAFETY
2.5 - OPERATION
l DO NOT use the tractor while under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

1
l The tractor speed must ALWAYS be adapted to suit the ground conditions. Avoid sharp turns when travelling up, down or
across slopes. Do not drive at high speed or corner with the differential lock engaged. When driving on slopes, never depress
the clutch or change gear.
l Only attach trailers and/or implements in the specified manner. The operation, steering and braking characteristics of the
tractor are different when coupled to implements and trailers and when ballast is fitted. Check that the steering and braking
characteristics are adequate.

2
l Before starting the engine, check that all the tractor controls are in neutral position. This is to prevent accidental movement of
the vehicle or starting of PTO-driven implements.
l Start engine ONLY when seated in operator’s seat.
l ONLY operate the controls when seated in the operator’s seat.
l Move over to the side of the road to allow faster vehicles to overtake. Before turning, use the direction indicator and slow down.
Ensure that all the lights on the tractor are kept clean.

3
l Make sure that the weight of a towed trailer without brakes does NOT EXCEED that of the tractor. The distance required for
the tractor to come to a stop increases with its speed as the inertia of the towed load increases, particularly on slopes.
l Only use the 3-point linkage to hitch implements designed for the purpose; do not use it as a towing hitch. For towing use the
rear towing hitch (the front hook is for use in emergencies only). The rear towing hitch must NEVER be set to a position that
is higher than the rear axle.
l The travel speed must be such as to allow complete control and stability of the tractor at all times. Where possible avoid oper-

4
ating tractor near ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce speed when turning on slopes and on rough, slippery or muddy
ground.
l For safety reasons, it is good practice to engage a suitably low gear before tackling an incline.
l DO NOT use ether based products to help start the engine when cold. Follow the instructions given in the “Cold starting”
heading.

2.5.1 - Start

5
Meticulously follow the procedures recommended in the Section “Use of the tractor” in this Operation and Maintenance Manual. The
“Using the Tractor” section describes the procedure for normal starting, cold starting and emergency engine starting with a second
battery.
In all cases, before starting the engine:

6
l adjust the seat to suit your requirements
l fasten the seat belt
l apply the parking brake
l put all levers in “neutral”
l for tractors equipped with a mechanical lift, check the position of the levers
In addition to the measures indicated above pay special attention to monitoring the indicator lights and the use of fluids for starting.

7
2.5.2 - Checking indicator lights
After starting, check all the indicator lights and instruments. Check that everything is functioning correctly.
If the tractor does not respond correctly to any of the controls, DO NOT use it until the fault has been rectified.
2.5.3 - Starting fluids
In cold climates, the tractor may be equipped with a thermostarter; for operating instructions, see the paragraph “Starting”.
8

DANGER
DO NOT use aerosol spray starting aids to start the tractor when the thermostarter is connected to the electrical sys-
tem. If ether comes into contact with the thermostarter it can cause an explosion and thus damage the engine and/or
cause serious injury.
9

2.5.4 - Auxiliary equipment

l Implements and trailers must only be attached to the tractor using the appropriate hitches or drawbars. Implements or trailers
may only be towed from the rear towing hitch (the front hitch is only to be used in emergencies). The height of the rear tow-
ing hitch should never be positioned at a height that exceeds that of the rear axle. Only use the 3-point linkage with suitable
implements; do not use it as a tow bar.
10

2-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.00.14

 SAFETY
WARNING
Do not stand or allow anyone else to stand between the tractor and the implement, unless the engine is shut off and
1

the key removed from the starter switch, the parking brake applied, a gear engaged and all attachments or implements
lowered to the ground.
l For applications using PTO-driven implements with the tractor stationary, always put the gearbox in neutral, apply the parking
brake and chock the wheels of the tractor and the implement itself. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter “Parking the tractor”.
2

l DO NOT use PTO drive shaft extensions or adapters that extend the drive shaft or universal joints beyond the protection of
the PTO shield.
l Only use attachments and implements approved by the tractor manufacturer.
DANGER
DO NOT attempt to uncouple hydraulic connections or adjust implements with the engine running and the PTO rotat-
3

ing. To do so could result in very serious injury or death.

l Check that the 3-point linkage is adjusted correctly (see “Adjustment of the 3-point linkage” in the Section “Use of the Tractor”)
in order to ensure that a sufficient number of threads are engaged on the threaded couplings.
l Meticulously follow the producer’s instructions when storing and handling chemicals. Also follow the instructions of the manu-
facturers of the equipment designed for the application of chemical products.
4

l Before using attachments or implements, read the relative Instruction Manual carefully and follow all the safety instructions.
WARNING
A front loader (with fork or bucket) must be fitted with a load restraining device (round bales, rolls of fencing, wire, etc,)
to prevent the load, when raised, from rolling down from the lift arms onto the driving position and crushing the driver.
Inadequately secured objects and loads may fall and injure persons in the vicinity of the tractor.
5

l DO NOT overload an attachment or trailed implement. Use the proper ballast weights to maintain the stability of the tractor.
l Use the safety chain when transporting implements to prevent them becoming detached from the drawbar. Using the appropri-
ate adapters, attach the chain to the towing hitch support or to another anchor point on the tractor. The chain should have only
enough slack to allow cornering. Use chains of suitable size and strength for the weight of the trailed implement.
l Make sure that each trailerable implement is equipped with a safety chain to connect it to the tractor.
6

2.5.5 - Towing safely

For the maximum towable loads, refer to the paragraph “Maximum towable loads in the Technical Data Section.
l Maintain a suitable speed taking into account the weight of the trailed load and the gradient, remembering that braking dis-
tances will be greater than with just the tractor. Trailed loads with or without brakes that are too heavy for the tractor or that
towed at too high speed may cause the operator to loose of control of the tractor.
7

l Always take into consideration the total weight of the implements and their loads.
WARNING
When a trailer is hitched to the tractor, before you leave the driving seat remember to put all the controls in neutral, ap-
ply the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (if the tractor has a mechanical transmission) and remove
the key from the starter switch. If the tractor is not parked on level ground, ALWAYS place chocks under the wheels of
8

both the tractor and the trailer. For further information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter “Working with
stationary implements” in the safety section of this manual.
l When trailers are hitched to the tractor, before you leave the operator seat remember to put all the controls in neutral, apply
the handbrake, switch off the engine, engage first gear (with mechanical transmissions) and remove the ignition key. ALWAYS
chock both the tractor and the trailer wheels. The best way to transport a tractor that has broken down is to transport it on a
9

low loader. Always secure the tractor to the loader bed with chains. Before transporting the tractor on a low loader or on a
railway wagon, make sure that the engine hood, doors, openable roof (if present) and windows are all closed and securely
fastened. Never tow the tractor at speeds in excess of 10 kph. An operator must stay in the operator position to steer and
brake the tractor.
10

2-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.00.15

 SAFETY
2.5.6 - Driving on the road
DANGER

1
When driving downhill never exceed the speed limit for the road and your vehicle and do not allow the engine speed
to exceed the maximum permissible rpm.

l Comply with the highway code, including regulations concerning speed limits, correct use of lights, hazard warning lights and
slow moving vehicle warning signs.

2
l When driving the tractor on the road, insert the connecting latch to lock the two brake pedals together. This is to ensure effec-
tive, even braking on both sides.
l Make sure that that there is plenty of headroom before passing under power lines, bridges, etc.
l Raise all implements to their lowest transport position and lock them in this position.
l Disengage the power take-off and the differential lock.
l Use the correct pin for the towing hitch and secure with its locking cotter.
l Make sure that all necessary outline markings and the hazard warning lights (if required by local regulations) are in place and

3
in working order.
l Clean all lights required for road use, front and rear, and make sure they are in working order.
l The SMV (Slow Moving Vehicle) sign, the rotating beacon, flashing lights or other high-visibility equipment must be used in
compliance with the statutory rules of the highway code.
l Fix the swinging towing hitch in a fixed position using the safety locks. If required by the rules of the highway code, affix the
appropriate safety warnings to the load.

4
l DO NOT use work lights during transfer on public roads.
l Make sure that the load does not obscure the hazard warning lights or other lights.
l The SMV notice must be visibly displayed on the rear of the tractor.
l Take extra care when driving on snow covered or icy roads.

2.5.7 - Overturning

5
WARNING
DO NOT disengage the clutch or change gear after starting to drive down a slope.

WARNING

6
Never tow semi-mounted implements, trailers or agricultural machines by attaching them to the top link of the three-
point linkage. This could cause the tractor to rear up or overturn backwards.

For safety reasons, the tractor is equipped with a roll-over protective structure (ROPS), in the form of a fixed roll bar or cab, and seat
belts.
In the event of overturning, grip the steering wheel firmly and do not attempt to

7
abandon the vehicle until it is completely stationary. If the cab doors do not open,
leave the operator position through the safety hatch identified by the relative de-
cals. 8

Fig. 22
9

The following precautions should be taken to prevent the possibility of overturning:

l Adjust the track width to suit the task in hand.
l If the tractor is equipped with a front loader, keep the bucket and load as low as possible
l A tractor with a front loader with loaded bucket should travel in reverse down a downhill slope and forwards on an uphill slope
l On rough terrain, moderate the speed to avoid losing control of the steering.
10

l To avoid roll over, always drive the tractor carefully and at a safe speed, especially on loose ground, when crossing ditches or
slopes or turning tight corners.
l DO NOT attempt to make tight turns at high speed.

2-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.00.16

 SAFETY
l Use extreme caution when working with the tractor on steep inclines.
l Always drive straight up or down slopes, as traversing slopes across the
1

gradient could cause the tractor to overturn.

2

Fig. 23
3

l When travelling up or down hill (on an incline) keep implements as close to the ground as possible.
l An unloaded tractor or a tractor with a rear-mounted implement should tackle uphill gradients slopes in reverse and downhill
gradients travelling forwards.
l DO NOT freewheel down a slope with the clutch disengaged or the gearbox in neutral.
l When carrying out tasks requiring high tractive force, engage 4WD, if available.
l Only loads suited to the tractor power output may be towed, see the Technical Data Section.
4

l When towing a load at transport speed or in the field, lock the drawbar in the central position and use the safety chain.
l NEVER tow by hitching to the top link of the 3-point linkage or from any point higher than the centre of the rear wheels.
l Always use the towing hitches approved by the manufacturer and the corresponding lock pins.
l Use front ballast weights to increase the stability of the tractor when towing heavy loads or to counterbalance a heavy rear-
mounted implement.
l If the tractor is hitched to a heavy load or a fixed object, improper use of the clutch can cause the tractor to overturn.
If the front of the tractor starts to rise up, reduce speed and, if necessary, disengage the clutch immediately.
5

l
l Reduce your speed when working on loose or slippery ground and when unseen hazards could be hidden by branches or
leaves.
l DO NOT use the tractor to herd animals.
6
7
8
9
10

2-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.00.16

 SAFETY
2.6 - MAINTENANCE
l DO NOT carry out any maintenance of the tractor with the engine running

1
or still hot, or with the tractor in motion.

2
Fig. 24

3
l Before carrying out repairs or adjustments consult your Dealer and, if necessary, arrange to have the work carried out by
specialised technicians.
l The implement and /or the tractor must be supported on suitable wooden blocks or stands. DO NOT use hydraulic jacks.
l Before carrying out adjustments and/or maintenance of the electrical system, disconnect the lead from the negative (-) battery
terminal.

4
l Incorrect connection of the battery terminals or incorrect connection of the
battery to a battery charger could damage the electrical system or even
cause the battery to explode. NEVER connect the battery terminals togeth-
er. The acid electrolyte contained in the battery is highly corrosive and can
cause burns or even blindness if it enters the eyes. In an enclosed space
it is toxic. Never smoke or allow a naked flame in the vicinity when filling or

5
topping up the battery with electrolyte. Always wear safety goggles when
carrying out operations on the battery.

Fig. 25

6
l Regularly check the brakes; keep the brake fluid reservoir topped up. Make sure that the brakes are always correctly adjusted,
especially when towing trailers.
l NEVER use your hands to trace an oil or fuel leak. Use instead a piece of
wood or cardboard for this purpose. Always discharge the pressure before
disconnecting any part of a pressurised circuit. If engine oil, hydraulic fluid

7
or any fluid from a pressurised circuit penetrates your skin, seek medical
assistance IMMEDIATELY.
8

Fig. 26

l Before carrying out any welding or repair work on a wheel or rim, ALWAYS remove the tyre first. In all cases, if you do not have
the necessary equipment or experience to do the job in complete safety, contact your Dealer.
9

l Periodically check the tightness of all the nuts and bolts, especially the wheel and rim nuts. Tighten to the specified torques
(for torque values, refer to the Maintenance Section).
10

2-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.00.17

 SAFETY
2.7 - SAFETY CAB
2.7.1 - Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS)
1

The term ROPS refers to the structural elements intended to protect the operator, secured by a seat belt, from being crushed in the
event of the vehicle overturning.
Today, all tractors must be equipped with safety cabs approved to international
OCDE/EEC standards. However, the presence of these safety devices is not in
itself sufficient to guarantee total protection if the operator does not ensure that it
2

is used correctly.
3

Fig. 27

WARNING
The degree of protection afforded by the safety cab will be reduced if the device is damaged or modified. If the cab
4

has been involved in accident in which the tractor overturned, or it has been modified in any way, it should be replaced
immediately.
Important:
The safety cab, the operator’s seat and all the fixings of the protective system must be thoroughly checked after any
type of accident; all damaged parts must be renewed. DO NOT attempt to repair or weld the ROPS. NEVER make
5

any modifications to the safety cab. For example, it is strictly forbidden to drill or weld the cab in order to install ac-
cessories.

2.7.2 - Emergency exits

If exit from the cab side doors is blocked (following an accident or vehicle overturn)
6

the alternative safety exits are indicated by decals.

7

Fig. 28

The possible safety exits are:

8

l Rear window hatch (All tractors)

l Front window (for versions with openable front window).

2.7.3 - Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS)

The expression F.O.P.S. (Falling Object Protective Structure): refers to a structure installed on the tractor intended to eliminate or
9

reduce the risk to the operator of injury from falling objects during normal use of the vehicle.
DANGER
This tractor is not equipped with a FOPS. If work must be performed in areas subject to the risk of falling objects from
above, consult your dealer before starting work so that the tractor can be equipped with an appropriate protective
structure.
10

2-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.00.18

 SAFETY
2.7.4 - Operator Protective Structure (OPS)
OPS (Operator Protective Structure) identifies the protective structure installed on a tractor in order to minimise risk of operator injury

1
caused by objects penetrating into the operator position area.
DANGER
This tractor is not equipped with an OPS. If work must be performed in areas subject to the risk of the penetration of
objects into the operator position, consult your dealer before starting work so that the tractor can be equipped with an
appropriate protective structure.

2
2.7.5 - Use of hazardous substances
European standard EN 15695-1 is applicable to the cabs of agricultural or forestry tractors and self-propelled sprayers.
The purpose of the standard is to limit the exposure of the operator (driver) to hazardous substances when applying plant protection
products and liquid fertilisers.
In accordance with the stipulations of EN 15695-1 regarding cab classification, measurement of the internal positive pres-
�����

3
sure differential must be carried out in conformance with ISO 14269-5:
l the engine operating at nominal speed;
l the maximum quantity of air drawn from outside the cab (recirculation closed);
l fan set to maximum speed.
The following terms and definitions are applied:

4
l Hazardous substances: substances such as dust, vapours and aerosols, with the exception of fumigants which can be dis-
persed during the application of plant protection products and liquid fertilisers, which may have a harmful effect on the opera-
tor.
m Dust: general term identifying solid air-borne particles, finely divided and sedimented
m aerosol: suspension of solid, liquid or solid and liquid particulate in a gaseous medium with a negligible fall rate (gener-

5
ally less than 0.25 ms-1)
m Vapour: gaseous phase of a substance whose liquid or solid state is stable at 20° C and 1 bar (absolute).

This cab, even when closed, does not protect against the inhalation of hazardous substances. If the manufacturer’s instructions for
using these substances recommend personal protective equipment, wear the equipment even in the cab.
DANGER

6
Use all the personal protective equipment suitable for the tasks in hand and relative substances, in compliance with
the requirements of statutory legislation in your country.

Cabs are classified as follows:

l Category 1: The cab does not provide protection against hazardous substances.
Category 2: The cab provides protection exclusively from dust.

7
l
l Category 3: The cab provides protection from dust and aerosol.
l Category 4: The cab provides protection from dust, aerosol and chemical vapours.
The classification category, as stipulated by ISO 14269-5, of the cab installed on this range of tractors is given below:
l the engine operating at nominal speed
l the maximum quantity of air drawn from outside the cab (recirculation closed)
8
l with fan at maximum speed
Table 2 - Technical data
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

14 - CAB / ROPS
9

Hazardous substances protection 2 2 2

category CAB
10

2-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.00.19

 SAFETY
Avoid contact with pesticides
This cab, even when closed, does not protect against the inhalation of hazardous pesticides. If the manufacturer’s instructions for use
1

of the pesticide recommend personal protective equipment, wear the equipment even in the cab.
Before leaving the cab, ensure you are wearing all the personal protective equipment indicated in the instructions for use of the
substance.
Before entering the cab, remove all contaminated clothing and footwear in order to keep the cab interior clean.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.00.19

 SAFETY
2.8 - DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL OF THE TRACTOR
2.8.1 - Decommissioning the tractor

1
When the tractor becomes inoperative, transfer it to a suitable location to take it out of service and place a clearly visible notice on it
informing of its decommissioned status.
2.8.2 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor
The tractor contains:

2
l Fluids (hydraulic system, cooling system, etc.);
l Gas (air conditioning system, accumulators, etc.);
l Acid (batteries);
l Heavy components of the machine;
CAUTION
The tractor must be dismantled exclusively by authorised and qualified companies.

3
Take the tractor directly to the dealer if you intend to purchase a new tractor.
Legislation in some countries state that the organisation accepting the tractor (complete with license plates, logbook and owner’s
certificate or supplementary document) must, at the time of consignment of the tractor, issue an attestation of receipt that relieves

4
the user from any responsibility after consignment of the tractor (fines, accidents, etc.). The document must also show details of the
authorisation of the breaker.
The tractor is composed of steel, aluminium and plastic components: therefore the majority of the material can be recycled so the
scrapping procedure should involve sorting of the materials for subsequent reuse or differentiated disposal.
IMPORTANT

5
None of the tractor materials are toxic or harmful so they can be handled without taking precautions.

WARNING
Lubricants and fuel must be disposed of in accordance with environmental regulations.

6
WARNING
Use exclusively suitable tools and lifting devices, in compliance with the relevant regulations and legislation.

7
8
9
10

2-19

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 19 20/09/2012 19.00.20

 SAFETY
2.9 - SAFETY WARNING NOTICES
2.9.1 - Adhesive safety warning decals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Fig. 29

WARNING
ALWAYS keep safety labels clean and legible. Replace any missing, damaged or paint-obliterated labels. Replace-
ment labels can be ordered from your Dealer. The locations of safety labels and the parts codes for ordering them are
10

specified in this chapter. When replacing a part that carries a safety label, make sure that a label of the same type is
applied to the new part. Do not use fuel or solvents etc. to clean safety labels. Use a clean cloth dampened in soapy
water.

2-20

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 20 20/09/2012 19.00.21

 SAFETY
Position of safety decals
1. Position: On the rear PTO casing.

1
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.274.0 - Take great care when using the PTO.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
manual

2
3
Fig. 30
2. Position: on the starter motor.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.295.0 - Do not board the tractor when it is moving. Use cau-

4
tion when working on the electrical system Discon-
nect the negative lead from the battery before remov-
ing the cover over the solenoid valves and working on
the electrical system.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
manual

5
Fig. 31
3. Position: On the inside of the RH window next to the pillar.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.296.0 - Always fasten the seat belt.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance

6
manual

4. Position: On the front RH windshield, at the bottom.

Fig. 32
7
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.272.0 - Read and comply with the operating instructions and
8

safety precautions prior to operation.

9
10

Fig. 33

2-21

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 21 20/09/2012 19.00.21

 SAFETY
5. Position: On the brake fluid reservoir.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.297.0 - Before topping up the brake oil, refer to the user and
1

maintenance manual

Fig. 34
2

6. Position: on the right and left rear fenders.

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.271.0 DANGER Stand clear when using controls to move 3 point
hitch.
3

Fig. 35
7. Position: on right and left side of the engine radiator.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.273.0 DANGER Keep hands clear of fan and belts while engine is
running.
4
5

Fig. 36
6

8. Position: engine cooling circuit expansion tank.

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.280.0 DANGER Do not remove the cap of the expansion tank cap
when the engine is hot because the circuit is pres-
surised and can injure the operator.
Read the instructions in the Operation and Mainte-
7

nance Manual.
8

Fig. 37
9
10

2-22

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 22 20/09/2012 19.00.21

 SAFETY
9. Position: on the engine cooling system radiator.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.329.0 CAUTION Consult the Operation and Maintenance manual to

1
identify the type of liquid to be used in the cooling
system.

2
3
Fig. 38
10. Position: On the rear window hatch.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.450.0 - Indicates the emergency exit to use if it is not possible

4
to exit the cab through the doors:

Fig. 39
11. Position: on the front grille of the hood.

5
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.465.0 - General hazard warning! Shearing hazard! Keep
clear of moving parts! Some parts of the machine can
reach very high temperatures, with a consequent risk
of burns!

6
Fig. 40
12. Position: On right and left sides of the engine radiator, the right and left side panels, rear remote valves.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.449.0 DANGER Danger. Very hot parts! Burns hazard!

7
8

Fig. 41
9
10

2-23

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 23 20/09/2012 19.00.22

 SAFETY
13. Position: On the LH front pillar.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.471.0 IMPORTANT During field work, only the operator must be inside the
1

cab. The presence of a passenger in the cab is only

permitted during road transport.
2

Fig. 42
14. Position: On the LH rear pillar.
3

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

2.9939.448.0 - Indicates the position in which the fire extinguisher
must be installed.
4
5

Fig. 43
6
7
8
9
10

2-24

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 24 20/09/2012 19.00.22

 SAFETY
2.9.2 - Adhesive safety warning decals - North America version

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Fig. 44
9

WARNING
ALWAYS keep safety labels clean and legible. Replace any missing, damaged or paint-obliterated labels. Replace-
ment labels can be ordered from your Dealer. The locations of safety labels and the parts codes for ordering them are
specified in this chapter. When replacing a part that carries a safety label, make sure that a label of the same type is
applied to the new part. Do not use fuel or solvents etc. to clean safety labels. Use a clean cloth dampened in soapy
10

water.
Positions of safety decals

2-25

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 25 20/09/2012 19.00.23

 SAFETY
1. Position: RH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.852.0/10 IMPORTANT PRE-HEAT- ROTATE THE KEY TO PRE-HEATING POSITION.
1

ING OPERATION PUSH PRE-HEATING BUTTON, START THE EN-

GINE ONLY WHEN PILOT LAMP IS OFF.

Fig. 45
2. Position: LH and RH side of towing hitch support
2

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

2.9929.304.0/10 - 540 or 1000 rpm PTO
1. Locate the drawbar attachment hole as follows
2. Secure the drawbar in line with the PTO output
shaft.
Fig. 46
3. Align the PTO drive shaft with the drawbar.
3

4. Do not operate the PTO at a speed greater than

the rated speed of the PTO shaft of 540 or 1000 rpm.
5. Read and follow the full instructions given in the
user and maintenance manual for safe operation and
accident prevention
3. Position: RH and LH rear fender
4

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

2.9929.790.0 DANGER/WARNING Use only approved drawbars for towing. Lower the
bottom links of the 3 point linkage to or below the
horizontal. Stand well clear when operating the con-
trols for moving the 3 point linkage.
5

Fig. 47
4. Position: RH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.544.0/10 IMPORTANT Do not use ether with manifold pre-heater or thermo-
start attachment.
6

Ether may ignite and/or explode resulting in burning

of the air cleaner hose or filter element, and cause
personal injury.

Fig. 48
5. Position: Coolant expansion tank
7

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

2.9929.792.0 IMPORTANT High pressure steam and hot water. Remove filler cap
with extreme care.

Fig. 49
8
9
10

2-26

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 26 20/09/2012 19.00.24

 SAFETY
6. Position: LH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.289.0 IMPORTANT 1. Read the user and maintenance manual before

1
operating this tractor
2. Keep all guards in place
3. Fasten the seat belt when using a tractor with
ROPS installed (rollover protection)
4. Attach implements only to the drawbar and attach-
ment points indicated in the user and maintenance

2
manual
5. Make sure no one is in the vicinity of the tractor
when starting the engine or implement
6. Do not allow other persons to board the tractor
7. Keep your hands, feet and clothing away from Fig. 50
moving parts

3
8. Start the tractor gradually, and do not set off, stop
or turn jerkily
9. If possible, do not use the tractor near to ditches,
ridges or holes
10. Reduce speed and use caution when turning,
applying the brakes, driving around obstacles or

4
dangerous areas and when driving on rough, muddy
or slippery surfaces.
7. Position: LH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.290.0/10 IMPORTANT 11. Stay clear of slopes that are too steep for safe
operation.

5
12. On tractors equipped with LH and RH brakes,
latch the pedals together when traveling at high
speed.
13. Use appropriate lights and signaling when driving
the tractor (and tools) on the road
14. When tractor is has come to a complete stop, dis-

6
engage the PTO, lower the implement to the ground
and apply the parking brake or park lock before alight-
ing from the tractor or carrying any maintenance or Fig. 51
adjustments on the tractor or implement.
15. When working on tools requiring adjustment in the
raised position or which cannot be lowered, always

7
place a block or support under the tool
8. Position: Battery RH side
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.754.0 IMPORTANT Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals recog-
nised by the State of California as causes of cancer
8
and damage to the reproductive system. Wash hands
after handling.

Fig. 52
9. Position: LH side of tractor near starter motor
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
9

2.9929.854.0 DANGER Start only when seated in driving position with trans-
mission and PTO. in neutral.
Starting in gear can lead to fatal accidents.
10

Fig. 53

2-27

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 27 20/09/2012 19.00.25

 SAFETY
10. Position: LH side of engine near alternator - LH and RH side of radiator
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.791.0 IMPORTANT Beware of hot parts.
1

To avoid personal injury, keep all shields, covers and

guards in place while engine is running.
2
3
4

Fig. 54
11. Position: LH and RH side of cooling fan support
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.794.0 IMPORTANT Keep hands clear of fan and belts while engine is
running.
5
6

Fig. 55
12. Position: LH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
7

2.9929.813.0 IMPORTANT Engage the parking brake to prevent tractor move-

ment with the engine off.
The clutch WILL NOT hold the tractor in place, even
though transmission is in gear. Unexpected tractor
movement may cause serious injury.
8

Fig. 56
9
10

2-28

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 28 20/09/2012 19.00.26

 SAFETY
13. Position: Rear area of the tractor, near PTO. - Front area of the tractor, near front PTO. only for tractors equipped with
front PTO. PTO)

1
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.856.0 DANGER Pull only from approved drawbar or lower links of 3
point linkage at horizontal position or below.
Contact with the rotating driveline can cause serious
or even fatal injury.
Keep all driveline, tractor and equipment shields in
place during operation.

2
Fig. 57
14. Position: RH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9929.281.0/10 IMPORTANT This tractor is fitted with a disengagable PTO. To
avoid all risk of personal injury:

3
1. Match the PTO speed to the implement 2. Keep
all guards in place 3. Centre and lock the drawbar 4.
Engage the PTO gradually Fig. 58
15. Position: LH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453235 IMPORTANT USE SEAT BELT Keep seat belt adjusted snugly but

4
not too tight.
Do not jump if tractor tips.

5
6
Fig. 59
16. Position: RH front pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

7
04453297 IMPORTANT To reduce the risk of damage to the transmission
when the tractor is towed without its engine running:
disengage the creep speed - put the gearbox manu-
ally in neutral - do not tow at speeds over 10 km/h -
do not tow for distances in excess of 16 km.
8

Fig. 60
17. Position: RH front pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453298 IMPORTANT Disengage differential locks for road transport or
9

turning.

Fig. 61
10

2-29

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 29 20/09/2012 19.00.26

 SAFETY
18. Position: RH central pillar inside the cab
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453299 IMPORTANT For road transport lock selective hydraulic valves in
1

neutral position.

Fig. 62
2

19. Position: RH central pillar inside the cab

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453230 - Ignition key
3

Fig. 63
20. Position: In cab on RH door, near multifunction armrest
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453239 - Main gear lever
4
5

Fig. 64
21. Position: In cab on RH door, near gear lever
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
6

04453240 - Gear shift

7

Fig. 65
22. Position: In cab on RH door, near joystick
8

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

04453241 - PTO engagement switch
9

Fig. 66
10

2-30

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 30 20/09/2012 19.00.26

 SAFETY
23. Position: In cab on RH console, near PTO buttons.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453242 - PTO lever lock and release

1
2
Fig. 67
24. Position: Battery RH side - Exterior of cab rear lower window
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

3
04453237 IMPORTANT Disconnect battery cables prior electric welding on
tractor or attached implements. Connect ground close
to welding area.

Fig. 68

4
25. Position: Exterior of cab rear lower window - LH side of engine near oil dipstick
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453236 IMPORTANT Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the use of the
proper oil.

5
Fig. 69
26. Position: Exterior of cab rear lower window - LH side of tractor rear axle - Front area of tractor near front lift accumu-
lators (only for tractors equipped with front lift)
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453231 IMPORTANT Accumulator contains gas and oil under pressure.

6
See Operator’s Manual for service information.

7
Fig. 70
8
9
10

2-31

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 31 20/09/2012 19.00.27

 SAFETY
27. Position: Inside LH and RH fenders - Rear LH area of front axle
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453232 IMPORTANT Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate skin
1

and cause serious injury. See Operator’s Manual for

proper service procedures.
2

Fig. 71
3

28. Position: LH and RH side of front support

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453234 IMPORTANT Stay clear of this area when the engine is running.
4

Fig. 72
29. Position: LH and RH side of front lift (only tractors equipped with front lift)
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
04453247 IMPORTANT Stand clear when using controls to move 3 point
hitch.
5
6

Fig. 73
30. Position: In cab on RH console, near PTO buttons.
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
7

04453243 - Remote valve control lever locking positions

8
9

Fig. 74
10

2-32

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 32 20/09/2012 19.00.27

 1
2
3
4
3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
TRACTOR

5
6
7
8
9
10

3-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.00.27

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.1 - EXTERIOR VIEWS OF THE TRACTOR
3.1.1 - External views
1
2
3
4
5

Fig. 75 - Front view of tractor

6
7
8
9

Fig. 76 - Rear view of tractor

10

3-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.00.28

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.2 - ACCESS TO THE DRIVING POSITION
3.2.1 - Access to the driving position

1
Access steps and handrail
Access to the cab is facilitated by wide steps (1) with four non-slip treads and by
two handrails (2), one on the door and the on the cab pillar next to the door lock.

2
3
Fig. 77

External lock
Wide doors fitted with key operated locks ensure easy entry into the cab.
Turn the key to the right to lock the door and to the left to unlock it.

4
Double-locking handles help prevent accidental opening of the doors.
When unlocked, press button (1) to open the doors from the outside.

5
Fig. 78

Internal lock

6
Turn the red handle (1) clockwise to open the doors from inside the cab.

7
8
Fig. 79
9
10

3-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.00.29

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Door safety locks
To prevent accidental opening, lock the doors by means of the lever under the
1

door lock.

To lock and unlock the doors proceed as follows:

1. Door unlocked - opening from inside and outside
2. Door locked - opening from outside only
2

Fig. 80
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.00.29

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.3 - OPERATOR SEAT
3.3.1 - Operator seats

1
The following operator seats may be installed on this tractor:
l MSG95A/721 seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery.
l MSG95G/721 seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery.

3.3.2 - “MSG95A/721” seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery

2
DANGER
Never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

The generously sized operator’s seat with pneumatic suspension is contoured to provide good all-round support and is upholstered
in non-slip material.

3
The seat features automatic self-adjustment to the operator’s weight, plus adjustments for forward/backward positioning, backrest
angle and lumbar support; it can therefore be perfectly adjusted to suit the weight and stature of the operator.
The seat is equipped with electro-pneumatic suspension to ensure maximum comfort, even when travelling at high speeds over
rough ground; the operator rides on a cushion of air that protects him from all bumps and jolts.
The system incorporates a compressor housed inside the seat base that automatically adjusts the suspension to suit the weight of

4
the operator.

5
6
7
8

Fig. 81 - View of “MSG95A/721” seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery
Key
1. Adjustable and removable head restraint
2. Folding armrest
3. Control for forward/backward adjustment of the seat cradle
9

4. Control for angle adjustment of the seat cradle

5. Lever for left-right seat rotation (20°)
6. Lever for horizontal vibration damping control
7. Lever for adjustment of the backrest angle
8. Seat spring firmness adjustment lever
9. Lever for forward/backward adjustment of the seat support
10

10. Lever for automatic adjustment of seat height (also in accordance with the weight of the operator)
11. Upper lumbar adjustment button

3-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.00.30

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2
3
4

Fig. 81 - View of “MSG95A/721” seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery
12. Lower lumbar adjustment button
5

Seat adjustments
1. Adjustment of the head restraint
Pull up head restraint (1) to adjust the height. To completely remove the
head restraint, pull upwards and then release the locking tabs.
6
7

Fig. 82
2. Adjusting the LH armrest
Fold LH armrest (2) upwards to lock it in a vertical position if not required
by the operator.
8
9

Fig. 83
10

3-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.00.32

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3. Forward/backward adjustment of seat cradle
Use lever (3), to move the seat cradle forward or backwards to suit the

1
stature and personal preference of the operator.

2
Fig. 84
4. Angle adjustment of seat cradle
Use lever (4), to tilt the seat cradle forward or backwards to suit the stature

3
and personal preference of the operator.

4
Fig. 85
5. Lever for right/left seat rotation adjustment

5
Pull lever (5) to rotate the seat by 20° (right-left) to avoid excessive twist-
ing of the trunk when controlling the implement at the rear of the cab and
facilitate boarding and alighting.
IMPORTANT
the seat must be kept locked in the central position while

6
driving the tractor

Fig. 86
6. Adjustment of horizontal vibration damping control

7
Under certain operating conditions (e.g. driving with trailer), we would rec-
ommend engaging the horizontal suspension system (6). This enables the
operator’s seat suspension to better absorb jolts and impacts in the trac-
tor’s direction of the travel.
m Position 1 = Horizontal vibration damping ON
8
m Position 2 = Horizontal vibration damping OFF

Fig. 87
9
10

3-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.00.36

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
7. Adjustment of the backrest angle
Pull lever (7) upwards to alter the backrest angle according to the prefer-
1

ence of the operator.

2

Fig. 88
8. Adjusting seat spring firmness
The seat suspension can be adjusted to suit the road surface or the charac-
3

teristics of the terrain. The level of suspension comfort can be set individu-
ally. Turn lever (8) to the required setting and release.
4

Fig. 89
9. Longitudinal adjustment
5

Pull lever (9) to slide the seat forwards or backwards to suit the stature and
personal preference of the operator.
6

Fig. 90
10. Automatic adjustment of seat height according to the weight of the operator
7

Pull lever (10) upwards to enable the compressor, which raises the seat to
the desired height. Push the lever down to deflate the air cushion inside the
shock absorber and lower the seat to the desired position.
8

Fig. 91
9
10

3-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.00.40

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
11. Adjustment of the upper lumbar support
To adjust the lumbar support in the upper part of the backrest, press the

1
upper switch. This improves the comfort of the seat and thus the efficiency
of the operator.
m +: The compressor inflates the internal cushion
m -: The compressor deflates the internal cushion

2
Fig. 92
12. Adjustment of the lower lumbar support
To adjust the lumbar support in the lower part of the backrest, press the

3
lower switch. This improves the comfort of the seat and thus the efficiency
of the operator.
m +: The compressor inflates the internal cushion
m -: The compressor deflates the internal cushion

4
Fig. 93

3.3.3 - GRAMMER MSG95G/721 seat with pneumatic suspension

5
DANGER
Never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

The generously sized operator’s seat with pneumatic suspension is contoured to provide good all-round support and is upholstered

6
in non-slip material.
The seat features automatic self-adjustment to the driver’s weight, plus adjustments for forward/backward positioning, backrest angle
and lumbar support; it can therefore be perfectly adjusted to suit the weight and stature of the operator.
It is equipped with electro-pneumatic suspension to ensure maximum comfort, even when travelling at high speeds over rough
ground; the operator rides on a cushion of air that protects him from all bumps and jolts.

7
The system incorporates a compressor housed inside the seat base that automatically adjusts the suspension to suit the weight of
the operator.
8
9
10

3-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.00.41

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2
3
4

Fig. 94 - View of “GRAMMER MSG95G/721” seat with pneumatic suspension

5

1. Lever for lengthways adjustment

2. Lever for horizontal vibration damping control
3. Lever for automatic adjustment of seat height according to the weight of the driver
4. Lever for adjustment of the backrest angle
5. Knob for adjustment of backrest lumbar support
6. Folding armrest
6

7. Adjustable and removable head restraint

IMPORTANT
A buzzer alarm sounds for approximately 10 seconds if the engine is switched off without having first fully pulled up the
parking brake lever. The alarm also sounds if the driver leaves his seat while the engine is running.
7

Seat adjustments
1. Longitudinal adjustment
Pull up on the lever (1) to move the seat forwards or backwards to suit the
stature and personal preference of the driver.
8
9

Fig. 95
10

3-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.00.43

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
2. Horizontal vibration damping
Pull lever (2) forwards to enable the horizontal oscillation damping device,

1
to disable the device pull the lever backwards.

2
Fig. 96
3. Automatic adjustment of seat height according to the weight of the driver
Pull lever (3) upwards to enable the compressor, which raises the seat to

3
the desired height. Push the lever down to empty the air cushion inside the
shock absorber and the seat is lowered to the desired position.

4
Fig. 97
4. Adjustment of the backrest angle

5
Pull lever (4) upwards to alter the backrest angle according to the prefer-
ence of the operator.

6
Fig. 98
5. Adjustment of backrest lumbar support

7
Turn the knob (5) to increase or reduce the depth of lumbar support.

Fig. 99
9
10

3-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.00.46

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
6. Adjusting the multifunction armrest
If preferred, the armrest (6) may be moved to the vertical position, where it
1

will lock in place.

2

Fig. 100
7. Adjustment of the head restraint
Pull the head restraint (7) upwards to adjust its height. To completely re-
3

move the head restraint, pull upwards and then release the locking tabs.
4

Fig. 101

3.3.4 - Multifunction armrest - adjustment

5

The multifunction armrest is adjustable.

To adjust proceed as shown below:
l loosen knobs (1) under multifunction armrest (2);
l move armrest to the required position ;
re-tighten knobs (1).
6

l
7

Fig. 102

3.3.5 - Seat belt

The seat belt is adjustable. Carry out the following adjustments before starting the engine.
8

To fasten the seat belt, insert blade (1) into slot (2).
To release the seat belt, press button (3).
9
10

Fig. 103

3-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.00.47

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
The length of the seat belt can be adjusted as follows:
l pull end (4) to shorten the belt

1
2
Fig. 104

l pull end (5) to lengthen the belt

3
4
Fig. 105

CAUTION

5
Always fasten your seat belt. The use of a seat belt reduces the risk of serious injury in case of an accident.

3.3.6 - Passenger seat

WARNING

6
Your tractor is designed to carry just one person. In some countries it is permitted to fit a passenger seat supplied by
the manufacturer. Check first whether the tractor is homologated to carry a passenger.

DANGER
The carrying of passengers is not permitted unless the tractor is equipped with a suitable seat. When using the pas-

7
senger seat, observe local regulations, including those of the insurance company regarding injury at work.

WARNING
During field work, only the operator must be inside the cab.
8

The passenger seat is located on the left-hand side of the cab; it can be tilted
upwards when not in use to provide more space in the cab.
If the passenger seat is used, make sure that all applicable local laws and the
conditions of your insurance policy are complied with.
9
10

Fig. 106

3-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.00.47

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.3.7 - Passenger seat belt
The passenger seat is equipped with a seat belt.
1

Always fasten your seat belt to reduce the risk of serious injury in case of an ac-
cident. To fasten the seat belt, insert blade (1) into slot (2).
To release the seat belt, press button (3).
2

Fig. 107
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.00.47

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4 - STEERING WHEEL
3.4.1 - Adjusting the steering wheel

1
DANGER
Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. Check that the steering wheel is firmly fixed in position
before driving the tractor.

The steering wheel is telescopic to allow both rake and height adjustment.

2
To adjust the height, turn knob (1) anticlockwise to release the steering column,
position the steering wheel at the desired height and then lock the steering column
by turning the knob clockwise.

3
4
Fig. 108

To adjust the angle of the steering wheel, pull lever (2) down and hold it in posi-
tion to release the steering column; now adjust the steering wheel angle in the
longitudinal direction and then release the lever, which will automatically return to
the locked position.

5
6
Fig. 109

7
8
9
10

3-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.00.48

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.5 - REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
3.5.1 - External rear-view mirrors
1

CAUTION
If one or both rear-view mirrors is/are accidentally folded inwards (e.g. as the result of an impact), stop the tractor im-
mediately and return the mirror/s to the correct position.

For maximum control when performing difficult manoeuvres it is vital that the rear-view mirrors are correctly adjusted.
2

Adjust both rear-view mirrors.

Position the mirrors to obtain a clear view of the side of the tractor and the implement from the driving seat.
Horizontal adjustment
Loosen knob (1) and adjust the length of the arm. Retighten the knob after adjust-
ment.
3
4

Fig. 110

Vertical adjustment
Tilt the mirror manually to obtain the best view from the operator’s seat.
5
6

Fig. 111

The mirror arms rotate about their pivots and can be turned inwards towards the
7

tractor to reduce the overall width of the vehicle.

As they rotate, the mirror arms pass through preset intermediate positions.
8

Fig. 112

3.5.2 - Interior rear-view mirrors

9

For maximum control when performing difficult manoeuvres it is vital that the rear-view mirrors are correctly adjusted.
10

3-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.00.48

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
The interior rear-view mirrors are located at the front of the cab on the left and
right side.

1
Adjust both rear-view mirrors.
Position the mirrors to obtain a clear view of the rear of the tractor and the imple-
ment from the operator seat.

2
Fig. 113

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.00.48

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.6 - INSTRUMENTS AND TRACTOR CONTROLS
3.6.1 - Instruments and controls
1
2
3
4
5
6

Fig. 114 - Panoramic view of cab

1. Instrument panel
2. Hydraulic power shuttle control lever
3. Steering wheel
4. Windscreen washer-wiper, horn and high beam headlights stalk
7

5. Controls on the instrument panel

6. Control pedals
7. Compressed air pressure gauge (only for tractors equipped with air trailer braking)
8. POWERSHIFT transmission display
9. Multifunction armrest
10. Main gear lever
8

11. Ashtray
12. Handbrake control
13. Cigar lighter/12V outlet socket
14. Cab heating, ventilation and A/C system control
15. Electronic rear lift control panel
16. Starter switch
17. 540/1000 PTO selector
9

18. Normal/Economy PTO selector

19. Remote valves control
10

3-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.00.49

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.6.2 - Instrument panel

1
2
3
4
Fig. 115 - View of instrument panel

5
1. Rev counter
2. Coolant temperature gauge
3. Fuel gauge
4. Hour meter
5. Speedometer
6. Front PTO speed indicator
7. Rear PTO speed indicator

6
8. Wheelslip indicator (tractors equipped with radar sensor only)
9. Indicator lights
10. On-board display
Rev counter
The engine tachometer indicates the speed of rotation of the engine in revolutions

7
per minute (rpm).
The instrument panel is equipped with an analogue rev counter.
8

Fig. 116
9
10

3-19

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 19 20/09/2012 19.00.50

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Coolant temperature gauge
The dial indicates the temperature of the engine coolant.
1

The coloured zones indicate the different coolant temperature ranges:

l green area = normal operating temperature
l red area = engine overheating

Never accelerate to max revs with a cold engine, wait until the engine reaches
2

normal operating temperature (the arrow must enter the green zone).
Engine overheating is signalled also by the on-board display with a specific icon
and by an audible signal.

Fig. 117
3

WARNING
If the needle moves into the red section, switch off the engine immediately.

Fuel gauge
4

This gauge indicates the level of fuel in the fuel tank.

When the needle enters the red section of the scale this indicates “LOW FUEL”.
Low fuel level is signalled also by the on-board display by means of a specific icon
that illuminates when the quantity of fuel falls below approximately 50 litres.
5

Fig. 118
6

Table 3 - Technical data

AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

13 - FUEL TANK
7

Tank capacity litres 270 270 270

CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

Hour meter
8

When the engine is running, indicates the number of tractor operating hours.
9
10

Fig. 119

3-20

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 20 20/09/2012 19.00.50

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Speedometer
Indicates the ground speed in km/h or in mph.

1
(the value is given in “km/h” or “mph” depending on the factory setting for the
intended market).

2
Fig. 120

3
Front PTO speed indicator
When the front PTO is activated, the display switches on and shows the relative
shaft rotation speed.

4
5
Fig. 121

Rear PTO speed indicator

When the rear PTO is activated, the display switches on and shows the relative
shaft rotation speed.

Fig. 122 6
7
Wheelslip indicator
8
Tractor wheelslip is calculated through the difference between the wheel speed
and speed detected by the radar sensor.
This value is indicated on the display up to a maximum of 30%. Wheelslip values
are not displayed at speeds over 15 km/h (9.3 mph).
9

Fig. 123
10

3-21

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 21 20/09/2012 19.00.50

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Indicator lights
1
2
3

Fig. 124 - Indicator lights

1. Direction indicators (LH side) and hazard warning lights ON - Green
4

Flashes during operation of direction indicators or hazard warning lights

2. Differential lock engaged - Orange
ON - Indicates activation of the differential locks
3. Four-wheel drive engaged - Orange
ON - Indicates operation of the front-wheel drive
4. Front axle suspension
ON - Indicates activation of the front axle suspension control
5

5. Insufficient charge from alternator- Red

ON - Starter key set to ON
OFF - After engine started
ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: contact your authorised service centre
6. Direction indicators (RH side) and hazard warning lights ON - Green
Flashes during operation of direction indicators or hazard warning lights
6

7. Headlights high beam - Blue

ON - Indicates use of the headlights high beam
8. First trailer direction indicators and hazard warning lights ON - Green
Flashes during operation of direction indicators or hazard warning lights
9. Second trailer direction indicators and hazard warning lights ON - Green
Flashes during operation of direction indicators or hazard warning lights
10. Engine preheating - Yellow
7

ON - Indicates the engine preheating stage

11. Low engine oil pressure - Red
ON - Starter key set to ON
OFF - After engine started
ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: contact your authorised service centre
12. Automatic PTO activated
8

ON - Indicates activation of rear PTO in automatic mode

The alarm warning light illuminates to indicate tractor malfunctions, incorrect op-
erator manoeuvres or dangerous situations.

The alarm warming light has two display modes:

9

l Flashing warning light (1) - alarm does not jeopardize tractor operation
l Fixed warning light (1): serious alarm, stop the tractor

When the warning light illuminates also an audible warning signal will sound. An
explanation of the cause of the alarm may appear simultaneously on the on-board
display.
10

Fig. 125

3-22

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 22 20/09/2012 19.00.51

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
On-board display
IMPORTANT

1
We recommend that you select different functions of the on-board display only when the tractor is stationary.

Using both graphics and text, the on-board display provides information of a general nature and shows the vehicle operating mode
or any special conditions and events.

2
The display is divided into two areas:
l Graphic area (1)
m graphic symbols
m digital clock

l Text area (2)

m operating messages

3
m Alarms list

Up to 4 symbols can be displayed at the same time in the graphic area and up to
2 rows of text in the text area.
The clock is displayed in the bottom RH corner, but it may be temporarily hidden
Fig. 126
if necessary.

4
Digital clock adjustment
To adjust the clock proceed as follows:
l Turn the starter key to MAR;
l Press the brake pedals and lower the parking brake lever;
Pull the steering column lever upwards twice in rapid succession (headlight

5
l

flashing) The hour digits (2) will flash on the display (1); move the steering
column lever forward to increase the value.
l Pull the steering column lever upwards once. The minute digits (3) will flash
on the display (1); move the steering column lever forward to increase the
value.
To quit the menu, start the tractor or turn the starter key to STOP.

6
l

Fig. 127

List of graphic symbols that can be displayed in the graphic area of the on-board display
Engine stopped

7
8

Engine overheating
9
10

3-23

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 23 20/09/2012 19.00.51

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Hydraulic filter clogged
1
2

Fuel reserve
3

Hand brake applied

4

ASM/SBA system activated

5
6

Air filter clogged

7

Wheelslip check engaged

8
9

Engine memory activated

10

3-24

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 24 20/09/2012 19.00.51

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Transmission fault

1
2
Engine fault

3
Low brake fluid level

4
Maintenance

5
6
Cruise Control on

Trailer braking fault

7
The behaviour of this warning light varies according to the position of the valve located at the
8

rear of the tractor:

l Valve closed - Light on
l Valve open:
m When the parking brake is on, the light is illuminated
m When the parking brake is off, the light is off
9
10

3-25

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 25 20/09/2012 19.00.51

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.6.3 - Console switches
The following controls are located on the console:
1

1. Headlights switch
2. Hazard warning lights switch
3. Rocker switch to select between headlights for road travel and repeater
headlights (for tractors with front lift)
Control switch for front worklights positioned above the direction indicators
(for tractors without front lift)
2

4. Front worklights switch

5. Front axle suspension switch

Fig. 128
3

Headlights switch
This switch (1) has three positions to control the headlights used for driv-
ing on public roads:
l Position 1 - Lights off and flasher enabled by lifting the stalk upwards.
l Position 2 - Sidelights on and flasher enabled by lifting the stalk upwards.
4

When the headlights are switched on, the corresponding indicator light on
the instrument panel will illuminate green. The indicator light symbol is the
same as that shown on the switch, which will illuminate amber.
l Position 3 - Headlights on dipped beam and flasher enabled by lifting the
stalk upwards.
NOTE
5

Fig. 129
Display lighting of all controls is switched on when the sidelights
are switched on

Hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are activated by pressing this switch. This causes all the
6

direction indicators to flash simultaneously. Switch (2) is equipped with an indica-

tor light that illuminates when the hazard lights are active. This switch is enabled
even when the engine is off and the key is removed.
7

Fig. 130
8
9
10

3-26

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 26 20/09/2012 19.00.52

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Rocker switch to select between headlights for road travel and repeater headlights - Worklights con-
trol switch

1
lonly for tractors equipped with front lift
Press the switch (3) to turn off the lights for road use, located at the front of the
tractor, and to turn on the repeater headlights located at the sides of the cab.
The repeater lights should be used when the lights for road use are obscured by
implements mounted on the front lift.

2
Fig. 131

3
lonly for tractors without front lift
Press switch (3) to turn on the worklights located on either side of the cab above
the direction indicators.

4
5
Fig. 132

Front worklights switch

This control serves to switch the front worklights on and off. The front worklights
improve visibility when working at night.

6
Rocker switch (4) has two positions:
l Position 1 - Switches on the two worklights on top of the cab.
l Position 2 - Switches on exclusively the front worklights on the engine hood.

Fig. 133 7
3.6.4 - Steering column controls
8
The following controls are located on the left of the steering column:
1. Hydraulic shuttle control
2. Control for direction indicators, high beam headlights, headlight flasher,
horn and windscreen wiper (steering column switch)
9

Fig. 134
10

3-27

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 27 20/09/2012 19.00.52

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Hydraulic shuttle control
The lever for engagement of the hydraulic shuttle has the following posi-
1

tions:
l Position 0: Travel direction NOT selected
l Position 1: Travel direction FORWARD
l Position 2: Travel direction REVERSE

To operate the lever, release it by pulling towards the steering wheel, then push it
2

forwards or backwards as required.

Fig. 135
3

Steering column stalk

There is a stalk on the left of the steering column incorporating the following controls:
l Direction indicators
l Headlights flash
l Switch headlights between dipped and main beam
l Horn activation
4

l Windscreen wiper activation

Direction indicators
The direction indicators can be activated in two different modes:
l Without the self-cancelling function
m Push stalk fully forward (position 1) to activate the RH direction in-
5

dicator.
m Pull stalk (position 2) fully backward to activate the LH direction in-

dicator.
l With the self-cancelling function (optional)
m Push stalk forward (operate briefly - less than 0.7 seconds) without
6

reaching the stroke limit position to activate the RH direction indica-

tor.
m Pull stalk backward (operate briefly - less than 0.7 seconds) without
Fig. 136
reaching the stroke limit position to activate the LH direction indica-
tor.
The speed at which the self-cancelling stalk automatically returns to the off
7

position depends on the speed of the tractor: the higher the travel speed,
the longer the distance travelled before the direction indicator is cancelled.
The direction indicator can also be cancelled manually by briefly pushing
(for less than 0.7 seconds) the stalk in the opposite direction.
If the contact lasts more than 0.7 seconds, the indicator will switch off im-
mediately when the stalk is returned to its off position.
8

Horn
Push the stalk to operate the horn.
9
10

Fig. 137

3-28

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 28 20/09/2012 19.00.53

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Lights switch
With all the lights off or the headlights on, pull the lever upwards to flash the main

1
beam headlights.
Push the stalk down with the low beam headlights on to switch to the high beam,
and vice versa.

2
Fig. 138

3
Windscreen wiper and washer
Turn the ring on stalk (1) to operate the windscreen wiper.

Ring (1) has the following positions:

l A - windscreen wiper off
l B - windscreen wiper on, intermittent

4
l C - windscreen wiper on, continuous

5
Fig. 139

Push the stalk (1) in the direction shown by the arrow to activate the screen wash-
er.

6
7
Fig. 140

3.6.5 - Right-hand console

The easily-identifiable controls on the right-hand console are arranged so that the most important ones are nearest the operator.
8
9
10

3-29

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 29 20/09/2012 19.00.53

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2
3

Fig. 141 - View of the controls to the right of the operator

4

1. Starter switch
2. Console for rear lift control
3. Rotating beacon switch
4. Rear screen wiper and washer pump switch
5. Switch for rear worklights (located at the top of the cab and above the fenders)
6. PTO mode selector - normal/economy
7. PTO speed selector - 540/1000
5

8. Remote valves control

9. POWERSHIFT transmission display (on the RH cab pillar)
Starter switch
WARNING
6

Before starting the engine, make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated. DO NOT run the engine in an enclosed area.
Exhaust gases can cause asphyxia.

The starter switch (1) is a key-operated device for starting and switching off the
engine.
7
8

Fig. 142

It has the following three positions:

l Position 0 - Electrical circuit disabled: - (STOP position)
9

To switch off the engine, operate the starter switch by turning the key to the STOP position. The key can then be removed
from this position.
l Position 1 - Electrical circuit enabled: - (ON position)
All the indicator lights on the instrument panel will illuminate briefly (lamp test) and a buzzer will sound. The red battery charg-
ing light, the red low engine oil pressure light and, if the engine is cold, the yellow preheating light, will stay on. The N symbol
will illuminate in the travel direction area of the transmission display.
10

l Position 2 - Engine starting: - (START position)

Operates the starter motor. When the engine starts, release the key, which will return to the ON position.

3-30

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 30 20/09/2012 19.00.55

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Flashing beacon switch
Press switch (1) to activate the rotating beacon.

1
Press switch (1) again to switch off the rotating beacon.

2
Fig. 143

3
Rear screen wiper and washer pump
The switch has two positions:
l Position 1 - Press switch (1) once to activate the rear window wiper.
l Position 2 - Press (and hold down) switch (1) again to activate the rear
window washer pump.
Release switch (1) to stop the rear window washer pump.

4
Press switch (1) again to stop the wiper.

5
Fig. 144

Rear worklights switch

Press switch (1) for the lights located at the top of the cab and on the fenders.
Press switch (1) again to switch the lights off.

6
WARNING
It is not permitted to use the worklights when driving the tractor on
public roads.

Fig. 145 7
POWERSHIFT transmission display
8
The POWERSHIFT transmission display is located on the RH front cab pil-
lar and gives the following information:
1. Forward travel selected indicator
2. Reverse travel selected indicator
3. Transmission symbol
4. “NEUTRAL”/fault code/APS indication
9

5. Gearbox malfunctions and breakdowns indicator

6. Selected POWERSHIFT range indicator

Fig. 146
10

3-31

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 31 20/09/2012 19.00.55

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.6.6 - Multifunction armrest
1
2
3

Fig. 147 - Multifunction armrest

4

Key
1. Front PTO engage/disengage switch
2. Rear PTO engage/disengage switch
3. Automatic PTO engage/disengage switch
4. ASM/SBA engage/disengage button
5. 4WD engagement control
5

6. Differential locks engage/disengage control

7. Hand throttle lever
8. Engine speed memory button
9. POWERSHIFT
10. Rear lift control
11. Armrest
6

3.6.7 - Braking system air pressure gauge

The pressure gauge is located on the RH front cab pillar, near to the POWER-
SHIFT display.
Before moving off, charge the compressed air reservoir by running the tractor
engine at medium revs until the needle of the pressure gauge moves into the
7

yellow-green section (5-9 bar).

The needle of the gauge should always be located within the yellow-green section
(5-9 bar), also when the tractor is in motion. The needle may temporarily move out
the yellow-green section (below 5 bar) after continuous use of the brakes.
If the needle should return rapidly from the yellow-green section (below 5 bar),
have the air braking system checked at one of our authorised workshops.
8

Fig. 148

3.6.8 - LH console
The easily-identifiable controls on the LH console are arranged so that the most important ones are nearest the operator.
9
10

3-32

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 32 20/09/2012 19.00.56

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR

1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 149 - Console to left of operator
1. Cigar Lighter
2. Ashtray
3. Ventilation, heating and air conditioning controls

6
4. Storage compartment
5. Refrigerator compartment

3.6.9 - Ventilation system

To start and adjust the ventilation system, turn the blower selector to the required speed.
With the ventilation system functioning slight pressurisation of the cab interior is obtained. This ensures that ambient air �������������
enters exclu-

7
sively through the two filters located in the cab pillars.
The fan selector can be operated also when the ignition key is simply inserted in the ignition switch.
The air flow is divided and oriented by positioning the vents appropriately.
Ventilation controls
Cab ventilation control (1) is located on the LH part of the instrument panel, behind
8

the passenger seat.

The control has the following positions:

l Position 0: Blower off
l Position 1: Blower at minimum speed
l Position 2: Blower at low-medium speed
9

l Position 3: Blower at medium-high speed

l Position 4: Blower at maximum speed

Fig. 150
10

3-33

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 33 20/09/2012 19.00.57

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Air outlet and recirculation vents
Air outlet vents
1

The air is drawn in through 2 filters in the cab pillars and distributed through the cab through adjustable and swivel-mounted outlet
vents.
The vents are positioned as follows:
Two vents (1 and 2) on the RH side of the instrument panel.
2
3

Fig. 151

Two vents (3 and 4) on the LH side of the instrument panel.

4
5

Fig. 152
6

Two vents ( 5 and 6) behind the instrument panel at the top.

Two vents (7 and 8) behind the instrument panel in the middle.
7

Fig. 153
8

Three vents (9, 10 and 11) on the front of the instrument panel at the top.
9
10

Fig. 154

3-34

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 34 20/09/2012 19.00.57

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
One vent (12) on the front of the instrument panel at the bottom right.

1
2
Fig. 155

One vent (13) on the front of the instrument panel at the bottom left.

3
4
Fig. 156

One vent (14) on the console to the operator’s right

5
6
Fig. 157

7
One vent (15) on the console to the operator’s left

8
9

Fig. 158
10

3-35

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 35 20/09/2012 19.00.57

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Air recirculation vents
The upper air recirculation vents (1) are located on the central pillar to the opera-
1

tor’s right and left and are equipped with registers (2).
Pulling control (2) located on the RH and LH cab pillar towards the interior of the
cab serves to supply fresh air directly from the exterior to the interior of the cab.
To reduce the amount of fresh air obtained from outside the cab, shift the register
control outwards.
When the two vents in the cab uprights are fully closed, the air inside the cab will
2

be continuously recycled.

Fig. 159
3

The lower air recirculation vents are located under the consoles on the operator’s
right and left.
4

Fig. 160
5

3.6.10 - Heating system

System controls
The system is switched on and adjusted by way of the control on the instrument panel to the left of the operator position.
Turn control knob (1) to activate the heating system and adjust the temperature; set the blower to the desired speed using fan selector
6

(2).
To warm up the cab quickly, turn the control knob to the maximum position and set the blower to maximum speed.
For rapid demisting of the windscreen, simply turn knob (2) to maximum position, turn blower knob (1) to maximum speed and close
the front outlet vents.
This ensures that the entire flow of warm air will be directed towards the windscreen.
7

Once the required temperature has been reached, adjust the system as required.
1. Heating control
2. Ventilation control
8
9

Fig. 161

Using the heating system

Tips on use of the heating system
l Before starting the engine ensure that the ventilation system is switched off (simply switch off the ventilation fan) to avoid
10

overloading the tractor battery.

l If the ventilation system has been running for prolonged periods at full power instead of switching it off suddenly allow it to run
for at least 20 seconds at minimum speed.

3-36

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 36 20/09/2012 19.00.57

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
l On switching on the system you should immediately feel an air flow from the vents. If not, switch off the system and locate
the fault.

1
l Do not use the heating system in particularly dusty conditions.

3.6.11 - Air conditioning system

System controls
WARNING
The refrigerant in the air conditioning system can cause severe lesions.

2
DANGER
Should the air-conditioning system piping develop a visible leak, do not approach with a naked flame, refrigerant gas
is inflammable and on combustion produces highly toxic substances.

3
The system is switched on and adjusted by means of the control on the instrument panel to the left of the operator position.
Turn fan selector (1) to start the ventilation system and use control knob (2) to adjust the temperature.
To cool the cab quickly, turn control knob (2) to the maximum position and set the blower to maximum speed.
1. Ventilation controls

4
2. Air conditioning control

5
Fig. 162

To cool the interior of the cab proceed as follows:

6
l Open the adjustable vents fully;
l First turn the ventilation control knob and then turn on the air conditioner by pressing the relative button;
l If the tractor has been in the sun for a prolonged period, open the doors for a few minutes to allow the warm air to escape
from the cab.
l Close the doors and set the recirculation control so that all the airflow is taken from inside the cab.

7
l Once the required temperature has been reached, adjust the ventilation system and air recirculation control as required.
After a few minutes of operation the sight glass above the filter-dryer should be clear and free of air bubbles. Otherwise switch off the
system and consult our specialised personnel.
Using the air conditioning system
Some tips on using the air conditioning system
8
l It is advisable to avoid making repairs or adjustments to the system personally: instead, seek assistance from specialised
personnel.
l Do not bring naked flames into the vicinity of the system because possible leaks of refrigerant (R134 a) can lead to the forma-
tion of noxious gas.
l Do not loosen the unions or tamper with the pipelines under any circumstances; in addition, do not remove the oil plug on the
compressor because the circuit contains pressurised gas.
9

l Contact with refrigerant can cause severe burns; in the event of accidents proceed as follows:
m Seek expert medical attention immediately.

l When working in dusty environments, if necessary you can increase cab pressurisation to prevent the infiltration of dust; in
these cases it is advisable to close the air recirculation vents.
10

3-37

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 37 20/09/2012 19.00.58

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.6.12 - Cab air filter
The cab air filters are designed to remove dust from air but do not afford protection against the chemical vapours emitted �����������
by pestici-
1

des applied by sprayers.

When disposing of used filters, follow the regulations applicable locally regarding disposal of cartridges contaminated with harmful
substances.
WARNING
The cab ventilation system filter must always be of the “paper” type; exclusively when working with hazardous sub-
2

stances (e.g. pesticide spraying) this filter must be replaced with a specific filter for the type of operation.

If the cab is not able to maintain the required air pressure level, carry out the following checks to identify the cause:
l Set the blower to maximum speed and close the cab doors, rear hatch and windows. If the tractor is equipped with a roof
hatch, check that it is properly closed.
Check that the air filters are not clogged or obstructed.
3

l
l Check the condition of the seals around the doors and windows in the cab.
l Check the apertures for levers/tie-rods through to the outside of the cab.
If it is not possible to identify the cause by the above checks, contact an authorised service centre.
Special filters
WARNING
4

Before working with harmful substances the external cab air filters (and internal, if installed) must be replaced with
special filters (e.g. activated carbon filters).

WARNING
Follow the information supplied by the chemicals manufacturer company regarding protection against harmful sub-
5

stances.

WARNING
Injury or death could result from prolonged periods of exposure to pesticides. When replacing the cab filters use ex-
clusively original cartridges.
6

IMPORTANT:
These filters can never offer total protection against toxic substances.
7

IMPORTANT:
Special filters are removed and refitted in the same way as normal filters.

When spraying chemical substances the cab interior can be slightly pressurised. When the cab ventilation is activated the�������������
air pres-
sure inside the cab will increase relative to the outside air pressure, this pressure difference helps prevent the ingress of harmful
8

vapour. However, we strongly recommend that you scrupulously adhere to the safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of
the chemical substance.
Advice on safe working procedures:
l When replacing the filters wear all the required personal protective equipment, replace the standard dust filter with the special
filter only if this is required by the operation to be carried out.
9

l After each use, the filter should be removed from the cab and replaced in its original packaging, and the standard dust filter
should be installed. The carbon filter should be carefully sealed in its packaging in order to maintain its efficiency.
l This filter, providing it is used for a total of no more than 200 hours, has a maximum service life of 36 months from the time the
package is first opened (the date of manufacture is marked on the filter).
l The filter should be removed during use of the tractor for any applications other than spraying indicated by the manufacturer,
dust would clog the filter element in a very short time.
10

l Do not wash the filter or clean it with compressed air.

l Used filters must be consigned to specialised waste disposal centres.

3-38

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 38 20/09/2012 19.00.59

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
DANGER
Change the active carbon filter after 200 hours of use or after 36 months. If the odours of any toxic substances used

1
become noticeable inside the cab, immediately change the filter and check the seal.

CAUTION
When spraying pesticides, always follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the chemical product and the imple-
ment used for spraying.

2
3.6.13 - Cab
Openable front windscreen
The front windscreen can be opened to two different positions.
Partial opening of the front windscreen

3
Grip handle (1), turn it anti-clockwise through 90° and to disengage it from the
catch (2) and then secure it in the second catch (3).

4
2

Fig. 163

5
Complete opening of the front windscreen
Grip handle (1), turn it anti-clockwise through 90° to disengage it from the catch 2
and then push the screen fully outwards. The windscreen is held in position by two
gas springs (2). 1

6
2

Fig. 164

7
Closing the front windscreen
Grip handle (1) and pull the windscreen inwards to the closed position, then turn
the handle clockwise through 90° to secure the catch (2). 8

1
2
9

Fig. 165
10

3-39

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 39 20/09/2012 19.00.59

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Rear window hatch
The cab rear window hatch can be opened to 2 alternative positions by means of the folding and extendible handle.
1

Partial opening of the rear window

Grip handle (1), lift it and then push outwards, keeping handle (2) attached to the
anchoring support.
2

Fig. 166
3

Complete opening of the rear window

Grip handle (1), lift it and then push outwards; now disengage handle (2) from the
anchor support.
4
5

Fig. 167

Closing the rear window hatch

Grip handle (1) with one hand and pull it inwards while, with your other hand,
keeping handle (2) attached to the anchoring support. Then push handle (1) down-
wards.
6
7

Fig. 168

Side windows
The side windows can be opened and held in position with a practical fastening
system (1). To open the side windows, rotate the handle backwards (A). To close
8

the side windows, pull the handle inwards and tilt it forward (B).
9

Fig. 169
10

3-40

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 40 20/09/2012 19.01.00

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Openable roof hatch
The cab roof features a large window allowing improved visibility when operating

1
a front loader.
The roof hatch opens to allow ventilation; a sliding sunshield protects the cab from
direct sunlight.

2
Fig. 170

3
To open the hatch, first slide the sunshield fully backwards. Grip the handle and
turn it clockwise to disengage the safety catch, then push the handle upwards.

4
Fig. 171

5
Sunblind
Pull the blind downwards as required; it will automatically lock in position.
Pull the release catch and the sunblind will roll back up automatically.

6
7
Fig. 172

Cable access hatch for routing external implement control cables into the cab
To open the cable access hatch:
8
1. Open the rear hatch
2. Turn the bracket (1) anti-clockwise
3. Flip the cable access hatch (2) backwards
4. Close the rear hatch
9

Fig. 173
10

3-41

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 41 20/09/2012 19.01.00

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Ashtray and cigar lighter
1. Cigar lighter
1

2. Ashtray
The ashtray and cigar lighter are located on the on the instrument panel to the left
of the operator behind the passenger seat. To empty the ashtray (2), open it and
depress the spring clip (3) to disengage it from the catch. The cigar lighter (1) may
also be used as a 12V outlet socket.
2

Fig. 174
3

Storage compartment
With a capacity of 7 dm³ storage compartment (1) can accommodate a DIN stan-
dard first aid box.
Periodically check that the first aid kit is complete and that the contents have not
passed their expiration dates.
4
5

Fig. 175

Refrigerator compartment
The refrigerator compartment (1) is cooled by the air conditioning system.
It can hold a 2 litre bottle and a beverage can.
6

In winter, this compartment can be used to keep food warm when the cab heater
is in use.
7

Fig. 176

Installation of additional controls and display units

8

The M10 threaded holes located under the caps (1) can be used to fix additional
controls and indicator lights.
DANGER
Do not make modifications to the cab. Drilling or welding on the cab
is NOT PERMITTED!
9

Fig. 177
10

3-42

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 42 20/09/2012 19.01.01

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Interior light
The cab interior light (1) is located in cab roof lining to the left of the operator.

1
The light comes on when the left cab door is opened.
To switch the light on continuously, press either the front or the rear of the lens.

2
Fig. 178

3
Controls illumination light
The controls illumination light in the roof lining (RH side) can be turned on by way
of the sliding switch.
After switching this light on, the control console to the RH side of the operator’s
seat will be illuminated by a red light.

4
5
Fig. 179

Provision for radio

The radio is an optional feature. The radio housing is located on the right-hand
side of the cab roof lining.

6
CAUTION
Check the tightness of all retaining nuts and bolts to ensure that the
radio is fixed firmly and cannot fall out of its housing.

Fig. 180 7
3.6.14 - Hazard warning triangle
8
In compliance with statutory legislation, the tractor must be equipped with one or two hazard warning triangles. Store these in a
suitable place.
3.6.15 - Fire extinguisher
CAUTION
The fire extinguisher must be in good working condition at all times and must always be installed its designated posi-
9

tion! Adhere strictly with the servicing and inspection intervals specified by the manufacturer of the extinguisher.

Two fixing holes are provided in the left rear cab pillar which are to be used to mount a fire extinguisher bracket.
10

3-43

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 43 20/09/2012 19.01.02

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Bracket (1) must be fixed to the pillar with the two screws (2).
1
2

Fig. 181

The extinguisher (1) must be installed on the bracket.

3
4

Fig. 182

The bracket and fixing screws can be ordered from your dealer.
5

3.6.16 - Operation & Maintenance Manual

The Operation & Maintenance manual contains all the information necessary to operate and maintain the tractor in safety
To prevent accidents, observe all the safety rules contained in the manual.
The manual must be kept on the tractor at all times. A special mesh pocket (1) on
6

the rear of the driver’s seat is provided for this purpose.

7

Fig. 183

3.6.17 - Wheel chock

8

The tractor is equipped with wheel chock behind the rh footplate under the battery.
The wheel chocks must be used in the following situations:
l when the tractor is parked on a slope
l when carrying out repairs or maintenance.
9

IMPORTANT:
If you need to park on a steep gradient - more than 15° (33% gradient) - place chocks under the rear wheels to im-
mobilise the tractor. It is any case recommended not to park the tractor on a steep gradient.
10

3-44

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 44 20/09/2012 19.01.03

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
To withdraw chock (1) from its support, loosen lock lever (2) and slide the chock
out in the direction shown by the arrow.

1
2
Fig. 184

The chocks are to be placed under the wheels as shown in the figure.

3
4
Fig. 185

3.6.18 - Tool box

5
The tool box (1) is located behind the right-hand footstep above the battery (2).
The tool box is removable and can be locked using a padlock through the staple
(3).

6
7
Fig. 186

8
9
10

3-45

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 45 20/09/2012 19.01.04

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.7 - OTHER CONTROLS
3.7.1 - Control pedals
1

1. Clutch pedal
2. LH brake pedal
3. RH brake pedal
4. Brake pedal connecting latch
5. Accelerator pedal
2
3

Fig. 187

3.7.2 - Clutch control

CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal or keep it partially depressed when driving as this could cause premature
wear of the clutch plates.
4

CAUTION
Do not depress the clutch pedal or put the gearbox in neutral when driving downhill.
5

CAUTION
Avoid keeping the clutch pedal depressed when the tractor is stationary. Select neutral, even when stopping for brief
periods.

The clutch disengages when the clutch pedal on the left of the operator position
6

is pressed.
When you intend to disengage the clutch, first reduce engine revs and then fully
depress the clutch pedal.
When the pedal is released after selecting a gear, apply the accelerator pedal ap-
propriately to prevent sudden jolts in the movement of the tractor.
Once you have released the clutch pedal, remove your foot from it because even
7

slight pressure can result in premature wear of the clutch plate.

Fig. 188

Comfort clutch
8

The comfort clutch fulfils the same function as the clutch pedal.
9
10

Fig. 189

3-46

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 46 20/09/2012 19.01.05

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.7.3 - Brake pedal
WARNING

1
When travelling downhill, and particularly when towing an implement or trailer, avoid prolonged use of the brakes by
selecting a low gear and using the braking action of the engine.

WARNING
Do not brake using just one brake pedal when:

2
– the differential lock is engaged; – at high speeds; – when towing a trailer .

The tractor is equipped with two rear brakes, positioned on the rear axle shafts
before the final drives, and two front brakes positioned on the wheel hubs.
The front and rear brakes are applied simultaneously by pressing the brake ped-
als.

3
The service brakes are hydrostatic oil-immersed disc type.
If the latch connecting the two pedals together is released, the right brakes can be
operated separately from the left brakes.
1. Latch connecting the two brake pedals together
2. LH brake pedal

4
3. RH brake pedal
Fig. 190

3.7.4 - Parking brake lever

CAUTION

5
Apply the parking brake after shutting off the engine and before leaving the driving position. For further information
on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter “Working with stationary implements” in the safety section of this
manual.
CAUTION
When applying the parking brake, the lever must always be pulled up all the way

6
IMPORTANT:
A visual and audible alarm (buzzer) is emitted for approximately 10 seconds if, after switching off the engine, the park-
ing brake lever is not moved to the fully engaged position.

7
IMPORTANT:
The visual and audible alarms are also activated indefinitely if the driver leaves his seat while the engine is running.

IMPORTANT:
8

Every time the parking brake is applied, front-wheel drive is engaged automatically.
9
10

3-47

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 47 20/09/2012 19.01.06

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
The parking brake is completely independent of the service brakes and is applied
by pulling up lever (1) located on the left-hand side of the operator.
1

To manually disengage the parking brake, press the button on the end of the lever
and push the lever down.
2

Fig. 191

On applying the parking brake:

3

l A specific warning appears on the on-board display (1).

l The buzzer emits a warning signal.
l The 4WD indicator light (2) illuminates to signal engagement of front wheel
drive.
4

Fig. 192

Parking the tractor

5

The tractor must be parked differently depending on the terrain and operational status of the engine:
l Parking the tractor with the engine off
l Parking the tractor with the engine running;
l Parking the tractor on steep slopes
Parking the tractor with the engine off
6

l Apply the handbrake.

l Move all controls to the neutral position;
l Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement attached to the tractor, to the ground;
l Stop the engine;
l Engage first gear on tractors with mechanical gearboxes.
7

Parking the tractor with the engine running

l Check that no-one is in the vicinity of the tractor;
l Check that the tractor is parked on level ground;
l Apply the handbrake.
l Move all drive controls to the neutral position.
Parking the tractor on steep slopes
8

To park the tractor on slopes, proceed as indicated previously depending on the situation.
If it is necessary to park the tractor on a steep slope, even for a short time, position chocks under the rear wheels to prevent it from
moving. It is in any case preferable not to park the tractor on sloping terrain.
The chocks should normally be positioned under the rear wheels by a second person, who must stand to the side of the tractor at
all times.
9

If no assistant is available for this purpose, before alighting from the tractor the operator must fully engage the parking brake, check
that tractor is not moving, and then carefully position the chocks under the wheels while standing to the side of the tractor.
10

3-48

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 48 20/09/2012 19.01.06

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.7.5 - Accelerator pedal
Use this control to vary the speed of the engine.

1
2
Fig. 193

3
3.7.6 - Electronic hand throttle
The hand throttle control consists of lever (1) positioned on the multifunction arm-
rest to the operator’s RH side; the hand throttle serves to increase or decrease
engine speed. Alongside the lever is a graduated scale (2) which indicates the
engine speed.

4
Push lever (1) forwards to increase engine speed or pull it back to decrease en-
gine speed. Engine speed is established by the lever position.
NOTE
With the hand throttle set to a certain engine speed, when the ac-
celerator pedal is pressed the engine speed increases accordingly;

5
As soon as the accelerator pedal is released (even fully), the en-
Fig. 194
gine rpm returns to the speed set by the hand throttle.

Engine speed memory

Button (1) allows you to save a certain engine speed to the memory, and to re-
trieve the speed in question when required.

Fig. 195 6
7
Engine speed memory button
8
Pressing the button for longer than 3 seconds saves the current engine speed set with the throttle
Retrieving the saved engine speed
Pressing button (1) for a shorter time retrieves the engine speed stored in the
memory, which is signalled by an indicator light (2) illuminating on the instrument
panel.
9
10

Fig. 196

3-49

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 49 20/09/2012 19.01.07

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.7.7 - Transmission controls
CAUTION
1

Never go away and leave the tractor with the engine running, unless absolutely necessary. In this case, put all the gear
levers in “neutral” and pull the parking brake lever right up. For further information on safe working procedures, refer
to the chapter “Working with stationary implements” in the safety section of this manual.
The transmission is comprised of different units:
a 6-speed gearbox.
2

l
l a four-speed (L - M - H - S) underdrive giving four ranges: Slow (L), Medium (M) Fast (H), and a Super Fast (S) range.
l a Creeper range.
l an electrohydraulic shuttle, with control under the steering wheel, that actuates forward and reverse gear.
The transmission controls are as follows:
1. Main gear lever
3

2. Pushbutton clutch control

3. Creeper control buttons
4. Range selector control
4

Fig. 197

1. Shuttle control lever

5
6

Fig. 198
7

1. 4-speed underdrive control

8

Fig. 199
9
10

3-50

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 50 20/09/2012 19.01.09

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1. Creeper range selector lever

1
2
Fig. 200

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-51

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 51 20/09/2012 19.01.09

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

3-52

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 52 20/09/2012 19.01.09

 1
2
3
4
4 - USING THE TRACTOR

5
6
7
8
9
10

4-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.01.09

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.1 - INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 - Engine - first 50 operating hours
1

The tractor is delivered to the customer ready for use at full engine power thanks to the stringent testing phase that the engine
����������
un-
dergoes in our test room.
However, in the first 50 hours of use do not subject the tractor to full power full load operation for prolonged periods in order to allow
the piston rings to adapt properly to the cylinders and various moving parts to bed in correctly.
During this interval it is potentially harmful to run the engine at idle speed for prolonged periods and also to run it at high speeds in no
2

load conditions; this would result in bedding in of engine components in a manner different from that which would deliver maximum
efficiency throughout the full service life of the engine.

The safety seal on the engine governor is applied by the manufacturer and ensures that the power output of your
tractor does not exceed the declared and approved value. Any tampering with this seal on the governor will void the
3

warranty for the entire tractor with immediate effect.

In the first hours of use of the machine, the following procedures must be adhered to:
l At each start-up allow the engine to run at low speed for a few minutes;
l Do not use the engine continuously at low revs or at high revs with low loads;
l During the first 20 service hours do not use the engine with excessively high loads; use the tractor in full load conditions for
4

periods that are gradually longer;

l Before switching off the engine allow it to idle for a few minutes;
l Adopt due care and attention when performing the checks and servicing operations listed below:
m engine oil level
m engine oil change
m renewal of oil filter
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.01.09

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.2 - STARTING - STOPPING THE ENGINE
4.2.1 - Starting the engine:

1
IMPORTANT:
Switching off the engine automatically deactivates: front and rear PTO clutch engagement controls, range selection
and travel direction selection.

WARNING

2
Starting aid fluids are highly flammable. When using them, keep them away from any possible source of sparks (bat-
teries, connections, etc.). These fluids must be stored in a cool place.

Before turning the ignition key you must:

1. Sit in the driver’s seat, only in this condition is it possible to start up the engine.

3
2. Switch off all the electrical equipment powered by the battery (lights, direction indicators, fan, wipers, heating and air condi-
tioning).
3. Apply the handbrake.
4. Move the gear lever and range lever to their neutral positions.
5. Move the shuttle control lever to neutral to enable starting
Ignition key

4
Position 0 = Electrical circuit disabled
l

Position I = Electrical circuit enabled / preheating phase

l
1
l Position II = Engine starting

Re
p
eti
r
rre

cio
ma

na
de

rra
The ignition switch is located to the right of the operator position on pillar (1).

Re

qu
I

e
10 Sec
Restart

II
Startwiederholung

5
6
Fig. 201

Procedure for starting the engine

IMPORTANT:
The engine will not start if a gear is engaged.

7
Turn the ignition key to position I (all the indicator lights on the instrument panel
will illuminate briefly to show they are working correctly; this procedure is signalled
Re

by a buzzer).
pe
r

ticio
rre
ma

na
de

rra
Re

qu

I
e

10 Sec
Restart
Startwiederholung
8
0
9

Fig. 202
10

4-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.01.10

 USING THE TRACTOR
The red battery charging light (1), the red low engine oil pressure light (2), the
yellow preheating light (3) and the orange four-wheel drive light (4) will remain 4 1
1

illuminated.

2
2

3 2

Fig. 203

The transmission display will show the tractor symbol, the transmission symbol
and Powershift gear L (1). The letters N (2) (neutral) and M (3) (manual) will flash
3

alternately.
4

Fig. 204

After few seconds, once the yellow preheating light has switched off, start the
5

engine by turning the key to position II.

Re
Release the key as soon as the engine starts. If the engine fails to start after about

pe
r

ticio
rre
ma

na
de

rra
10 seconds, abort the starting attempt. Once the engine has started, run at me-
Re

qu
I

e
10 Sec
Restart

II
Startwiederholung

dium revs for a while until the red low oil pressure warning light goes out (several
seconds). If the engine fails to start, wait a full minute before repeating the starting
6

procedure.

Fig. 205
7

Starting the engine when cold

In winter, when the temperature falls below 0° C, it is essential to use winter diesel fuel, which allows the engine to run correctly at
temperatures down to –20°C.
If summer diesel fuel is used at low temperatures, the molecules of paraffin contained in the fuel will be deposited on the filters which
will therefore become clogged and prevent the fuel from arriving at the injection pump.
8

Some markets offer winter diesel with the addition of special additives that make it suited to temperatures even below –20 °C.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use ether based products to help start the engine when cold.
9
10

4-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.01.10

 USING THE TRACTOR
If winter diesel fuel is not available (or if it is used but the temperature is below
–20°C) kerosene (paraffin oil) may be added in the percentages indicated in the

1
diagram.
l 1 = summer diesel fuel
l 2 = winter diesel fuel
l X = % of kerosene to be added
l Y = ambient temperature in °C

2
Fig. 206

Pour first the kerosene and then the diesel into the fuel and mix the two substances in the tank only.
For further information, contact an authorised workshop, your dealer or fuel supplier.

3
CAUTION
After starting the engine in low temperature conditions, do not rev the engine above 1800 rpm until it reaches its op-
timum working temperature.

Emergency engine starting using a second battery

4
DANGER
Make sure you connect the battery terminals correctly. Danger of short-circuit!

IMPORTANT

5
You can use the battery in another tractor for this purpose; only connect batteries of the same nominal voltage having
the same number of cells.

DANGER
Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with

6
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.

Before connecting up the cables, observe the following safety instructions:

l Make sure that the two vehicles are not touching each other.
l Switch off any unnecessary electrical equipment.
Set the gear lever to neutral.

7
l
l Make sure the battery requiring assistance is properly connected to the vehicle chassis, that the caps are securely fitted, and
that the electrolyte level is correct.
To connect the two batteries, proceed as follows:
l Connect the terminals of a specific cable to the positive terminal of flat battery (1) and then to the positive terminal of auxiliary
battery (2).
8

l Connect the terminals of a second cable to the negative terminal of auxiliary battery (3) and then to the metal terminal of the
ground cable of the tractor with flat battery (4).
l If the auxiliary battery is on another tractor, first start its engine and take it up to a speed corresponding to 1/4 of the maximum
engine speed.
l Start the tractor with the discharged battery following the normal procedure.
l Once the engine has started up, disconnect the terminals of the cables, following the reverse order to connection, first terminal
9

(4), then (3), (2) and lastly (1).

If the engine fails to start, wait 15-20 seconds for the starter motor to stop, then repeat the procedure a maximum of 3 or 4 times. If
the tractor still fails to start, check for problems with the engine or electrical system (starter motor, etc.).
10

4-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.01.11

 USING THE TRACTOR
Diagram showing connection of batteries using jump leads
1. Positive terminal of the battery requiring assistance
1

2. Positive terminal of the back-up battery

3. Negative terminal of the back-up battery
4. Starter cable terminal connected to earth on the tractor with the battery
requiring assistance
2

Fig. 207

4.2.2 - Switching off the engine

3

Before stopping the engine, proceed as follows:

l If the engine is very hot (especially if the engine is turbocharged), leave it
idle for a few minutes before stopping it.
l Set the gear lever and shuttle lever to neutral, and apply the parking brake.
l Turn the ignition key (1) to 0.
4

Fig. 208
5

4.2.3 - Turbocharging using the turbocharger

The function of the turbocharger is to deliver a greater amount of air to the cylinders; this also makes it possible to increase the fuel
flow rate in a proportional manner in order to increase engine power.
The turbocharger unit, which features simple and rational design, consists of a turbine and a compressor.
6

The turbine is driven by the engine exhaust gas (this recovering part of the kinetic energy of the gas which would otherwise ������
be di-
spersed) and it drives the compressor, which serves to compress the intake air drawn into the cylinder intake manifold through the
air cleaner.
The following operating instructions must be observed in order to avoid damaging the engine, and particularly the turbo
charger:
7

l Never accelerate to max revs with a cold engine. Run the engine at idle speed for 1-2 minutes to allow the oil to heat up gradu-
ally to ensure perfect lubrication of the turbine (the turbocharger is lubricated with engine oil).
l Before stopping the engine after several hours of heavy harvesting work, allow it to idle for approximately 2 minutes; this is to
prevent the turbo from coasting at high speed without adequate lubrication.
8
9
10

4-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.01.12

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.3 - TRANSMISSION
4.3.1 - Transmission

1
DANGER
When driving downhill never exceed the speed limit for the road and your vehicle and do not allow the engine speed
to exceed the maximum permissible rpm.

Transmission configurations

2
The possible transmission configurations are listed here:
l 24 forward gears + 24 reverse gears
m 6 speeds
m 4 ranges
m Hydraulic shuttle

3
l 40 forward gears + 40 reverse gears
m 6 speeds
m 4 ranges
m Creeper
m Hydraulic shuttle

IMPORTANT:

4
When the creeper is engaged, 5th gear and 6th gear cannot be selected.

Gear lever
The six speeds of the main gearbox can be selected using the gear lever (1) on the

5
right-hand control console in combination with the clutch pedal.

6
Fig. 209

7
Range control buttons
There are two buttons (+) / (-) on the gear lever utilised to select the 4 pow-
ershift gear ratios:
l L (slow)
l M (medium)
8
l H (high)
l S (fast)

Press (+) to shift up through the ranges one at a time up to the S (fast) range.
Press (-) to shift down through the ranges one at a time down to the L (slow) range.
9

Fig. 210
10

4-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.01.13

 USING THE TRACTOR
Pressing (+) takes you up through the ranges in the sequence:
l L -> M -> H -> S
1

pressing (-) takes you down through the ranges in the sequence:
l S -> H -> M -> L
2

Fig. 211

Gear matching function.

3

The Gear matching function intervenes automatically on the range selection.

When the operator shifts gear, the system controls the range selection, engaging the most suitable range on the basis of the tractor
speed at the time.
POWERSHIFT transmission display
The POWERSHIFT transmission display is located on the RH front cab pil-
4

lar and gives the following information:

1. Forward travel selected indicator
2. Reverse travel selected indicator
3. Transmission symbol
4. “NEUTRAL”/fault code/APS indication
5. Gearbox malfunctions and breakdowns indicator
5

6. Selected POWERSHIFT range indicator

Fig. 211

Using the transmission in manual mode

6

Whenever the engine is started, the tractor is automatically placed in MANUAL

mode; this condition is signalled on the lower part of the transmission display by
the letters N (neutral) and M (manual) flashing alternately. The L (low) range will
always be engaged.
7
8

Fig. 212

If the shuttle control lever on the steering column was not returned to the neutral
position before the engine was started the display will show the letter N preceded
by an arrow to indicate that the shuttle lever must be set to neutral before the
transmission will accept any commands.
9
10

Fig. 213

4-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.01.13

 USING THE TRACTOR
In manual mode you can shift through the ranges using the multifunction
lever in the same way as the (+) and (-) buttons.

1
l Shifting the control lever backwards produces the same effect as pressing
button (+)
l Shifting the control lever forwards produces the same effect as pressing
button (-)

2
Fig. 214

4.3.2 - Creeper

3
CAUTION
Only operate the creeper lever when the tractor is stationary and the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

IMPORTANT:

4
Use the creeper continuously only when working with the PTO Heavy traction work should not be carried out and the
maximum travel speed is 2 km/h

IMPORTANT:
When the creeper range is engaged, 5th and 6th gear cannot be selected.

5
1. Creeper disengaged
2. Creeper engaged

6
7
Fig. 215

To engage the creeper proceed as follows:

l Stop the tractor
l Fully depress the clutch pedal
8
l Put the main gear lever in neutral
l Pull the creeper control lever upwards
To disengage the creeper proceed as follows:
l Stop the tractor
l Fully depress the clutch pedal
l Put the main gear lever in neutral
9

l Wait a few seconds

l Pull the creeper control lever upwards
10

4-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.01.15

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.3.3 - Electro-hydraulically controlled shuttle
CAUTION
1

To select a travel direction when the tractor is in neutral, the operator must be seated in the driving seat. Otherwise the
ECU will not accept the command and will activate a warning light and audible warning signal (buzzer).

CAUTION
If it is not possible to select a travel direction, even when the operator is sitting in the driving seat (e.g. as the result
2

of a fault in the operator presence sensor in the seat), fully depress the clutch pedal and engage the desired travel
direction using the shuttle lever under the steering wheel.
IMPORTANT
Once the engine has been started, before a travel direction can be selected, the shuttle control lever must be in neutral
position. An indication on the on-board display will signal to the operator to move the shuttle lever to neutral.
3

IMPORTANT
If, when driving the tractor at a speed below 12 km/h, you select the opposite direction of travel, the tractor will come to
a stop and then immediately move off in the new direction. If you attempt to change travel direction at a speed greater
than 12 km/h, the transmission disengages and reverts to “NEUTRAL”. At the same time an error message will be
4

displayed on the instrument panel.

IMPORTANT:
Before starting the tractor, the shuttle control lever must be in the neutral position.
5

The hydraulic shuttle allows travel direction selection without using the clutch.
The drive direction can be set using the control lever on the steering column.
The tractor is equipped with a shuttle control lever to select forward/reverse travel.
The lever is located on the steering column under the steering wheel on the left
hand side. Apart from inverting the direction of travel, this control also allows the S
H
6

tractor to be set into motion without using the clutch pedal. When the control lever
is pulled towards the steering wheel and moved in the required direction, the se-
M
L
lected gear (forward or reverse) will be shown on the transmission display.
7

Fig. 216

Forward drive selected:

l Pull lever (1) towards the steering wheel and push it forwards.
8

The arrow indicating the direction of movement will appear on the transmission
display.
L
1
9

Fig. 217
10

4-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.01.16

 USING THE TRACTOR
Reverse drive selected:
l Pull lever (1) towards the steering wheel and pull it back.

1
The arrow indicating the direction of movement will appear on the transmission
display.
L

2
1

Fig. 218

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.01.16

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.4 - FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
4.4.1 - Engaging front-wheel drive
1

Engaging front-wheel drive in addition to the permanent rear-wheel drive, increases performance for transport on steep roads, rough
terrain and when increased traction is required.
IMPORTANT
We recommend that front-wheel drive be used during road transport only if increased traction is required. This is to
prevent unnecessary tyre wear.
2

IMPORTANT
Engaging and disengaging front-wheel drive is possible only when the tractor is at a complete standstill.
3

IMPORTANT
With 4WD engaged, the direction of travel can be changed under load.

IMPORTANT
4

Front-wheel drive is automatically engaged whenever you apply the parking brake.

Press button (1) located on the multifunction armrest to engage four-wheel drive.
To disengage four-wheel drive press button (1) again.

AUTO
PTO
5

1
6

Fig. 219

A warning light on the instrument panel illuminates to signal engagement of front-wheel drive.
7

4WD is engaged also in the following cases:

8

l applying the parking brake;

l pressing the brake pedal.

4.4.2 - Front and rear differential lock

IMPORTANT
Never engage the differential locks while a wheel is slipping excessively; in this case, always depress the clutch pedal
9

before locking the differentials.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT travel on roads or at high speed when the differential lock is engaged. This could make steering difficult and
thus cause accidents and injury and damage.
10

4-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.01.18

 USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
With 4WD selected the direction of travel can be changed under load conditions.

1
WARNING
Do not engage the differential lock in the following circumstances. speed greater than 15 km/h – when driving round
bends – with a single brake pedal depressed.

2
The differential locks are only to be engaged when travelling in a straight line and before the wheels start to slip excessively.
The differential lock is engaged by pressing button (1) located on the multifunction
armrest.
Press button (1) again to disengage the differential lock.

3
4
Fig. 220

An indicator light on the instrument panel signals engagement of the differential lock.

5
4.4.3 - ASM/SBA system”
4WD and differential locking contribute to achieving improved traction.

6
The ASM system engages and disengages 4WD and the differential locks depending on travel speed, steering angle and wheelslip.
The ASM/SBA system is activated by pressing switch (1) located on the multifunc-
tion armrest.
Press button (1) again to switch off the ASM/SBA system.

7
8

Fig. 221

When the ASM/SBA system is switched on, the following indicator lights
illuminate on the display:
l ASM/SBA system, on the on-board display
9

l Four-wheel drive
l Differential locks
10

Fig. 222

4-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.01.20

 USING THE TRACTOR
Any function previously activated (4WD or differential lock) is disengaged when the button is pressed to switch off the ASM/SBA
system.
1

IMPORTANT
The ASM/SBA system can be switched on also with tractor under load.

The ASM/SBA system disengages 4WD in the following case:

2

l When the tractor speed exceeds the programmed value of 15 km/h.

The ASM/SBA system disengages the differential lock in the following cases:
l When the tractor speed exceeds the programmed value of 13 km/h;
l When the steering angle exceeds 15°.
l In the case of asymmetrical braking (right or left brake, separate pedals)
3

4.4.4 - Front axle suspension

The use of a sprung axle improves comfort conditions, especially when travelling on roads.
The electronic control system ensures that the suspension is always maintained at the optimum level regardless of the load applied
to the front of the tractor.
CAUTION
4

We recommend not using the sprung axle during field operations to avoid loss of traction caused by tractor pitching
motion.

IMPORTANT
The front axle suspension system can only be activated /deactivated when the engine is running.
5

IMPORTANT
In the event of a system malfunction, the sprung axle symbol will flash and the system is disengaged. Contact an
authorised workshop to have the system checked.
6

To engage/disengage the front axle suspension, press pushbutton (1) located on

the instrument panel. 1
7
8

Fig. 223

A warning light on the instrument panel signals activation of the axle suspension system.
9

If the suspension is engaged when the tractor is stationary, the front of the tractor will rise slightly.
Level control of the front axle suspension system is activated as soon as the tractor speed exceeds the programmed value of 2 km/h.
The axle suspension system is not disengaged when the engine stops.
10

4-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.01.21

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.5 - BRAKING
4.5.1 - Hydraulic trailer braking

1
WARNING
The tractor must be equipped with a trailer braking system, which must be properly connected to the trailer.

The tractor may be equipped with an optional hydraulic trailer braking system.

2
The oil utilised is taken from the main hydraulic circuit of the tractor by means of a specific directional control valve.
This directional control valve is operated by a valve that is connected hydraulically to the tractor brakes hydrostatic control.
For trailers with a safety brake, the system is equipped with a specific directional control valve having an ON-OFF control that allows
the safety brake to be connected hydraulically (ON position); or excluded (OFF position).
The control valve is also connected to the handbrake, so that the trailer brake is applied when the handbrake is operated.

3
IMPORTANT
For adjustment of the braking system, contact your authorised Same service centre.

The hydraulic trailer brake coupler (1) is of a special design and is fitted with dif-

4
ferent type of protective cap.

5
Fig. 224

6
Hydraulic braking activation valve
1. OFF position (hydraulic braking disconnected)
2. ON position (hydraulic braking connected)

7
Fig. 225
8

4.5.2 - Hybrid automatic-pneumatic braking device

WARNING
The tractor must be equipped with a trailer braking system, which must be properly connected to the trailer.
9

IMPORTANT
This braking system serves to keep the trailer stopped when the tractor parking brake is applied with the tractor sta-
tionary.
10

An engine driven compressor delivers compressed air to the trailer air brakes (see the drawing in the figure).
For maintenance or adjustment of the braking device, contact an authorised workshop.

4-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.01.22

 USING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3

Fig. 226 - Diagram of the hybrid automatic-pneumatic braking device

4

1. Compressed air accumulator

2. Air compressor
3. Engine
4. Pressure limiting valve
5. Trailer quick-coupler
6. Cab air suspension feed valve
7. Trailer braking valve (2-way)
5

8. Trailer braking valve (1-way) (Germany version only)

9. Braking solenoid valve
10. Relays
11. Brake pedal switch
12. Circuit pressure indicator
13. Main clutch
6

14. Brake operating pump

15. Braking device
16. RED coupler (Germany version only)
17. YELLOW coupler (Germany version only)
18. BLACK coupler (Germany version only) for trailers with brakes that are mechanically applied and pneumatically released.
When towing trailers, always fully comply with the highway code, even on private agricultural land.
7

After connecting the male coupler on the trailer hose to the female coupler on the back of the tractor, check that there is no air leakage
from the connection; by depressing the brake pedal a few times with the engine switched off.
IMPORTANT
The trailer air reservoir will not receive air if the couplers are not connected correctly.
8

After connecting the air couplers, make the electrical connection and check that
the lights work; check also that the pressure gauge is functioning correctly and
showing a pressure reading of 8 bar (do not drive the tractor until the pressure in
the reservoir has reached 8 bar).
9
10

Fig. 226

4-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.01.22

 USING THE TRACTOR
The trailer brakes must always be applied slightly in advance of the tractor brakes.
Adjustment is by way of the directional control valve; this operation is restricted to specially trained personnel.

1
IMPORTANT
Never unhitch the trailer without first making sure that it is unloaded.

Check periodically:

2
l the condition of the hoses;
l the operation of the pressure gauge;
l the tension of the compressor drive belt;
l for oil leaks from the compressor;
l that the couplers are always perfectly clean and that the valves inside the couplers function correctly (by checking that the air
arrives at the air reservoir on the trailer).

3
Every 30 operating hours, drain the water from the reservoir by operating the drain valve located at the bottom of the reservoir.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.01.23

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.6 - REAR PTO
4.6.1 - Power take-off
1

This tractor can be fitted with the following types of PTO.:

l Front PTO (540/1000 rpm)
m Standard version
m Economy version

l Front power take-off (1000 rpm)

2

WARNING
Do not operate the PTO at engine speeds above rated speed. An excessively high speed could damage the imple-
ment and cause injury.

CAUTION
3

With certain PTO driven implements, such a rotary mowers, hay balers, etc. the implement must be connected through
an over-running clutch, otherwise the PTO brake could be damaged.

CAUTION
Before dismounting from the tractor, always disengage the PTO, lower implements to the ground, put the gearbox con-
4

trols in neutral, apply the parking brake, shut off the engine, engage first gear (on tractors with mechanical gearboxes)
and remove the key from the starter switch. For further information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter
“Working with stationary implements” in the safety section of this manual.
DANGER
After disengaging the power take-off, mounted implements may continue to operate due to inertia. Switch off the
5

engine and wait until the implement has come to a complete standstill before approaching the machine to carry out
maintenance.
DANGER
For safety seasons, the PTO shaft shield must never be removed. The safety cap over the PTO shaft must only be
removed in order to couple the PTO shaft to the implement drive shaft when the engine is stopped. We recommended
6

that this cap is always replaced with the engine is shut off when the PTO shaft is not is to be used.
DANGER
When connecting or disconnecting the PTO drive shaft, shut off the engine and apply the parking brake. For further
information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter “Working with stationary implements” in the safety sec-
7

tion of this manual.

DANGER
After disconnecting the drive shaft from the PTO output shaft, always screw the cap back on to the output shaft.
8

DANGER
Only change the PTO output shaft when the tractor engine is shut off and the key is removed from the starter switch.

WARNING
9

If the tractor is equipped with a PTO clutch control of the lever type, always make sure that the lever is in NEUTRAL
before turning the key to start the engine. The engine will not start otherwise.

DANGER
During PTO work, no one must be in the vicinity of the power take-off or the drive shaft.
10

4-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.01.24

 USING THE TRACTOR
CAUTION
When using the tractor with stationary implements driven from the PTO (for example, irrigation pump), before leav-

1
ing the tractor make sure that all gear levers are in neutral, that the handbrake is fully engaged and that the tractor’s
wheels are chocked. For further information on safe working procedures, refer to the chapter “Working with stationary
implements” in the safety section of this manual.

4.6.2 - Rear PTO (540-1000 rpm)

The tractor is equipped with a rear PTO with 2 speeds: 540 rpm and 1000 rpm.

2
For each speed there are two operating modes, Normal and Economy.
Procedure for engaging the PTO:
l Unlock the rear PTO (this operation must be performed whenever the tractor is switched on);
l Select the required rotation speed (540 or 1000 rpm);
l Select the operating mode (Normal - Economy);

3
l Press the PTO engagement control switch.
Procedure for disengaging the PTO:
l throttle the engine back to idle speed;
l wait until the implement is almost stationary;
l disengage the PTO;
set the operating mode selector to neutral;

4
l
l put the PTO speed selector in neutral.
Unlocking the PTO
On starting the engine, the PTO is locked and must be unlocked before it can be used.
If the operator tries to start the PTO when it is in “locked” condition, a warning message will appear on the on-board display ������
accom-
panied by an audible warning (buzzer).

5
To unlock the PTO, press button (1) on the multifunction armrest for a minimum
of 2 seconds.
A message indicating the PTO is unlocked will appear on the on-board display ac-
companied by an audible warning (buzzer).
The PTO will remain unlocked until the tractor engine is switched off.

6
IMPORTANT:
The PTO cannot be locked when the engine is running.

7
Fig. 227

Rear PTO speed selector

CAUTION
At the end of each operation, put the PTO clutch control into neutral and return the PTO speed selector to neutral.
8

To select the 540 or 1000 rpm PTO speeds, use lever (1).
To unlock the lever, lift up locking ring (2).
9
10

Fig. 228

4-19

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 19 20/09/2012 19.01.26

 USING THE TRACTOR
The possible lever positions are as follows:
1. activation of the 1000 rpm PTO
1

2. PTO deactivated
3. activation of the 540 rpm PTO
2

Fig. 229

“ECONOMY MODE” PTO

3

In addition to the 540-1000 rpm PTO, the tractor is also equipped with 540 rpm ECO and 1000 rpm ECO PTOs.
When the ground conditions are relatively easy, it is often the case that the power required from the tractor engine is significantly
lower than the maximum power output.
In these cases, selecting the “ECONOMY” PTO allows the engine to run at a much lower speed without affecting the implement
rotation speed and working capacity.
4

Working in this mode gives major advantages in terms of lower specific fuel consumption values and less stress on the engine.
The selection between the “NORMAL” and “ECONOMY” version is made with the
lever (1).
To unlock the lever, lift up locking ring (2).
5
6

Fig. 230

The possible lever positions are as follows:

1. “Normal” operating mode
2. neutral
3. “Economy” operating mode
7
8

Fig. 231

Rear PTO clutch engage/disengage control

The switch is equipped with a control unit that manages PTO activation and deactivation.
9
10

4-20

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 20 20/09/2012 19.01.26

 USING THE TRACTOR
To activate the PTO, press switch (1), release it and then press it again within 5
seconds.

1
To deactivate the PTO, press switch (1) again.

2
Fig. 231

The first time you press the switch, the corresponding indicator light on the display
will start to flash. The second time you press the switch, the indicator light will il-

3
luminate steadily and the shaft rotation speed will be displayed.

4
Fig. 231

CAUTION

5
The PTO is equipped with a sensor on the output shaft that measures the rpm. If the rpm exceeds the preset value, the
PTO is automatically deactivated, the indicator light is extinguished and an alarm is displayed on the on-board display.

IMPORTANT:
After finishing the work in hand, before disengaging the PTO clutch, throttle the engine back to idling speed, wait for

6
the implement revolutions to drop, then press the switch to disengage the PTO clutch. This will prevent the PTO brake
from overheating dangerously when drive is transmitted back to the shaft from the implement through inertia.
IMPORTANT:
When the engine is stopped the PTO will be automatically disengaged.

7
Ground-operated rear PTO engage/disengage control
The rear PTO can also be engaged by pressing the pushbuttons located on the rear fenders.
Before using the ground-operated controls, the PTO must be unlocked by following the procedure described above.
To engage the PTO press button (1) and release.
8

To activate the PTO, press the button a second time and hold it pressed for 5
seconds. During this stage the indicator light on the instrument panel will remain
steadily illuminated and the rear PTO output shaft will start to rotate. If the button
is released before 5 seconds has elapsed, the PTO will stop.
Activation of the PTO is signalled by illumination of the integral pushbutton light.
9

l Light ON: PTO locked

l Light OFF: PTO activated

Fig. 232
10

When the PTO is in operation, it can be deactivated (with the consequent extinguishing of the indicator light on the instru-
�������
ment panel) by any of the following actions:

4-21

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 21 20/09/2012 19.01.28

 USING THE TRACTOR
l by pressing button (1);
l by switching off the tractor engine;
by reducing the engine speed to < 300 rpm.
1

Length of the drive shaft

The drive shaft should be adapted to suit the implement in use.
1. Overlap length
2. Sliding length
2

Make sure that the overlap section and sliding section are sufficiently long.
If necessary, shorten the drive shaft following the manufacturer’s instructions.
3

Fig. 233

Changing the PTO output shaft.

4

The PTO output shaft can be changed to suit different types of drive shaft.
The tractors are equipped as standard with a 1 3/8” output shaft with 6 splines.
The following output shafts are also available:
l 1 3/4” involute splined output shaft (high-precision 20 splines).
l 1 3/8” involute splined output shaft (high-precision 21 splines).
5

To change the PTO output shaft, loosen hex head screws (1).
Before fitting a new output shaft, clean the contact surfaces and the PTO output
shaft.
Make sure that the shaft is correctly seated.
Tighten the screws evenly to 110 Nm.
6

Fig. 234
7

IMPORTANT:
Check the tightness of the screws and retighten if necessary after the first 10 hours of operation.

Maximum power delivered by the PTO.

8

The maximum PTO performance levels are as follows:

l 1 3/4” involute splined output shaft, at 1000 rpm - Approx. 15% reduction in maximum power;
l 1 3/8” involute splined output shaft, at 1000 rpm - Approx. 15% reduction in maximum power;
l 1 3/8” diameter 6-spline output shaft, 540 rpm 60 kW (82 HP).

4.6.3 - Automatic power take-off

9

The automatic PTO. system stops rotation of the rear PTO shaft. whenever the lower links are raised above a certain height.
10

4-22

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 22 20/09/2012 19.01.29

 USING THE TRACTOR
To activate the automatic PTO, press the corresponding switch (1).
To deactivate the system, press the switch again.

1
2
Fig. 235

The warning light on INFOCENTER indicates the status of the automatic PTO.

3
l on - AUTOMATIC PTO engaged
l Flashing - Operation of the PTO in automatic mode
l off - AUTOMATIC PTO disengaged

When the system is activated, the relative indicator light on the instrument panel turns on and the rear PTO operation will be
����������
deacti-

4
vated automatically as soon as the lower links are raised above a certain height and the light starts flashing.
The PTO is reactivated when the lift arms are lowered below the set threshold.
When the implement descends below the set threshold and the tractor speed is less than 1 Km/h, the P.T.O. is disengaged �������
automa-
tically. To subsequently restart the rear PTO, you must press the control switch again.
When the PTO is disengaged temporarily in automatic mode, it is then permanently deactivated in the following cases:

5
l the external lit controls are operated;
l The external PTO butto is used;
l the PTO remains in automatic “OFF” mode for more than 1.5 minutes;
l the gear is set to idle for more than 1.5 minutes;
l the tractor travels at a speed of more than 25 Km/h;
IMPORTANT

6
When the automatic PTO system is deactivated, the. rear PTO control will also be. engage/disengage control.

7
8
9
10

4-23

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 23 20/09/2012 19.01.30

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.7 - FRONT PTO
4.7.1 - Front power take-off (1000 rpm)
1

The tractor can be equipped with a front PTO with speed of 1000 rpm.
The front PTO operates completely independently of the rear PTO.
Unlocking the PTO.
On starting the engine, the PTO is locked and must be unlocked before it can be used.
2

If the operator tries to start the PTO when it is in “locked” condition, a warning message will appear on the on-board display ������
accom-
panied by an audible warning (buzzer).
IMPORTANT:
The PTO is unlocked by pressing the rear PTO pushbutton.
3

To unlock the PTO, press button (1) on the multifunction armrest for a minimum
of 2 seconds.
A message indicating the PTO is unlocked will appear on the on-board display ac-
companied by an audible warning (buzzer).
The PTO will remain unlocked until the tractor engine is switched off.
4

IMPORTANT:
The PTO cannot be locked when the engine is running.
5

Fig. 236

Front PTO engagement control

The control is equipped with an control unit that manages activation and deactivation of the PTO control.
To activate the PTO, press switch (1), release it and then press it again within 5
seconds.
6

To deactivate the PTO, press switch (1) again.

7

Fig. 237

The first time you press the switch, the corresponding indicator light on the display
8

will start to flash. The second time you press the switch, the indicator light will il-
luminate steadily and the shaft rotation speed will be displayed.
9

Fig. 237
10

4-24

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 24 20/09/2012 19.01.32

 USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT:
After finishing the work in hand, before disengaging the PTO clutch, throttle the engine back to idling speed, wait for

1
the implement revolutions to drop, then press the switch to disengage the PTO clutch. This will prevent the PTO brake
from overheating dangerously when drive is transmitted back to the shaft from the implement through inertia.
Maximum power delivered by the PTO.
The maximum PTO performance levels are as follows:
l 1’ 3/8 6-spline output shaft, at 1000 rpm - Approx. 15% reduction in maximum power

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-25

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 25 20/09/2012 19.01.32

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.8 - HYDRAULIC REAR LIFT
4.8.1 - Hydraulic lift
1

WARNING
Make sure no-one is in the vicinity of the implement before using the hydraulic lift.

WARNING
2

Always lower the implement to the ground when the tractor is not in operation or when carrying out maintenance,
repairs or adjustments.

WARNING
Never use the lift links for towing implements. Only tow implements using the homologated towbars or towing hitches.
3

Towing or hitching using other points of the tractor can cause the machine to overturn.

WARNING
Do not stand or allow anyone else to stand between the tractor and the implement, unless the engine is shut off and
the key removed from the starter switch, the parking brake applied, a gear engaged and all attachments or implements
4

lowered to the ground.

The tractor may be fitted with the follow types of lift:
l electrohydraulically controlled rear lift;
l hydraulic front lift connected to a hydraulic control valve outlet.

4.8.2 - Electrohydraulically controlled rear lift

5

Lift diagram
The rear lift unit for the control of mounted implements, semi-mounted implements and trailed implements is composed
of:
l a hydraulic unit positioned above the PTO casing;
l a three-point linkage to which the implements to be lifted are attached.
6

The electrohydraulically controlled lift hydraulic unit has the following functions:
l working depth adjustment;
l maximum lift height limiting;
l lowering speed;
l wheelslip control;
7

l selecting the control type.

Lift components diagram (3-point linkage) 4
1. Top link
2. Lift rod
3. Lower links 1
6
4. Lift arms
8

2
5. Levelling box 5
6. Sensing device 3
7. With the tie rod pivot inserted in hole 7, the lifting capacity is increased
8. With the tie rod pivot inserted in hole 8, the lifting height is increased

8 7
9

Fig. 238
10

4-26

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 26 20/09/2012 19.01.33

 USING THE TRACTOR
Lift controls
The lift controls are composed of:

1
l lift control panel, located on the console to the right of the operator;
l Controls on multifunction armrest;
l ground-operated controls on the rear fenders;
l emergency manual controls.
IMPORTANT

2
The lift is always locked when the engine is started.

Lift controls located on the console to the right of the operator

Control console
5 4

3
6
1. Control of working depth and FLOAT; 6
2. Maximum lifting height control;
3. Lowering speed regulator;
4. Wheelslip control setting;
5. Selecting the control type; 1
6. Raising and lowering indicator LEDs;
7. Lift status indicator LED.

4
3
2
7
Fig. 239

Controls on multifunction armrest

5
l Control lever (1) equipped with:
m 3 stable positions 1
m 4 mobile positions

AUTO
PTO

6
Fig. 240

7
Working depth control
The working depth control knob is composed of:
1. control knob;
2. adjuster ring; 2
3. graduated scale.
8
1

3
9

Fig. 241

The knob has a scale (3) graduated from 1 to 8 to allow more precise adjustment of working depth.
Turning the knob to the left lowers the lift while turning it to the right raises it.
This control serves to obtain the maximum sensitivity in control of pitching movements when set to position 8 on the scale, or to
10

deactivate pitch control when set to the FLOAT position.

Adjuster ring (2), that can be set to the required working depth, is located under the knob. The locating stop allows the operator to

4-27

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 27 20/09/2012 19.01.35

 USING THE TRACTOR
immediately return the control knob to the set working depth. This ring is particularly useful in those jobs which require repeated
operation of the position control knob (e.g. when ploughing).
1

When the knob is turned fully left, the lift is set to FLOAT position.
In this position all control functions are disengaged, allowing the implement to move freely to follow the contours of the terrain.
Maximum lifting height control
This control serves to set the maximum height to which the lift arms can be raised.
This setting applies in “control” mode and when the implement lift is raised.
2

Turn the knob fully to the left to obtain the lowest possible maximum height setting;
when the knob is turned fully to the right, the arms may be raised to the maximum
height permitted by the mechanical system.
3

Fig. 242

Lowering speed regulator

4

This control serves to set the speed at which the lift arms are lowered.
Turn the knob to the left (tortoise symbol) to inhibit lift lowering, also with the en-
gine switched off.
Turn the knob to the right (hare symbol) to obtain maximum lowering speed.
The lowering speed is continuously adjustable between these two positions.
If the knob is turned to the tortoise symbol and arms lowering is requested, the
5

lifting and lowering LEDs will flash simultaneously (to indicate that lowering is in-
hibited).

Fig. 243
6

Wheelslip control setting

This control is only enabled if the radar is installed and allows wheelslip percent-
age setting.
Turn the knob to set the permitted percentage of wheelslip within the range of 8 to
45%. The value is varied progressively.
7
8

Fig. 244
9
10

4-28

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 28 20/09/2012 19.01.35

 USING THE TRACTOR
The actual wheelslip value is displayed on the instrument panel in the form of a
bar graph.

1
2
Fig. 244

If the actual wheelslip exceeds the set value, the linkage is automatically lifted slightly. When the wheelslip falls below the set value,
the rear lift will again be lowered to the set working depth.

3
Turning the knob to the OFF position deactivates the electronic wheelslip control.
Selecting the control type
This control serves to select the type of lift control:
1. Position control, in this position the working height of mounted implements

4
is controlled and maintained using the working depth control knob.
2. Draft control, in this position the implement is raised when soil resistance
increases and lowered when soil resistance decreases.
3. Mixed control: this position allows constant adjustment on the basis of the
position or tractive force, which depends on the type of soil.

5
Fig. 245

Turn the knob fully to the right for position control mode operation of the rear lift.
Turn the knob fully to the left for draft control mode operation of the rear lift.

6
Turn the knob to an intermediate position for mixed control operation of the rear lift. The further the knob is turned to the right, the
greater the percentage of work performed in position control with respect to the percentage in draft control.
IMPORTANT
On tractors with sprung front axle disengage the front axle suspension mechanism before engaging draft control.

7
IMPORTANT
When coupling and uncoupling implements, turn the control type selector knob fully to the right (position control). 8
Raising and lowering indicator LEDs
These LEDs illuminate when the corresponding raise and lower control solenoid
valves are energised and they indicate raising or lowering of the implement.

The LED colours are:

1. green - raising
9

2. red - lowering
10

Fig. 246

4-29

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 29 20/09/2012 19.01.36

 USING THE TRACTOR
Lift status indicator LED
The red LED shows the lift status:
1

l LED on continuously, lift locked;

l fast flashing LED: lift locked or unlocked;
l slow flashing LED: lift ready for operation;
l LED off: lift in controlled operation and free to move.
2

Fig. 247

Lift controls located on the multifunction armrest

3

The control consists of a 3-position lever: 1

1. Lock position 2
2. Working position
3. Controlled working position
4

3
5

Fig. 248

Lock position (1): when the lever is in this position the lift is locked.
1
6
7

Fig. 249

Working position (2): when the lever is in this position, you can raise (2A) and
lower (2B) the lift. The maximum admissible lowering speed and height must be 2A

set via the console to the right of the driver. 2

8

IMPORTANT: 2B

When the lever is moved to the working position (2) wait for 1 sec-
ond, to ensure that the lifting and lowering functions are enabled.
9

Fig. 250
10

4-30

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 30 20/09/2012 19.01.38

 USING THE TRACTOR
Controlled working position (3): when the lever is in this position, you can control
rapid raising (3A) and Float-Control operation (3B) of the lift.

1
3A

3B

2
Fig. 251

The lift is always locked when the engine is started and lift status indicator light is on when the engine is started.

3
To unlock the lift, proceed as follows:
l always move the control lever to the locked position (1), if set to another position (e.g. Working position (2)
l move the lever to the working position (2)
l move the lever to the lifting position (2A), the lift status indicator light starts flashing quickly and the buzzer is activated.
l after 2 seconds the lift status indicator light starts flashing slowly and the instrument panel displays a message notifying the
driver of lift release and the set working mode (Manual-Semiautomatic-Automatic)

4
To block the lift, proceed as follows:
l move the lever to the locked position (1);
l the lift rises to the maximum height and then locks in position, with the lift status indicator LED permanently lit;
With the system locked, any alteration in the position of the setting control knobs (including the maximum lift height knob) will have
no effect on the position of the lift.

5
The lift also locks when travelling at speeds over 20 km/h, if the lever was previously in a working position (2); to release, follow the
procedure described above.
When the external controls located on the fender are used, if the list was released previously, the armrest control is disabled, to
prevent inadvertent movement of the lift due to activation of the control lever. After using the external pushbuttons, move the control
lever to enable armrest control functions again.

6
After using the external pushbuttons, the lever is re-enabled as follows:
l If the lever is in the working position (2), it is reactivated 1 second after the external controls are released.
l If the lever is in the controlled working position (3), the lift is set to a control standby condition (slow flashing led ).
On release of the external controls, send a command to return the lift to controlled working mode (3B) or move it to the maxi-
mum height (3A).

7
Operating modes (Manual-Semiautomatic-Automatic)
IMPORTANT:
The different operating modes can be set with the All Round Tester, available at an authorised dealers. 8
The operating mode is available when the control lever is in the controlled working position (3).
Lever operating modes are as follows:
l position 3A: this lever position is used for rapid raising.
l position 3B: this lever position is used for lowering. The lowering action is conditioned by the mode set using the All Round
Tester:
9

Table 4
LOWERING MODE
Press and release the lever MANUAL mode Controlled working mode with active descent speed restriction
once AUTOMATIC mode Descent at controlled speed to memorised position, followed by
controlled work
SEMI-AUTOMATIC mode Controlled working mode with active descent speed restriction
10

4-31

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 31 20/09/2012 19.01.38

 USING THE TRACTOR
LOWERING MODE
Press and release the lever MANUAL mode No action by lift
once after the first time AUTOMATIC mode Interrupts controlled descent mode and sets to controlled work
1

without descent speed restriction

SEMI-AUTOMATIC mode Controlled working mode without active descent speed restriction
Press and release the lever MANUAL mode The lift sets to FLOAT mode and on release sets to controlled
once after the first time work mode with descent speed restriction
AUTOMATIC mode The lift sets to FLOAT mode and on release sets to controlled
work mode
2

SEMI-AUTOMATIC mode The lift sets to FLOAT mode and on release sets to controlled
work mode
IMPORTANT
Oscillation damping remains activated even when the lift is locked.
3

External control for hitching implements

This control must only be used when you have to connect an implement.
The controls are comprised of the following pushbuttons:
1. Raising control
4

2. Lowering control
5

Fig. 252

The lift is always locked when the engine is started. Press both buttons (1-2) simultaneously for approximately 2 seconds to enable
6

the external controls. If the lift has already been unlocked by means of the controls in the cab it can already be utilised by means of
the external controls.
The use of the ground-operated controls interrupts control of the rear lift, which must be subsequently reactivated.
Emergency manual controls
CAUTION
7

This operation should only be carried out in cases of extreme necessity and with the engine running at low speed.

The controls of the hydraulic control valve solenoid valves are located on the lift housing. In the event of a fault in the electronic
��������������
sy-
stem, it will still be possible to control the lift by means of these pushbuttons
8

The controls are comprised of the following pushbuttons:

1. Raising control
2. Lowering control
9
10

Fig. 253

4-32

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 32 20/09/2012 19.01.39

 USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
Release the pushbutton before the lift arms reach the maximum height position, as the automatic position sensor is

1
disabled during this operation.

Vibration damping system control

During road transport with a mounted implement, uneven road surfaces may cause pitching motion of the tractor that �������������
impacts nega-
tively on safety and comfort when driving. The pitching motion is reduced by the vibration damping system.

2
The vibration damping system cuts in automatically when travel speed is above 8 km/h and cuts out when the speed falls below 6
km/h.
To activate the vibration damping system, set the lift to the following con-
figuration:
l Set the lift arms to the required position using the maximum height control;

3
the working area (1) must correspond to at least 65% of the maximum lift-
ing height;

4
Fig. 254

The damping level can be set using the working depth control knob. In the floating position (FLOAT) the vibration damping system is
deactivated. Turning the knob to the right increases the sensitivity of the damping system.
When the vibration damping system is activated, the implement is lowered slightly.

5
When the vibration damping system is deactivated the implement is again raised to the initially set position.
AUTOMATIC function (Autodrop)
During ploughing, the ECU monitors the average working depth, when the rear
hydraulic lift is set to AUTOMATIC mode.
This position is memorised at the end of the furrow when the ascent command is

6
given.
On return to the furrow, on the first descent command, the arms move down at
the set speed through to the memorised position (X), after which the lift sets to
controlled work mode without descent speed restriction. X

Fig. 255
7
IMPORTANT:
The position is lost each time the tractor is switched off. On the first furrow, positioning of a potentiometer is recom-
8

mended on FLOAT so that the arms move down at the set speed. As soon as the implement reaches the ground, turn
the potentiometer to the required depth.
IMPORTANT:
When the tractor is stationary, lowering speed limiting control is always activated, with the exception of the FLOAT
9

control pushbutton on the multifunction control lever.

IMPORTANT:
The AUTODROP function can be disabled by any authorised service centre.
10

4-33

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 33 20/09/2012 19.01.40

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.9 - HYDRAULIC FRONT LIFT
4.9.1 - Front lift
1

5
2

4
1
3

2
6

1
4

2
5

Fig. 256 - Hydraulic front lift

1. Lift cylinder
2. Lower links
3. Top link adjustable lengthwise
4. Circuit cock
5. Hydraulic pressure damper
6

6. Hitches
IMPORTANT:
When using the hydraulic front lift, you must not connect any implements to the corresponding rear hydraulic service
couplers. Otherwise, each time you operated the front lift you would also operate the rear implement. If you must use
the rear hydraulic couplers shut off the cocks
7

CAUTION
On all tractors equipped with front lift and PTO and fitted with non-reinforced front tyres, for reasons of safety, we
strongly recommend that you do not exceed 25 km/h when carrying heavy loads on the front lift.

Lift controls
8

The lift is operated by two hydraulic cylinders controlled with one of the cross-gate control lever controlling remote valves 3 and 4,
located on the right of the driving position
The lifting cylinders are double acting. Implements can therefore work both in float mode, meaning that they are left free to follow the
profile of the ground, and be kept in the position set in the work phase.
9
10

4-34

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 34 20/09/2012 19.01.41

 USING THE TRACTOR
With the shut-off cocks open, move the lever to the right (position 1) to raise the lift
1
or to the left (position 2) to lower it.

1
2

2
Fig. 257

Description of components

3
Changeover valve
The changeover valve is fitted between the control valve and hydraulic
cylinders and is operated by two levers which can be used to set different
functions.
1. Cock for hydraulic circuit of the front lift

4
2. Cock to select single or double-acting lift operating modes.

5
Fig. 258

The cock for hydraulic circuit of the front lift is equipped with the following
positions:
1. Open circuit
2. Closed circuit

6
7
Fig. 259

The cock to select the lift operating mode has the following positions:
1. Double-acting position, lifting with pressure and lowering with pressure.
2. Single-acting position, lifting with pressure and lowering without pressure
8
9

Fig. 260

During road transport with front-mounted implements, close the hydraulic circuit cock (Position 2) to lock the hydraulic lift to the set
position.
10

4-35

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 35 20/09/2012 19.01.42

 USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
The changeover levers must be turned right up to the stop.
1

Hydraulic pressure damper

The damper is designed to absorb any peaks in pressure due to jolting during
transport
2
3

Fig. 261

WARNING
4

Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

Lower links
The lower links are folding and must be set to different positions according to the type of work.
The lower link is fixed by means of two pins with cotters. The possible positions are shown below:
5

Position for normal working conditions, links secured without free play.
6
7

Fig. 262

Float position, links free to move upwards and downwards with 90 mm play.
8
9

Fig. 263
10

4-36

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 36 20/09/2012 19.01.43

 USING THE TRACTOR
Transport position, when the front lift is not in use, retract the cylinders completely
and secure the links.

1
2
Fig. 264

Top link adjustable lengthwise

3
The top link of the front lift is fixed to the tractor using pin (1), which must be se-
cured with the cotter.
During road transport with no front-mounted implements or implement carrier, the
top link must be folded upwards and secured in place with retaining pin (2). Also
this pin must be secured with the cotter.

4
Fig. 265

5
The top link height can be adjusted according to the implement.
To adjust the length of the top link, turn sleeve (3).
The two threaded rods must be screwed into the central sleeve by equal amounts 3
on both sides.
The central part should then be secured using lock nut (4).

6
4

7
Fig. 266

Hitches
To attach the implement to the lift proceed as shown:
l fully lower the lower links;
l approach with the tractor until the quick-attach link ends on the lower links
8

are directly underneath the implement mounting pins;

l raise the lower links until the implement is attached and secured with latch
(1);
l attach the top link to the the hitch point on the implement.
9

Fig. 267
10

4-37

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 37 20/09/2012 19.01.44

 USING THE TRACTOR
To unhitch the implement from the tractor, proceed as follows:
l unhitch the top link from the implement.
1

l lower the implement to a safe height at which the top link is no longer under
load;
l raise, tilt and attach the locking devices of the lower link hooks (position 2);
l continue to lower the lift and then slowly reverse the tractor away from the
implement;
l Return the locking devices to the starting position.
2

Fig. 268

Implement transport, fitting and removing

3

Implement transport
The distance between the front edge of the mounted implement and the centre of
the steering wheel must not exceed 3.5 metres.
If this distance is exceeded, the driver’s field of view will be obstructed. A second
person must give the tractor driver all the instructions necessary to drive safely.
In these conditions, when driving on the public roads at night it is possible that
4

visibility is further impaired as the light from the headlights will be obstructed by
the front implement. It will therefore be necessary use the tractor’s repeater head-
lights.
5

Fig. 269

Transport without mounted implement

l Raise power lift all the way and fold up lower links, alternatively remove the lower link or fit tractor triangle.
Transport with mounted implement
6

l When transporting items with mounted implements, ensure you have sufficient load on the rear axle; add ballast if necessary;
l Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and total weight;
l Consider the dimensions of the vehicle and use repeater headlights if necessary;
l Secure the mounted implement to prevent accidental lowering (lock the control valve).
Fitting and removing front-mounted implements
Before attaching implements to the top link, move the hydraulic system lever to the neutral position, to prevent accidental movement
7

of the lift.
CAUTION
Make sure that no-one is standing in the vicinity of the implement to be attached or detached.
8

Fitting and removing front-mounted implements with attachment triangle

For the attachment and detachment of front implements using the implement carrier consult the instructions provided by the
���������
manu-
facturer of the implement carrier.
IMPORTANT
During application of the hitch triangle, ensure that all the fixing bolts are correctly locked and restrained!
9
10

4-38

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 38 20/09/2012 19.01.45

 USING THE TRACTOR
To hitch the implement, proceed as follows:
l Carefully move tractor triangle (1) under quick-release attachment frame

1
(2)
l Raise the tractor triangle until the locking hook (3) engages the adjustable
detent (4).

2
Fig. 270

IMPORTANT

3
Adjust the detent and secure the locking hook with a safety cotter!

Instructions for the use of tractor-mounted implements

The front lift is designed for normal agricultural work; the use of implements of significant height (e.g. forklifts), with large overhang
(e.g. offset verge mowers) or used at high speed (e.g. snow ploughs) can give rise to unforeseeable stresses of the front lift or tractor.

4
When fitting a front implement, check whether the tractor, front power lift, top link, drive shaft and implement have sufficient free
space for all possible movements. Appropriate actions to avoid collisions must be taken if necessary.
Engagement positions of top link
Table 5
LOWER SWINGING LINK IN LOWER SWINGING LINK FULLY CONSEQUENCE

5
WORKING POSITION RAISED
Top link in highest front attach- Increased lift height (h) In-
ment hole creased tilt angle (a) Increased
a
G top link angle (b) Reduced max-
b
imum implement weight (G)

6
h

Fig. 271 Fig. 272

Top link in lowest front attach- Reduced lift height (h) Reduced
ment hole tilt angle (a) Reduced top link

7
a angle (b) Considerable maxi-
b G
mum implement weight (G)

h
8

Fig. 273 Fig. 274

9
10

4-39

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 39 20/09/2012 19.01.51

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.10 - 3-POINT LINKAGE
4.10.1 - 3-point linkage
1

The tractor’s three-point linkage is used to attach implements operated by the hydraulic lift.
WARNING
Hitching to the rear axle or any other point above the swinging drawbar or the centre of rear wheels can cause the
tractor to tip over backwards.
2

WARNING
When working with the 3-point linkage, keep well clear of the operating radius of the lift arms and any attached imple-
ment. This is to avoid the risk of injury in the case of incorrect manoeuvres.

CAUTION
3

Always check that the weight of the implement is compatible with the maximum permissible load on the tractor axles.

Note:
When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3-point linkage, take care that it does not come apart and ensure that a
4

sufficient length of the threaded end of the turnbuckle is screwed into the turnbuckle housing to withstand the tractive
force applied when working.
This tractor, if appropriately adjusted, is capable of carrying category II and III implements.
The lower lift arms and top link are fitted with quick-attach ends for quick and easy implement attachment.
The lengths of the top link and the lift rods can be adjusted by way of threaded sleeves fitted with handles.
5

The three-point linkage can have several adjustments:

l Manual adjustment of the lift rods
l Manual adjustment of the top link
l Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers
6
7
8
9

Fig. 275 - 3-point linkage

10

1. Top link
2. Upper lift arm
3. Lift cylinders

4-40

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 40 20/09/2012 19.01.52

 USING THE TRACTOR

1
2
3
4
Fig. 275 - 3-point linkage
4. Lower link
5. Lift rod

5
6. Stabiliser
Manual adjustment of the lift rods
Adjusting the length of the lift rods determines the excursion of the lower links.
Depending on the type of implement mounted, the length of both lift rods or just one can be adjusted.
By shortening the lift rods the lift height is increased (e.g. during transport or with ploughs that require reduced soil penetration).

6
The lift rods are adjusted as follows:
l unhook the handle (1) from the catch (2);
l turn the handle (1) clockwise to lengthen the rod and anticlockwise to short-
en it.

1 7
2
8

Fig. 276

The lift rods can be anchored to the lower arms by means of a fixed pivot (3) or by
means of a slot (4). Anchor the lift rods to the lift arms by means of locking pin (5)
Using the slot (4) facilitates the implement attachment, moreover it allows wider
implements to freely follow the ground contours for certain specific applications.
9

5
3

4
10

Fig. 277

4-41

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 41 20/09/2012 19.01.52

 USING THE TRACTOR
Manual adjustment of the top link
Adjust the length of the top link after hitching the implement to the tractor.
1

This adjustment serves to position the implement at the correct angle to the ground. Shortening the top link increases the angle;
lengthening the top link reduces the angle.
The top link is adjusted as follows:
l pull spring (1) back to release locking pin (2);
l rotate central part of top link (3) to obtain the desired length, taking care not 1
2

to extend it past the reference mark on the threads.

l flip the spring over the pin to ensure the top link cannot rotate.
2

3
3

Fig. 278

Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers

WARNING
4

Never enter the area between the tractor and the implement when the tractor is in motion. Always lower the implement
before stopping the tractor.

The telescopic stabilisers serve to prevent or limit the sideways movement of the implement.
If locking catch (1) is lowered the lower links are locked.
5

If retaining ring (2) is removed and locking catch (1) lifted, securing it with the chain 1 2
at a certain height, then the lower links will be free in the lowered position although
they will be locked in the raised position.
6

Fig. 279

The stabilisers must be locked during transport of implements and when working with a grader blade, excavator, roller, mower,
�����������
see-
7

der, auger and other similar implements.

The stabilisers must be adjusted to allow a little free movement when working with ploughs, harrows, ditch diggers, cultivators and
similar implements; or when working in draft control mode.
To adjust the length of the stabilisers, lift catch (1) then lift lever (2) and turn it until
the required length is reached. 1
8

2
9

Fig. 280
10

4-42

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 42 20/09/2012 19.01.53

 USING THE TRACTOR
Hitching and unhitching implements
Implement hitching

1
CAUTION
Make sure that no-one is standing in the vicinity of the implement to be attached or detached.

Before attaching implements to the top link, move the hydraulic system lever to the neutral position, to prevent accidental movement

2
of the lift.
To attach the implement to the lift proceed as shown:
l fully lower the lower links;
l approach with the tractor until the quick-attach link ends on the lower links
are directly underneath the implement mounting pins;
raise the lower links until the implement is attached and secured with latch

3
l

(1);

4
Fig. 280

To hitch the top link, raise lever (2) slightly and attach the arm to the top link. When
lever (2) is released retainer (3) returns to its locking position.

5
2

6
Fig. 281

Implement unhitching
Lower the implement to a safe height at which the top link is no longer under load.
1

7
After detaching the top link proceed as shown:
3
l raise lever (1) slightly and remove the arm;
l When lever (1) is released retainer (2) returns to its locking position 4
l The top link must be locked by inserting bracket (3) into support (4)
2
8

Fig. 282
9
10

4-43

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 43 20/09/2012 19.01.53

 USING THE TRACTOR
After detaching the top link proceed as shown:
l raise, tilt and attach the locking devices of the lower link hooks (position 2);
1

l continue to lower the lift and drive the tractor forward slowly;
l return the locking devices to the starting position.
2

Fig. 282
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-44

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 44 20/09/2012 19.01.53

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.11 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
4.11.1 - Hydraulic system

1
Note:
If the pump becomes noisy when the hydraulic system is hot, the hydraulic oil filter may be dirty. In this case, replace
the oil filter immediately.

The tractors in this series are equipped with a load-sensing hydraulic system with variable displacement pump for services (auxiliary

2
control valves, trailer hydraulic braking system, etc.) and for the steering circuit.
The load-sensing hydraulic system is served by a variable displacement piston pump that supplies oil to the services in relation to
demand.
In this system, when the engine is running at maximum speed and no hydraulic actuators are in operation, the pump effectively only
circulates the oil that is dispersed through internal leakage in the devices connected to the system (just a few litres per minute), thus

3
saving energy and fuel.
In addition, the displacement of the variable piston pump is greater than the potential demand of any single service, so that there will
always be a sufficient flow rate to satisfy several services simultaneously.
4.11.2 - Remote valve
The remote valve is a device equipped with a control lever that serves to route oil from a pressurised circuit to one or more outlet

4
ports, thereby enabling the control of external implements with hydraulic actuators and making it possible to meet all application
requirements.
l The control valves are of the DOUBLE-ACTING type

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing

5
serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure fluid leaks
may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking
for leaks. NEVER use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect
your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate at-
tention from medical personnel with experience of this particular

6
problem.

Fig. 283

Double-acting remote control valve.

7
When the control lever is moved in one direction, the control valve spool shifts to
allow pressurised oil to flow out through one port and return through a second port.
When the control lever is moved in the opposite direction, the direction of flow is
reversed.

The control lever has 3 positions:

8

l 1 - outlet
l 0 - neutral
l 2 - outlet
Fig. 284
9
10

4-45

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 45 20/09/2012 19.01.53

 USING THE TRACTOR
Double-acting device with a FLOAT position
Double-acting device with an additional position that allows simultaneous con-
1

nection of the remote valve’s two output ports to the discharge. This enables the
attached implement to freely follow the contours of the land.

The control lever has 4 positions:

l 1 - outlet
l 0 - neutral
2

l 2 - return
l FLOAT
Fig. 285

DETENT device
3

This is a mechanical detent that engages the control valve spool (which keeps the
lever in position) when the spool is moved to the end of its stroke. The device can
only be released manually by operating the control lever.
If the spool is not equipped with a DETENT, the control lever will always return to
the NEUTRAL position when released by the operator.
4

The control lever has 4 positions:

l 1 - outlet
l 0 - neutral
l 2 - return Fig. 286
l DETENT
5

Non-return valve (check valve)

Mechanically operated check valve that prevents leakage past the control valve
spool and thus undesired movements of the hydraulic cylinders.
6

Fig. 287
7

FLOW DIVIDER
Allows the oil flow rate to be set, independently of the pressure, in a certain port of
the double-acting control valve.
8
9

Fig. 288

WARNING
Do not stand or pass underneath hydraulically supported loads.
10

4-46

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 46 20/09/2012 19.01.54

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.11.3 - Types of remote control valve
The tractor is configured in the following version:

1
l Standard configuration
m 4 remote valves for a total of 8 hydraulic lines
m Two mechanical control levers, remote valves 1 and 2
m One mechanical cross-gate lever, remote valves 3 and 4

2
3
4
5
Fig. 289 - Remote control valve diagram
1. LH end cover with pilot valve for electrically operated valve sections
2. Electrically operated valve section 1
3. Electrically operated valve section 2

6
4. Manifold
5. Lift control section
6. Antishock valve
7. Electrically operated valve section 3
8. Electrically operated valve section 4
9. RH end cover with Load-Sensing signal output

7
10. Check valve (mechanically operated)
11. Spacer
12. Pilot valve for electrically operated valve sections

4.11.4 - Remote valve controls

WARNING
8

The hydraulic control valve levers must be returned to their neutral positions as soon as the external rams reach their
stroke limit, in order to avoid maintaining maximum pressure in the hydraulic circuit for longer than necessary, as this
could dangerously overload the system.
9
10

4-47

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 47 20/09/2012 19.01.54

 USING THE TRACTOR
Remote valve controls
1. Remote valve 1 control
1

2. Remote valve 2 control

3. Cross-gate control lever for remote valves 3 - 4
2

Fig. 290

Operation of control valves with mechanical control

3

The remote valve control levers have four positions:

l Lower
l Neutral position
l Raise
l Float (using the locking ring)
With the locking ring (1) in the lower position, the control lever is locked in neutral
4

position.
5

Fig. 291
6

To operate the lever, proceed as follows:

l raise locking ring (1);
l rotate it clockwise 90°;
l release the locking ring
l move the lever forwards or backwards to operate the remote valve.
7
8

Fig. 292

To activate the Float function, proceed as follows:

l unlock the control lever as described above;
l raise locking ring (1);
l rotate it clockwise 45°;
release the locking ring.
9

l
l push the lever forward to the Float position
10

Fig. 293

4-48

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 48 20/09/2012 19.01.57

 USING THE TRACTOR
To enable the raising and lowering function from the Float position, proceed as follows:
l raise the locking ring;

1
l rotate it anti-clockwise 45°;
l release the locking ring to enable raising or lowering only.
To lock the control lever in the neutral position, proceed as follows:
l lift the locking ring slightly;
l rotate it anti-clockwise 90°;
release the locking ring.

2
l

In the case of diggers, shovels and loaders, operating the FLOAT control will allow
the cylinder to move freely and thus the bucket to follow the contours of the terrain.
NOTES:
Float position may also be used to lower the tipping body of a trailer

3
when the ram is operated as a single-acting cylinder.

4
Fig. 294

Use of remote valves with cross-gate control lever

The control levers have four positions for each remote valve they control:
l Lower
Neutral position

5
l
l Raise
l Float (using the locking ring)
With the locking ring (1) in the lower position, the control lever is locked in neutral
position.

Fig. 295
6
7
To operate remote valve 3, proceed as follows:
l raise locking ring (1);
8
l rotate it clockwise 90°;
l release the locking ring.
l move the lever forwards or backwards to operate the remote valve;
l push the lever fully forward to activate the Float function
9

Fig. 296
10

4-49

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 49 20/09/2012 19.01.58

 USING THE TRACTOR
To operate remote valve 4, proceed as follows:
l unlock the control lever (operation of remote valve 3) as described above;
1

l raise locking ring (1);

l rotate it clockwise 45°;
l release the locking ring.
l move the lever to the right or to the left to operate the remote valve;
l push the lever fully to the left to activate the Float function
2

Fig. 297

To lock the function of remote valve 4 proceed as follows:

3

l raise the locking ring;

l rotate it anti-clockwise 45°;
l release the locking ring.
To lock the control lever in the neutral position, proceed as follows:
l lift the locking ring slightly;
rotate it anti-clockwise 90°;
4

l
l release the locking ring.
Simultaneous operation of two remote valves
Diagram showing positions of the control lever for the simultaneous control of two remote valves
The control lever is operated as follows:
5

l Position S: Lower
l Position H: Raise
l Position S3-H4: Operation of remote valve 3 (partial lowering) and opera-
tion of remote valve 4 (partial raising)
l Position H3-H4: Operation of remote valve 3 (partial raising) and operation
of remote valve 4 (partial raising)
6

l Position H3-S4: Operation of remote valve 3 (partial raising) and operation

of remote valve 4 (partial lowering)
l Position S3-S4: Operation of remote valve 3 (partial lowering) and opera-
tion of remote valve 4 (partial lowering)
Fig. 298

Use of the control lever with FLOAT function

7

The control lever is operated as follows:

l Position S: Lower
l Position H: Raise
l Position F: Float
8
9

Fig. 299
10

4-50

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 50 20/09/2012 19.01.58

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.11.5 - Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic couplers

1
2
3
4
Fig. 300 - Diagram of the correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic couplers

5
l A - Delivery line for cylinder extension
l B - Return line
l C - Control levers
l D - Remote control valve
l E - Rear hydraulic couplers
Correspondence between the control levers and the hydraulic couplers is identi-

6
fied by means of numbers (from 1 to 4 in the case of the maximum configuration
of 8-way control valves), marked both alongside the control lever and on the decal
affixed to the bottom of the cab rear window.
1. Yellow - Return line coupler
2. Red - Delivery line coupler

7
Fig. 301
8
9
10

4-51

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 51 20/09/2012 19.01.58

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.11.6 - Remote control valve operation
Connection of an implement to the hydraulic service couplers
1

IMPORTANT:
The hydraulic couplers have 1/2” female fittings that allow connec-
tion under pressure of the male fitting on the implement hose. The
couplers are also designed to disconnect automatically if acciden-
tally pulled.
2
3

Fig. 302

IMPORTANT:
Check that connection hoses are of sufficient length to allow unimpeded manoeuvring of the tractor and implement.
4

For connection of the hoses to the tractor hydraulic couplers raise the coloured
cover (red or yellow) (1) and insert hose (2) into the female socket.
To disconnect the hoses, push hose (2) into the coupler while pushing the ring
on the coupler forward towards the tractor, then quickly pull back on the hose to
release it from the coupler.
5

Fig. 303
6

WARNING
Take maximum care when attaching and detaching implements.
Use sufficiently strong stands; avoid using cement blocks or bricks.
Do not allow anyone to come near the tractor.
7
8

Fig. 304

Behaviour of the oil flow in the hydraulic circuit connecting the couplers and the
actuator cylinders on the implement.
1. Pressurised oil delivery to ram - LIFTING
2. Pressurised oil delivery to ram - LOWERING
9
10

Fig. 305

4-52

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 52 20/09/2012 19.01.59

 USING THE TRACTOR
Example of connection and operation of a double-acting cylinder
(overturning of a reversible plough)
l

1
To turnover the plough, just move the lever forward or backwards according to
whether you wish to turn the plough clockwise or anti-clockwise.

2
Fig. 306

Example of connection to a single-acting cylinder

3
l Trailer with hydraulic tipping
To tip the trailer, move the control lever to the “raise” position.
To lower the trailer, move the control lever to the “lower” position.
To lower the trailer, you can also use the FLOAT position.

4
NOTE:
Hose (1) must be connected to the control valve upper hydraulic
service.

IMPORTANT:

5
Release the control switch as soon as the external cylinder reaches Fig. 307
its stroke limit, to avoid maintaining maximum pressure in the hy-
draulic circuit for too long and thus dangerously overloading the
system.
Operation of hydraulic devices that require a constant flow of oil

6
le.g. hydraulic motors
Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions when connecting hydraulic motors.
For hydraulic motors with just one direction of rotation, the return port must be
connected to the free drain line. The pressure line is to be connected to the control
valve. For hydraulic motors with two possible directions of rotation, the yellow and

7
red couplers of the desired control valve are generally used.
To disengage drive, use the FLOAT position. In this way the hydraulic motor is not
stopped too brusquely. The implement will be gradually brought to a stop.
Fit an oil temperature sensor and, if necessary, an oil cooler. The maximum per-
missible temperature is 110°C (230°F).
Fig. 308
8

WARNING:
Do not move the control valve immediately to the neutral position, as the back pressure generated could damage the
hoses if the hydraulic motor is not equipped with relief valves.
9
10

4-53

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 53 20/09/2012 19.01.59

 USING THE TRACTOR
Oil drip collectors for rear hydraulic service couplers
When attaching and detaching hydraulic services (1) for external implements, a
1

small amount of oil may spill out from the hoses.

To prevent oil spilling onto the ground under the service couplers, a tube (2) has
been inserted to drain the oil into a drip collector (3).
This oil can be recovered by removing the collector (3) from its housing. Periodi-
cally check that the cap (4) is securely fastened.
2

IMPORTANT:
Before the oil is re-used it must be filtered.

Fig. 309

External union - POWERBEYOND

3

1. POWERBEYOND union (Pump pressure line fitting - 1”) - red protective

cap
2. LS (Load-Sensing) control pipe union - blue protective cap
3. Return - green protective cap
The tractor can be equipped with a POWERBEYOND hydraulic service (1) at the
4

rear. This hydraulic service is designed to drive implements that require high oil
flows.
The correct oil flow is ensured by a variable displacement pump governed by a
load sensing hydraulic control system.
The implement’s Load Sensing hose must be connected to the tractor’s Load
5

Sensing hose (2) if the implement is controlled by a Load Sensing hydraulic sys-
Fig. 310
tem.
If the implement has a “free” drain line, this must be connected to hydraulic union
(3) at the rear of the tractor. Hydraulic services and unions differ in shape and
colour to avoid accidental incorrect connections.
The hoses and couplers of the hydraulic POWERBEYOND system (1) are 1 inch
6

in diameter to permit high oil flow rates.

Free drain return of front and rear oil
1. Free return line union
Oil returning from the external implements such as hydraulic motors passes
through free return line (1) and returns to the gearbox.
7

The free discharge line for oil return to the gearbox is identified by its red protec-
tive cap.
8

Fig. 311
9
10

4-54

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 54 20/09/2012 19.02.00

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.11.7 - Front hydraulic service couplers

1
2
3
4
Fig. 312 - Operating diagram for the front hydraulic services
1. Control levers assembly
2. Remote control valve

5
m A - Delivery line for cylinder extension
m B - Return line

3. Rear hydraulic services

m A - Delivery line for cylinder extension
m B - Return line

4. Front hydraulic service couplers

6
m A - Delivery line for cylinder extension
m B - Return line

WARNING
Operating this lever activates the two front hydraulic lines and the corresponding rear lines simultaneously.

7
The tractor can be equipped with front hydraulic lines obtained by dividing the two
rear hydraulic lines n°4 controlled by the cross-gate lever.
1. YELLOW front hydraulic line (Return line)
2. RED front hydraulic line (Delivery line for cylinder extension)
3. Power outlet socket for implements
8
9

Fig. 313
10

4-55

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 55 20/09/2012 19.02.01

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12 - TOWING DEVICES
4.12.1 - Vertical loads (Agrotron M 600 -> 20001, Agrotron M 610 -> 20001)
1

The specified maximum vertical loads are calculated in accordance with the weight of the tractor when fitted with front ballast and
the tyres approved during the national homologation procedure and with the towing hitch in the lowest position and at the minimum
distance from the axis of the rear axle (minimum rear overhang). The effective permissible vertical load is to be calculated precisely
in each case, after weighing; this load must never exceed the maximum technically permissible load of the towing hitch. It is also
necessary to carefully check the load index of the tyres fitted to the tractor.
2

Maximum permissible vertical loads according to directive 2003/37/EC (40 km/h)

Table 6
TYPE MODEL DESCRIPTION APPROVAL MAXIMUM VERTICAL
LOAD (DAN)
Towing hitch HS 1500-KUD, Model I HS 1700-1KUD D (e1) 0171 700-2000
HS 1500-KUD, Model L HS 1700-3KUD D (e1) 0171 700-2000
3

HS 1400-KUD, Model B HS 1450-KUD D (e1) 0170 700-2000

HS 1600-KUD, Model A HS 1600-1KUD D (e1) 000401 700-2000
GTF30 014 -- D (e11) 2000 700-2000
GTF30 015 -- D (e11) 2053 700-2000
Towing Hitch HOOK -- D (e11) 1398 700-3000
CBM-AXLA 99034 -- D (e11) 2167 700-3000
4

CBM-AXLA 99022 -- D (e11) 2080 700-3000

Towing hitch with 80 mm HS 4800-D-C-50, Model HS 4825-SDF-KU D (e1) 0112 700-3000
diam. ball d
HS 125-KUD, Model d HS 1251-KV D (e1) 0238 700-2000
HS 4880-SDF-DR-KU -- D (e1) 000328 700-3000
GTS80 001 -- D (e11) 2098 700-3000
5

GTF30 032 -- D (e11) 2205 700-3000

Towing hitch with pin HS 4800-D-C-50, Model HS 4825-SDF D (e1) 0112 700-3000
C
HS 115-P, Model C HS 1151-KV D (e1) 0237 700-2000
GTP 003 -- D (e11) 2203 700-3000
GTF30 032 -- D (e11) 2205 700-3000
Drawbar HS 4880-SDF-L -- D (e1) 0289 700-3000
6

GTB30 008 -- D (e11) 2208 700-3000

GTB30 011 -- D (e11) 2207 700-3000
Piton Fix towing hitch HS 4880-SDF-DR-PI -- D (e1) 000327 700-3000
GTB 002 -- D (e11) 2206 700-3000
Vertical load calculated for rear tyres.
7

Table 7
TYRE TYPE VERTICAL LOAD (DAN) FRONT BALLAST (KG)
9.5R48-136 A8 700 330
230/95R48-147 A2 700 330
270/95R48-154 A2 1400 330
300/95R46-158 A2 1700 330
8

16.9R38-141 A8 1200 330

18.4R34-144 A8 1600 330
18.4R38-146 A8 2000 330 + 300
18.4R38-159 A8 2400 330 + 300
520/70R34-148 A8 2200 330 + 300
520/70R38-150 A8 2400 330 + 300
520/70R38-150 D 2400 330 + 300
9

600/65R38-153 A8 2400 330 + 300

420/85R38-144 A8 1600 330 + 300
460/85R34-147 A8 2100 330 + 300
460/85R38-149 A8 2400 330 + 300
520/75R34-150 A8 2400 330 + 300
520/75R38-151 A8 2400 330 + 300
10

4-56

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 56 20/09/2012 19.02.01

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.2 - Vertical loads (Agrotron M 620 -> 20001)
The specified maximum vertical loads are calculated in accordance with the weight of the tractor when fitted with front ballast and

1
the tyres approved during the national homologation procedure and with the towing hitch in the lowest position and at the minimum
distance from the axis of the rear axle (minimum rear overhang). The effective permissible vertical load is to be calculated precisely
in each case, after weighing; this load must never exceed the maximum technically permissible load of the towing hitch. It is also
necessary to carefully check the load index of the tyres fitted to the tractor.
Maximum permissible vertical loads according to directive 2003/37/EC (40 km/h)

2
Table 8
TYPE MODEL DESCRIPTION APPROVAL MAXIMUM VERTICAL
LOAD (DAN)
Towing hitch HS 1500-KUD, Model I HS 1700-1KUD D (e1) 0171 600-2000
HS 1500-KUD, Model L HS 1700-3KUD D (e1) 0171 600-2000
HS 1400-KUD, Model B HS 1450-KUD D (e1) 0170 600-2000

3
HS 1600-KUD, Model A HS 1600-1KUD D (e1) 000401 600-2000
GTF30 014 -- D (e11) 2000 600-2000
GTF30 015 -- D (e11) 2053 600-2000
Towing Hitch HOOK -- D (e11) 1398 600-3000
CBM-AXLA 99034 -- D (e11) 2167 600-3000
CBM-AXLA 99022 -- D (e11) 2080 600-3000
Towing hitch with 80 mm HS 4800-D-C-50, Model HS 4825-SDF-KU D (e1) 0112 600-3000

4
diam. ball d
HS 125-KUD, Model C HS 1251-KV D (e1) 0238 600-2000
HS 4880-SDF-DR-KU -- D (e1) 000328 600-3000
GTS80 001 -- D (e11) 2098 600-3000
GTF30 032 -- D (e11) 2205 600-3000
Towing hitch with pin HS 4800-D-C-50, Model HS 4825-SDF D (e1) 0112 600-3000

5
C
HS 115-P, Model C HS 1151-KV D (e1) 0237 600-2000
GTP 003 -- D (e11) 2203 600-3000
GTF30 032 -- D (e11) 2205 600-3000
Drawbar HS 4880-SDF-L -- D (e1) 0289 600-3000
GTB30 008 -- D (e11) 2208 600-3000

6
GTB30 011 -- D (e11) 2207 600-3000
Piton Fix towing hitch HS 4880-SDF-DR-PI -- D (e1) 000327 600-3000
GTB 002 -- D (e11) 2206 600-3000
Vertical load calculated for rear tyres.
Table 9

7
TYRE TYPE VERTICAL LOAD (DAN) FRONT BALLAST (KG)
230/95R-136 A8 600 330
270/95R48-154 A2 1400 330
300/95R46-158 A2 2000 330
18.4R38-146 A8 1800 330
18.4/R38-159 A8 2800 330 + 300
520/70R38-150 A8 2400 330 + 300
8

520/70R38-150 D 2800 330 + 300

600/65R38-153 A8 2800 330 + 300
20.8R38-153 A8 2800 330 + 300
580/70R38-155 A8 2800 330 + 300
580/70R38-155 D 2700 330 + 300
650/65R38-154 A8 2800 330 + 300
9

650/65R38-157 A8 2800 330 + 300

460/85R38-149 A8 2200 330 + 300
520/85R38-155 A8 2800 330 + 300
520/85R38-151 A8 2800 330 + 300
580/75R38-157 A8 2800 330 + 300
10

4-57

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 57 20/09/2012 19.02.02

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.3 - Towing devices
CAUTION
1

All the implements mounted on the tractor must be secured firmly and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions; see attachment holes diagram. Use permitted devices only.

CAUTION
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-
2

rised service centre.

CAUTION
In Italy only Cuna type towing hitches and the drawbar may be used.
3

WARNING
Never tow semi-mounted implements, trailers or agricultural machines by attaching them to the top link of the three-
point linkage. This could cause the tractor to rear up or overturn backwards.

CAUTION
4

When towing, always secure the hitch pin with a suitable lock pin with safety clip to prevent the hitch pin coming out
the hitch. The lock pin must always be secured to the hitch.

CAUTION
The maximum permissible hitch load (horizontal and vertical), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use and
5

the maximum trailed load for trailers without brakes, for trailers with mechanical brakes, for trailers with inertia braking
and with hydraulic or air brakes are indicated in the tractor registration document (only issued for the Italian market).
Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct responsibility of the user.
WARNING
The loads given in the tables below refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
6

The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - CBM
Drawbar
Table 10
7

DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE

GTB30 008 (D e11 2208) L=250 mm 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-66
L=300 mm 2600 kg
L=350 mm 2300 kg
L=400 mm 2000 kg
L=450 mm 1800 kg
8

L=500 mm 1600 kg
L=550 mm 1500 kg
L=600 mm 1350 kg
L=650 mm 1250 kg
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
9

Drawbar with Piton Fix

Table 11
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTB 002 (D e11 2206) Short position 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-73
Extended position 2300 kg
10

* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.

4-58

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 58 20/09/2012 19.02.02

 USING THE TRACTOR
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Machined drawbar

1
Table 12
DRAWBAR SUPPORT HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTB30 011 (D e11 2207) 30500 kg* - 27500 kg** 3000 kg 4-74
Table 13
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE

2
GTB30 011 (D e11 2207) L=250 mm 30500 kg* - 27500 kg** 3000 kg 4-74
L=400 mm 2000 kg
L=550 mm 1500 kg
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.

3
Towing hitches with standard long support frame and standard short support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Table 14

4
STANDARD LONG HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-67
Table 15
STANDARD SHORT HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-75

5
Table 16
TOW HITCH DESCRIPTION HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
Cuna C towing hitch - OC 0010 (DGM-GA 4699-C) 6000 kg 1500 kg 4-68
Cuna D2 towing hitch - OC 0009 (DGM-GA 4700- 14000 kg 2000 kg 4-68
D2)
Cuna D3 towing hitch - OC 0008 (DGM-GA 4701- 20000 kg 2500 kg 4-68

6
D3)
EEC manual towing hitch - GTF30 015 (D e11 2053) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-68
EEC semi-automatic towing hitch - GTF30 015 (D 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-75
e11 2053)
EEC automatic towing hitch Ø 31 mm - GTF30 014 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
(D e11 2000)

7
EEC automatic towing hitch Ø 38 mm - GTF30 014 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
(D e11 2000)
Sliding towing hitch with Piton-fix - GTP 003 (D e11 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
2203)
Sliding towing hitch with Ø 80 mm Ball - GTS80 001 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
(D e11 2098)
8

DIN automatic towing hitch Ø 38 mm - GTF30 035 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
Pick-Up Hitch
Table 17
MECHANICAL P.U.H. HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
AXLA-HITCH 99 022 (D e11 2080) 30500 kg* - 24000 kg** 3000 kg 4-76
9

Table 18
HYDRAULIC. PICK-UP HITCH HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
AXLA-HITCH 99 034 (D e11 2167) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-70
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
10

** - Load for 160 hp tractor.

4-59

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 59 20/09/2012 19.02.02

 USING THE TRACTOR
Towing hitches with support frame with Piton hitch
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
1

Table 19
TOWING FRAME WITH PITON HITCH HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-72
Table 20
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
2

GTF30 008 (D e11 2208) L=250 mm 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-66
L=300 mm 2600 kg
L=350 mm 2300 kg
L=400 mm 2000 kg
L=450 mm 1800 kg
L=500 mm 1600 kg
L=550 mm 1500 kg
3

L=600 mm 1350 kg
L=650 mm 1250 kg
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Towing hitches with support frame with Ball hitch
4

The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
Table 21
TOWING HITCH SUPPORT FRAME WITH Ø 80 MM HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
BALL HITCH
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-72
5

Table 22
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTF30 008 (D e11 2208) L=250 mm 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-66
L=300 mm 2600 kg
L=350 mm 2300 kg
6

L=400 mm 2000 kg
L=450 mm 1800 kg
L=500 mm 1600 kg
L=550 mm 1500 kg
L=600 mm 1350 kg
L=650 mm 1250 kg
7

* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.

** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - SAUERMANN
Drawbar
Table 23
8

DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE

HS 4880-SDF-L (D e1 L=250 mm 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-66
0289) L=300 mm 2600 kg
L=350 mm 2300 kg
L=400 mm 2000 kg
L=450 mm 1800 kg
9

L=500 mm 1600 kg
L=550 mm 1500 kg
L=600 mm 1350 kg
L=650 mm 1250 kg
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
10

** - Load for 160 hp tractor.

4-60

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 60 20/09/2012 19.02.02

 USING THE TRACTOR
Drawbar with Piton Fix
Table 24

1
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4880-SDF-DR-PI (D Short position 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-73
e1 000327) Extended position 2300 kg
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.

2
Drawbar with 80 mm diam. ball
Table 25
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4880-SDF-DR-KU (D Short position 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-73
e1 000328) Extended position 2300 kg

3
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Machined drawbar
Table 26
DRAWBAR SUPPORT HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE

4
HS 4880-D (D e1 0788) - 3000 kg 4-74
Table 27
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4858-D-A-V-B.02 (D L=250 mm - 3000 kg 4-74
e1 0788) L=350 mm - 2300 kg

5
L=400 mm - 2000 kg
L=500 mm - 1600 kg
L=550 mm - 1500 kg
L=650 mm - 12500 kg
Towing hitches with standard long support frame and standard short support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.

6
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Table 28
STANDARD LONG HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4850-SDF (D e1 0112) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-67

7
Table 29
STANDARD SHORT HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4850-SDF-IT (D e1 0112) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-75
Table 30
8
TOW HITCH DESCRIPTION HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
Cuna C towing hitch - HS 310 (DGM-GA 8001-C) 6000 kg 1500 kg 4-68
Cuna C towing hitch - HS 310 (DGM-GA 8014-C)
Cuna D2 towing hitch - HS 330 (DGM-GA 8002-D2) 14000 kg 2000 kg 4-68
Cuna D2 towing hitch - HS 330 (DGM-GA 8015-D2)
Cuna D3 towing hitch - HS 340 (DGM-GA 8003-D3) 20000 kg 2500 kg 4-68
Cuna D3 towing hitch - HS 340 (DGM-GA 8016-D3)
9

EEC manual towing hitch - HS 1400-KUD (D e1 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-68
0170)
EEC semi-automatic towing hitch - HS 1400-KUD 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-75
(D e1 0170)
EEC automatic towing hitch diameter 31 - HS 1500- 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
10

KUD (D e1 0171)
EEC automatic towing hitch diameter 38 - HS 1500- 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
KUD (D e1 0171)

4-61

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 61 20/09/2012 19.02.03

 USING THE TRACTOR
TOW HITCH DESCRIPTION HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
Sliding towing hitch with Piton-fix- HS 115-P (D e1 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
0237)
1

Sliding towing hitch with Ø 80 mm Ball - HS 125-K 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
(D e1 0238)
DIN automatic towing hitch Ø 38 mm - HS 1500- 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
KUD (D e1 0171)
Towing hitches with support frame with Piton hitch
2

The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
Table 31
TOWING FRAME WITH PITON HITCH HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4825-SDF (D e1 0112) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-72
Table 32
3

DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE

HS 4880-SDF-L (D e1 L=250 mm 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-66
0289) L=300 mm 2600 kg
L=350 mm 2300 kg
L=400 mm 2000 kg
L=450 mm 1800 kg
4

L=500 mm 1600 kg
L=550 mm 1500 kg
L=600 mm 1350 kg
L=650 mm 1250 kg
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
5

** - Load for 160 hp tractor.

Towing hitches with support frame with Ball hitch
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
Table 33
TOWING HITCH SUPPORT FRAME WITH Ø 80 MM HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
6

BALL HITCH
HS 4850-SDF-KU (D e1 0112) 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-72
Table 34
DRAWBAR HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4880-SDF-L (D e1 L=250 mm 30500 kg* - 29700 kg** 3000 kg 4-66
0289) L=300 mm 2600 kg
7

L=350 mm 2300 kg
L=400 mm 2000 kg
L=450 mm 1800 kg
L=500 mm 1600 kg
L=550 mm 1500 kg
L=600 mm 1350 kg
8

L=650 mm 1250 kg
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices
The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices:
9

l Towing hitch
l Towing hitch mounted on front support
l Towing hitch mounted on block
l Towing hitch for tractors with front lift and front PTO
10

4-62

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 62 20/09/2012 19.02.03

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.4 - Towing devices for 50 km/h tractors
CAUTION

1
All the implements mounted on the tractor must be secured firmly and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions; see attachment holes diagram. Use permitted devices only.

CAUTION
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-

2
rised service centre.

CAUTION
In Italy only Cuna type towing hitches and the drawbar may be used.

3
WARNING
Never tow semi-mounted implements, trailers or agricultural machines by attaching them to the top link of the three-
point linkage. This could cause the tractor to rear up or overturn backwards.

CAUTION

4
When towing, always secure the hitch pin with a suitable lock pin with safety clip to prevent the hitch pin coming out
the hitch. The lock pin must always be secured to the hitch.

CAUTION
The maximum permissible hitch load (horizontal and vertical), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use and

5
the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only issued for Italian market). Any prob-
lems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits shall be the responsibility of the user.
WARNING
The load values indicated in the tables below refer to the technical limits or the category of towing hitch.

6
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - CBM
Towing hitches with standard long support frame and standard short support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.

7
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Table 35
STANDARD LONG HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-67
Table 36
8

STANDARD SHORT HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-75
Table 37
TOW HITCH DESCRIPTION HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
EEC manual towing hitch - GTF30 015 (D e11 2053) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-68
9

EEC semi-automatic towing hitch - GTF30 015 (D 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-75
e11 2053)
EEC automatic towing hitch Ø 31 mm - GTF30 014 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
(D e11 2000)
EEC automatic towing hitch Ø 38 mm - GTF30 014 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
10

(D e11 2000)
Sliding towing hitch with Piton-Fix - GTP 003 (D e11 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
2203)

4-63

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 63 20/09/2012 19.02.06

 USING THE TRACTOR
TOW HITCH DESCRIPTION HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
Sliding towing hitch Ø 80 mm ball - GTS80 001 (D 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
e11 2098)
1

DIN automatic towing hitch Ø 38 mm - GTF30 035 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
Towing hitches with Piton hitch support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
Table 38
2

TOWING HITCH FRAME WITH PITON HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-72
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Towing hitches with ball hitch support frame
3

The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
Table 39
TOWING HITCH FRAME WITH 80MM DIAMETER HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
BALL
GTF30 032 (D e11 2205) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-72
4

* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.

** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - SAUERMANN
Towing hitches with standard long support frame and standard short support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
5

* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.

** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
Table 40
STANDARD LONG HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4850-SDF (D e1 0112) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-67
6

Table 41
STANDARD SHORT HITCH SUPPORT FRAME HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4850-SDF-IT (D e1 0112) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-75
Table 42
7

TOW HITCH DESCRIPTION HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE

EEC manual towing hitch - HS 1400-KUD (D e1 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-68
0170)
EEC semi-automatic towing hitch - HS 1400-KUD 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-75
(D e1 0170)
EEC automatic towing hitch Ø 31 mm - HS 1500- 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
8

KUD (D e1 0171)
EEC automatic towing hitch Ø 38 mm - HS 1500- 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
KUD (D e1 0171)
Sliding towing hitch with Piton-Fix - HS 115-P (D e1 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
0237)
Sliding towing hitch Ø 80 mm ball- HS 125-K (D e1 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-69
0238)
9

DIN automatic towing hitch Ø 38 mm - HS 1500- 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 2000 kg 4-69
KUD (D e1 0171)
Towing hitches with Piton hitch support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
10

Table 43
TOWING HITCH FRAME WITH PITON HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
HS 4825-SDF (D e1 0112) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-72

4-64

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 64 20/09/2012 19.02.06

 USING THE TRACTOR
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.

1
Towing hitches with ball hitch support frame
The towing hitches indicated can only be fitted with the frame shown in the table.
Table 44
TOWING HITCH FRAME WITH 80MM DIAMETER HORIZONTAL LOAD VERTICAL LOAD REFERENCE
BALL

2
HS 4850-SDF-KU (D e1 0112) 31500 kg* - 31000 kg** 3000 kg 4-72
* - Load for 130-140 hp tractor.
** - Load for 160 hp tractor.
The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices
The tractor can be equipped with the following front towing devices:

3
l Towing hitch
l Towing hitch mounted on front support
l Towing hitch mounted on block
l Front towing hitch for tractors with lift and front PTO

4.12.5 - Adjusting the height of the towing hitch

4
IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.

5
WARNING
Check that the lock pins are fully inserted in the tow hitch support frame.

The height of the towing hitch can be adjusted to facilitate attachment of the towed implement.

6
This adjustment alters the height of the hitch on the support frame. The hitch can be positioned either above or below the PTO output
shaft.
The tractor can be fitted with different types of towing hitch versions which can be operated in different ways.
Type 1 towing hitches
For all towing hitches of similar type to those indicated below, the height is adjusted by operating the lock lever in order to engage

7
the pins from the frame brackets.
After moving the hitch to the desired height, return the lock lever to its initial position.
1. Lock lever
2. Pins
8
9

Fig. 314
10

4-65

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 65 20/09/2012 19.02.08

 USING THE TRACTOR
1. Lock lever
2. Pins
1
2

Fig. 315

1. Lock lever
3

2. Pins
4

Fig. 316

Type 2 towing hitches

5

For all towing hitches of similar type to those shown, the height is adjusted by
removing the lock pins (1) and removing the pins (2).
Move the hitch to the required height and secure by re-inserting the pins and the
lock pins.
6
7

Fig. 317

4.12.6 - Drawbar
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to ride on the drawbar or on the lower links when the tractor is in motion.
8

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
9

sibility of the user.

IMPORTANT:
When using the drawbar, observe all the applicable rules in the highway code. Use only hitch pins that comply with
the applicable standards.
10

The drawbar is a swinging hitch of the type commonly used for towing agricultural implements and for trailers with more than one axle
and consequently with low vertical load.

4-66

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 66 20/09/2012 19.02.10

 USING THE TRACTOR
The drawbar is positioned in such a way as to increase the load on the rear axle and reduce slightly the load on the front axle.
In addition to having an adjustable swing angle, the drawbar can also be adjusted in length or inverted through 180° to adjust the

1
height from the ground. Using the different holes to adjust the length of the drawbar alters the distance from the PTO shaft and thus
the permissible load values.
The maximum vertical loads and towed loads are indicated in the table.
Implement hitching and unhitching
To hitch an implement to the drawbar, proceed as follows:

2
l Remove lock pin (1); 1
l Remove pin (2);
l Reverse the tractor slowly up to the implement;
l Insert pin (2);
l Insert lock pin (1).

3
2

Fig. 318

Adjusting the length of the drawbar

4
The drawbar is fixed to the tractor under the gearbox casing using the fixing holes provided.
To adjust the length of the drawbar, proceed as follows:
l Remove lock pins (1);
l Remove pin (2);

5
l Adjust the length of the drawbar (3);
l Insert pin (2);
l Insert lock pins (1);

6
Fig. 319

4.12.7 - Standard long hitch support frame

IMPORTANT:

7
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
The towing hitch support frame enables a number of different types of towing hitch
8

to be mounted on the tractor and also gives the possibility to adjust the height of
the hitch.
9

Fig. 320
10

4-67

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 67 20/09/2012 19.02.12

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.8 - Towing hitch with safety lock
IMPORTANT:
1

The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.
2

IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.

Trailer hitching and unhitching

3

Hitching
l Turn safety lock (1) upwards;
l Remove pin (2) using handle (3).
l Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters fully
into the hitch;
4

l Insert pin (2);

l Turn safety lock (1) downwards, ensuring that it is securely closed.
IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure
in reverse order.
5

Fig. 321

4.12.9 - Towing hitch with lock pin

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
6

issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.
IMPORTANT:
7

For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.

Trailer hitching and unhitching

Hitching
8

l Remove lock pin (1).

l Remove pin (2) using handle (3).
l Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters fully
into the hitch;
l Insert pin (2);
l Replace the lock pin (1), making sure it is properly closed.
9

IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure
in reverse order.
Fig. 322
10

4-68

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 68 20/09/2012 19.02.15

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.10 - Automatic towing hitch
IMPORTANT:

1
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.

2
IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.

Trailer hitching and unhitching

3
Hitching
l Raise lever (1), pushing upwards until it locks into place.
l Coupling pin (2) is raised and snap lever (3) is visible on the bottom of the
automatic towing hitch.

4
5
Fig. 323

l Move the tractor slowly backwards; the eyebolt of the drawbar must engage
fully in the automatic hitch, engaging the catch lever (3); the impact of this
action causes the immediate descent of the coupling pin (2) and automatic

6
return of the safety pin (4).
IMPORTANT:
Check that the trailer has been hitched correctly; make sure that
the release lever is in its lowered position and that the safety pin
has retracted completely.

7
IMPORTANT:
If the hitch is not perfectly closed, try moving the tractor or trailer Fig. 324

forwards and backwards to move the towing eye to the correct po-
sition so that the hitch closes properly.
8
Unhitching
IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure in reverse order.

4.12.11 - Sliding Piton-Fix or ball towing hitch

9

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
10

sibility of the user.

The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.

4-69

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 69 20/09/2012 19.02.18

 USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.
1

Trailer hitching and unhitching

Hitching
l Turn lever (1) upwards to raise the safety lock (2);
2

l Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer engages Piton Fix or
the ball (3);
l Turn lever (1) downwards to lower safety lock (2);
IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure
3

in reverse order.

Fig. 325

4.12.12 - Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch

4

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
5

The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.
IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.
6

The Pick-up Hitch is comprised of the following elements:

Towing hitch
7
8

Fig. 326

Control lever in cab

9
10

Fig. 327

4-70

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 70 20/09/2012 19.02.21

 USING THE TRACTOR
Trailer hitching and unhitching
Hitching

1
l Raise the linkage to maximum height;
l Disengage the hooks (1) using the lever in the cab;
l Lower the linkage;
l Extend slide (2) by operating the hydraulic cylinder;
l Attach the bar/hook to the trailer drawbar eye;
l Fully retract the slide;

2
l Return the linkage to the maximum lifting height to lock the swinging frame;
l Operate the lever in the cab to lock the frame with the hooks.

Fig. 328

3
Conditions for correct attachment
The Pick-up Hitch is attached correctly when:
l The two hooks (1) must be correctly attached to the pins of the swinging
frame (4);

4
l Lock pin (2) must protrude fully and seat against plate (3) during work.
WARNING
If these conditions are not adhered to, the Pick-up Hitch is NOT
attached correctly.

5
Fig. 329

Checking correct attachment

The slide is locked by means of 2 safety devices: two hooks and a lock pin in the slide to prevent its accidental extension.

6
To check that the trailer is hitched correctly, proceed as follows:
l Lower the linkage and check that the hooks (1) are effectively attached to
the frame (2);
l Try to extend the slide; if the lock pin is correctly positioned this will not be
possible.

7
WARNING
If the above conditions are not satisfied, repeat the hitching opera-
tion.

Fig. 330
8

Unhitching
IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure in reverse order.
9

Changing the hitch for a drawbar

If required, the towing hitch can be replaced with a drawbar. This operation does not require the use of any tools.
10

4-71

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 71 20/09/2012 19.02.25

 USING THE TRACTOR
To replace the hitch, proceed as follows:
l Extend slide (1) by operating the hydraulic cylinder;
1

l Withdraw the lock pin (2);

l Remove towing hitch (3);
l Insert drawbar (4);
l Replace the lock pin and retract the slide.
2

Fig. 331

4.12.13 - Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame

3

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
4

The support frame with Piton Fix or ball towing hitch is provided with a hitch (Piton
Fix or ball) fixed to the frame, and also allows the installation of other types of
adjustable height towing hitches.
5

Fig. 332
6

IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.

Trailer hitching and unhitching

7

Hitching
l Remove lock pin (1).
l Withdraw pin (2);
l Turn safety lock (3) upwards;
l Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer engages Piton Fix or
8

the ball (4);

l Turn the safety lock downwards;
l Insert pin (2);
l Replace the lock pin (1), making sure it is properly closed.
IMPORTANT:
9

To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure Fig. 333
in reverse order.
10

4-72

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 72 20/09/2012 19.02.28

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.14 - Drawbar with Piton Fix or Ball
WARNING

1
Do not allow anyone to ride on the drawbar or on the lower links when the tractor is in motion.

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for

2
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
IMPORTANT:
When using the drawbar, observe all the applicable rules in the highway code. Use only hitch pins that comply with

3
the applicable standards.

The drawbar is a swinging hitch of the type commonly used for towing agricultural implements and for trailers with more than one axle
and consequently with low vertical load.
The drawbar is positioned in such a way as to increase the load on the rear axle and reduce slightly the load on the front axle.

4
In addition to having an adjustable swing angle, the drawbar can also be adjusted in length or inverted through 180° to adjust the
height from the ground. Using the different holes to adjust the length of the drawbar alters the distance from the PTO shaft and thus
the permissible load values.
The maximum vertical loads and towed loads are indicated in the table.
Implement hitching and unhitching

5
To hitch an implement to the drawbar, proceed as follows:
l Remove lock pin (1).
l Withdraw pin (2);
l Turn safety lock (3) upwards;
l Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer engages Piton Fix or
the ball (4);

6
l Turn the safety lock downwards;
l Insert pin (2);
l Replace the lock pin (1), making sure it is properly closed.

Fig. 334

7
Adjusting the length of the drawbar
The drawbar is fixed to the tractor under the gearbox casing using the fixing holes provided.
To adjust the length of the drawbar, proceed as follows:
l Remove lock pins (1);
8
l Remove pin (2);
l Adjust the length of the drawbar (3);
l Insert pin (2);
l Insert lock pins (1);
9

Fig. 335
10

4-73

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 73 20/09/2012 19.02.29

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.15 - Machined drawbar
WARNING
1

Do not allow anyone to ride on the drawbar or on the lower links when the tractor is in motion.

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
2

trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
IMPORTANT:
When using the drawbar, observe all the applicable rules in the highway code. Use only hitch pins that comply with
3

the applicable standards.

The drawbar is a swinging hitch of the type commonly used for towing agricultural implements and for road trailers with more than
one axle and consequently with low vertical load.
The drawbar is positioned in such a way as to increase the load on the rear axle and reduce slightly the load on the front axle.
4

In addition to having an adjustable swing angle, the drawbar can also be adjusted in length or inverted through 180° to adjust the
height from the ground. Using the different holes to adjust the length of the drawbar alters the distance from the PTO shaft and thus
the permissible load values.
The maximum vertical loads and towed loads are indicated in the table.
Implement hitching and unhitching
5

To hitch an implement to the drawbar, proceed as follows:

l Remove lock pin (1);
l Remove pin (2);
l Reverse the tractor slowly up to the implement;
l Insert pin (2);
l Insert lock pin (1).
6

Fig. 336
7

Adjusting the length of the drawbar

The drawbar is fixed to the tractor under the gearbox casing using the fixing holes provided.
To adjust the length of the drawbar, proceed as follows:
l Remove lock pins (1);
8

l Remove pin (2);

l Adjust the length of the drawbar (3);
l Insert pin (2);
l Insert lock pins (1);
9

Fig. 337
10

4-74

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 74 20/09/2012 19.02.29

 USING THE TRACTOR
Machined drawbar support
The support can be used for towing agricultural implements or road trailers with one or more axles.

1
To attach an implement to the hitch proceed as follows:
l Remove lock pin (1);
l Remove pin (2);
l Reverse the tractor slowly up to the implement;
l Insert pin (2);
l Insert lock pin (1).

2
Fig. 338

3
4.12.16 - Standard short hitch support frame
IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only

4
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
The towing hitch support frame enables a number of different types of towing hitch
to be mounted on the tractor and also gives the possibility to adjust the height of
the hitch.

5
6
Fig. 339

4.12.17 - Semi-automatic towing hitch

IMPORTANT:

7
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
sibility of the user.
The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.
8

IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.
9
10

4-75

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 75 20/09/2012 19.02.30

 USING THE TRACTOR
Trailer hitching and unhitching
Hitching
1

l Turn lever (1) downwards in order to release the safety lock (2);
l Withdraw the lever with the attached pin (3);
l Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters fully
into the hitch;
l Insert the lever with the attached pin (3);
l Turn the lever upwards to fasten the safety lock (2).
2

IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure
in reverse order.
Fig. 340
3

4.12.18 - Mechanical Pick-up Hitch

IMPORTANT:
The maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the maximum permissible hitch height for road use (for
trailers with one or more axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor registration document (only
issued for Italian market). Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits are the direct respon-
4

sibility of the user.

The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements or road-going trailers with one or more axles.
IMPORTANT:
For all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and unhitching procedures are the same.
5

The Pick-up Hitch is comprised of the following elements:

Towing hitch
6
7

Fig. 341

Control lever in cab

8
9

Fig. 342
10

4-76

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 76 20/09/2012 19.02.35

 USING THE TRACTOR
Trailer hitching and unhitching
Hitching

1
l Raise the lift to maximum height;
l Disengage the hooks (1) using the lever in the cab;
l Lower the lift;
l Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar engages the
bar/hook (2);
l Return the lift to the maximum lifting height to lock the swinging frame;

2
l Operate the lever in the cab to lock the frame with the hooks.

Fig. 343

3
The slide is locked by means of 2 safety devices: two hooks and a lock pin in the slide to prevent its accidental extension.
Unhitching
IMPORTANT:
To unhitch the trailer, carry out the steps of the hitching procedure in reverse order.

4
Changing the hitch for a drawbar
If required, the towing hitch can be replaced with a drawbar. This operation does not require the use of any tools.
To replace the hitch, proceed as follows:

5
l Disengage the hooks using the lever in the cab;
l Withdraw the lock pins (2);
l Remove towing hitch (3);
l Insert drawbar (4);
l Replace the lock pins.

6
Fig. 344

4.12.19 - Front towing hitch

7
CAUTION
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-
rised service centre.
8
Use only original pins (1).
During use, always check that the safety peg (2) is securely locked into place
9

Fig. 345
10

4-77

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 77 20/09/2012 19.02.36

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.20 - Front towing hitch on front support
CAUTION
1

The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-
rised service centre.

The tractor can be equipped with a towing hitch fitted on ballast support.
Use only original pins (1).
2

During use, always check that safety pin (2) is securely locked into place.
3

Fig. 346

When the ballast weights are installed, fit also drawbar (1) with hitch (2).
4
5

Fig. 347

4.12.21 - Front towing hitch on block

6

CAUTION
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-
rised service centre.

The tractor can be equipped with a towing hitch fitted on block.

7

Use only original pins (1).

During use, always check that safety pin (2) is securely locked into place.
8

Fig. 348
9

4.12.22 - Front towing hitch for tractors with front lift and front PTO
CAUTION
The front towing hitch should be used for emergency trailer towing or for towing the tractor in the yard or in an autho-
rised service centre.
10

4-78

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 78 20/09/2012 19.02.37

 USING THE TRACTOR
DANGER
Never use the front towing hitch to raise the tractor.

1
If the tractor is equipped with a front lift and a front PTO, a special towing hitch
may be fitted.
Use only original pins (1).
During use, always check that the safety pin (2) is securely locked into place.

2
3
Fig. 349

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-79

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 79 20/09/2012 19.02.37

 USING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

4-80

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 80 20/09/2012 19.02.37

 1
2
3
4
5 - STORING THE TRACTOR

5
6
7
8
9
10

5-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.02.38

 STORING THE TRACTOR
5.1 - OPERATIONS PRIOR TO LONG TERM GARAGING
For example: at the start of winter
1

If the tractor is not to be used for a long period, we recommend that you carry out the following operations to prevent cer-
tain essential components from deteriorating during storage.
l Run the engine until warm, then stop and drain all the oil from the engine and change the filters. Fill with new oil of the speci-
fied type.
l Top up the cooling system radiator with the prescribed coolant with anti-freeze and anti-corrosion properties.
2

l Fill the fuel tank completely to prevent condensation forming inside the tank.
l Switch on the engine and check that the fuel and injection systems are functioning correctly.
l Check that the diesel fuel filters are clean.
l Loosen the fuel cap and radiator cap slightly so that the relative seals are not compressed.
l Clean the air cleaner filter element. Lubricate the combine harvester as specified in the maintenance schedule.
l Remove the battery from the combine and clean the two terminals (positive/negative).
l The battery should be charged and then stored in a cool, dry place.
3

l Cover the exhaust pipe with a plastic bag secured with adhesive tape. The combine harvester must be perfectly clean; Touch
up any chipped paintwork to prevent rust.
l Coat bare metal surfaces with grease to prevent rust from forming.
IMPORTANT:
The tractor must be stored in a suitable garage and should not be exposed to excessive dust. If the tractor has to be
4

stored outdoors, cover it with a sheet.

5
6
7
8
9
10

5-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.02.38

 STORING THE TRACTOR
5.2 - PREPARING THE TRACTOR FOR USE AFTER A LONG PERIOD OF INACTIV-
ITY

1
l Remove the tractor from the wheel stands (if used).
l Remove the cover sheet (if any).
l Remove the cover from the exhaust.
l Charge and refit the battery (follow the safety instructions given in this manual).
l Start the engine and allow it run at low rpm for a few minutes.
l Do not accelerate until you are sure the engine is running smoothly.

2
l Carry out all the operations prescribed in this manual for the start of the working season; the tractor will then be ready to be
put back into service.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.02.38

 STORING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

5-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.02.38

 1
2
3
4
6 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

5
6
7
8
9
10

6-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.02.38

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.1 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
This section of the manual deals with the lubrication and general maintenance of the tractor. If you have any doubts ��������������
concerning lu-
1

brication and maintenance, consult your dealer. Details on the frequency of maintenance operations, the quality and volume of fluids
and lubricants can be found in the “Fluids/Lubricants and fill volumes” table.
Before carrying out maintenance work of any type, observe the following safety instructions:
l Remove the key from the starter switch;
l Hang a “DO NOT START ENGINE“ warning sign from the steering wheel;
2

l If necessary, place warning signs also around the tractor.

WARNING
For all maintenance operations to be carried out at a height greater than 1500 mm use a suitable platform so that the
work can be performed in safety.
3

WARNING
Some of the illustrations in this manual show the tractor with panels or guards and panels removed for the sake of clar-
ity. Do not use the tractor unless these guards and panels are fitted correctly. If it is essential to remove these guards
or panels in order to repair the tractor, they MUST be refitted before starting the tractor.
DANGER
4

Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.

CAUTION
Always wear proper work clothes; wear earplugs and eye protection whenever necessary.
5

WARNING
Read the safety instructions provided at the start of this manual to ensure the safety of the user.
6

WARNING
In certain climatic conditions and in areas with tree cover, grass or agricultural planting, operation of an internal com-
bustion engine can constitute a fire hazard. Note that this tractor is not fitted with anti-spark devices on its exhaust
pipe.
7

CAUTION
Maintenance operations must be carried out at the prescribed intervals in order to maintain the tractor in good working
condition. Lack of routine servicing can lead to unnecessary breakdowns and can reduce the vehicle’s service life.

DANGER
Start the engine with the key only when seated in the driver’s position. Do not attempt to start the engine by shorting
8

across the starter motor terminals. The tractor may start moving if the gear lever or clutch safety circuits are bypassed.
This could cause serious injury or death of persons in the vicinity of the tractor. Make sure that the cover is always
fitted over the starter motor solenoid.
CAUTION
9

Before starting the tractor ensure that it is able to operate safely also on public highways.

DANGER
To avoid damage to your sight, do not expose your eyes in the radar emission area when the radar is in operation.
10

Carry out maintenance of the radar sensor only when the radar is switched off.

6-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.02.39

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
WARNING
Before starting the engine, make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated. DO NOT run the engine in an enclosed area.

1
Exhaust gases can cause asphyxia.

6.1.1 - Maintenance intervals

The recommended maintenance intervals apply to normal operating conditions.
If the tractor is subjected to extremely heavy-duty work or used in dusty environments, the frequency of scheduled maintenance

2
should be increased.
Thoroughly observe the recommended maintenance intervals and use exclusively recommended lubricants and fluids.
6.1.2 - Washing the tractor/attached implements
WARNING
Wait for all parts to cool down before cleaning the tractor.

3
IMPORTANT:
Do not direct the water jet from a pressure washer towards the radiator/coolers, bearings or electronic/electrical com-
ponents.

4
IMPORTANT:
Follow all the instructions in the manual for the attached implements before starting cleaning.

For general cleaning of the tractor, pressure washers may be used providing the following instructions are observed:

5
l hold the lance so the nozzle is at least 80 cm away from the tractor ;
l use a jet angle between 45° and 90°;
l maximum pressure 30 bar;
l maximum temperature 50° C.

6
7
8
9
10

6-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.02.39

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.2 - FLUIDS / LUBRICANTS AND FILL VOLUMES
CAUTION
1

Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

DANGER
The risks associated with the handling of fluids can be minimised by following the indications given in the manufac-
2

turer’s safety sheets, which can be obtained from your Same Deutz-Fahr dealer.

Using any lubricants other those recommended can result in serious damage to the tractor.
Failure to have the tractor serviced at the recommended maintenance intervals and to use the prescribed lubricants will invalidate
the manufacturer’s warranty.
3

Warnings:
l Ensure that any containers used to store lubricants are perfectly clean. Funnels and measuring cups must be covered to
prevent dust settling on them.
l Clean the areas next to the parts to be lubricated.
l Grease parts when warm so that the grease flows more easily.
l Clean all plugs and caps before refitting them.
4

l Carry out all operations in accordance with the instructions given and the applicable safety regulations.
l Carry out maintenance only with the engine switched off, the starter key removed and the parking brake applied.
l Only work with the engine running when this is specifically indicated in the instructions.
l For fuel tank capacity refer to the “Technical Data” chapter
The table shows the lubricants and fill volumes (in litres) for tractors in this range.
Table 45 - Technical data
5

AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

B0 - ENGINE
Engine oil: [1] DF Special Engine 12* 12* 12*
oil 15W-40 (ACEA E7; API CJ-4/
6

CI-4+/CI-4/CH-4/CG-4/CF-4/CF;
Deutz DQC 3-05) [2] DF Extra
Engine OIL 10W-40 (ACEA E4;
Deutz DQC 4-05)
Antifreeze liquid: DF COOLANT 18 18 18
(Concentrated)
7

D0 - TRANSMISSION
Oil for gearbox and rear axle 78 78 78
without suspension: DF UTTO (API
GL 4, JDM-20C, M1143, ZF TE-
ML03E, 05F)
8

Oil for gearbox and rear axle with 80 80 80

suspension: DF UTTO (API GL 4,
JDM-20C, M1143, ZF TE-ML03E,
05F)
M0 - FRONT PTO
Front PTO oil: DF UTTO (API GL 0.9 0.9 0.9
9

4, JDM-20C, M1143, ZF TE-

ML03E, 05F)
F0 - FRONT AXLE
Front axle oil: DF GEAR 90 LS 5.8 5.8 5.8
(API GL-5, MIL-L-2105B, ZF TE-
10

ML 05C/12C/16E)

6-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.02.39

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

Oil for final drive units: DF GEAR 0,8x2 0,8x2 0,8x2

1
90 LS (API GL-5, MIL-L-2105B, ZF
TE-ML 05C/12C/16E)
E0 - REAR AXLE
Brake fluid: SDF BRAKE OIL (MB X X X
236.6; ZF TE-ML 03D-04D-09A-

2
11A-14A-17C;)
Oil for final drive units: DF GEAR 9x2 9x2 9x2
90 LS (API GL-5, MIL-L-2105B, ZF
TE-ML 05C/12C/16E)
A0 - GREASING POINTS

3
Grease: DF GREASE EP2 X X X X
(*) With filter + 1 litre
[1] - Minimum specifications for engine oil
[2] – Recommended specifications for engine oil
For dilution percentages, characteristics, specifications and safety warnings regarding use of the antifreeze, see the instructions on

4
page:
See para. 10.2.4 - Coolant - page 10-10
CAUTION
To avoid this type of problem, do not change from mineral oil [1] to synthetic oil [2].

5
6
7
8
9
10

6-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.02.39

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.3 - SERVICE INTERVALS
The recommended servicing intervals are given below.
1

IMPORTANT
The service number corresponds to that indicated in the service and warranty booklet.

IMPORTANT
2

For the operations to be carried out, refer to the Maintenance and Inspection Schedule.

Table 46
SERVICE INTERVAL (HOURS) OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT
3

1° 50 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 hours

2° 500 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250 and 500 hours
3° 1000 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hours
4° 1500 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250 and 500 hours
5° 2000 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hours
6° 2500 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250 and 500 hours
7° 3000 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hours
4

8° 3500 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250 and 500 hours
9° 4000 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hours
10° 4500 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50, 250 and 500 hours
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.02.40

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.4 - MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Table 47

1
FRE- ITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE ACTION REFER-
QUENCY IN GREASE DRAIN CHECK CLEAN RENEW ENCE
HOURS WATER
every 10 General tractor inspection (Note 1) X 6-10
Engine oil level X 6-10
Coolant X 6-11

2
Fuel level X 6-11
Lights X 6-13
at 50 (1st Braking distance X 6-14
service) Engine drive belt/s tension X 6-14
Engine oil (Note 2) X 6-15
Engine oil filter cartridge (Note 4) X 6-16
Coolers X 6-17

3
Fuel filter X 6-18
Parking brake lever X 6-19
Screen wash system X 6-19
Cab ventilation system filters X 6-19
Oil pipes - Hydrostatic steering X 6-20
Transmission/rear axle oil filter (Note X 6-32

4
4) (Note 5)
every 50 Transmission/rear axle oil level X 6-22
Front axle X 6-22
Brake reservoir oil level X 6-23
Battery X 6-24
Front lift X 6-25
Rear 3-point linkage X 6-25

5
Wheels and tyres X 6-26
every 250 First carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours
Braking distance X 6-14
Coolers X 6-17
Rear axle final drives oil level X 6-27
Parking brake lever X 6-19

6
Front axle/final drives oil level X 6-27
Screen wash system X 6-19
Oil pipes - Hydrostatic steering X 6-20
Compressed air braking system X 6-21
Front PTO oil level X 6-28
at 500 Transmission/rear axle oil filter (Note X 6-32

7
4) (Note 5)
Transmission oil (Note 2 and Note 5) X 6-30
every 500 First carry out the operations indicated for every 50 hours and every 250 hours
Engine drive belt/s tension X 6-14
Engine oil (Note 2) (Note 6) (Note 7) X 6-15
Engine oil filter cartridge (Note 4) X 6-16
(Note 6) (Note 7)
8

Fuel pre-filter X 6-31

Fuel filter X 6-18
Load-Sensing oil filter (Note 4) (Note X 6-34
5)
Hydrostatic steering supply line oil fil- X 6-35
ter (Note 4) (Note 5)
9

Differential lock system X 6-37

Front PTO oil and oil filter cartridge X 6-37
(Note 2)
Front lift X 6-25
10

6-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.02.40

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
FRE- ITEMS REQUIRING MAINTENANCE ACTION REFER-
QUENCY IN GREASE DRAIN CHECK CLEAN RENEW ENCE
HOURS WATER
1

every 1000 First, carry out the operations indicated at intervals of 50 hours, 250 hours and 500 hours
hours or at Fuel injection pump X 6-39
least once aAir filter cartridge and safety cartridge X 6-39
year (Note 3) (Note 5)
Bleeding the fuel circuit (Note 3) X 6-42
Starter motor X 6-43
2

Transmission oil (Note 2 and Note 5) X 6-30

Rear axle final drives oil (Note 2) X 6-44
Front axle/final drives oil (Note 2) X 6-45
Cab ventilation system filters X 6-19
Transmission/rear axle oil filter (Note X 6-32
4) (Note 5)
3

every 1000 Coolant and flushing the circuit (Note X 6-48

hours or at 2)
least once
every 2
years
NOTE 1 - Check for leaks, flexible hoses in contact with other parts, loose threaded fasteners and build-up of debris.
4

Before use, rectify leaks, ensure hoses are secured and tighten loose bolts.
NOTE 2 - For the correct product type, see the table “Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes”.
NOTE 3 - When the warning light is illuminated.
NOTE 4 - Whenever the oil is changed.
5

NOTE 5 - At least once a year

NOTE 6 - Oil change intervals should be halved if the diesel fuel used contains over 0.5% sulphur.
NOTE 7 - Oil change intervals should be halved if BIODIESEL (B100) fuel is used.
IMPORTANT
The fuel filter should be changed 30-50 operating hours after switching from normal diesel to BIODIESEL.
6

l Every 1500 operating hours (this operation must only be carried out by an authorised service centre)
m Check that the exhaust gas recirculation duct is clean
m Check engine valve clearances

l Every 3000 operating hours or at least every 2 years (this operation must only be carried out by an authorised service centre)
7

m Renew the engine drive belt

m Renew the crankcase breather device

l After 3000 operating hours, check the efficiency of the drive belt tensioner (this operation must only be carried out by an au-
thorized service centre)
l Every 6000 operating hours (this operation must only be carried out by an authorised service centre)
m Check injectors
8

m Renew the drive belt tensioner

l A general overhaul of the engine must be carried out after 12000 operating hours
9
10

6-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.02.40

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.5 - ACCESSING THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.5.1 - Accessing the engine compartment

1
Raising the hood
DANGER
Beware of moving parts when opening and closing the hood and when the hood is in the raised position; shearing
hazard!

2
DANGER
Beware of hot parts when the hood is raised. Some parts of the engine may reach very high temperatures with a
consequent risk of burns.

Press the button (1) located under the front grille to release the hood catch.

3
Raise the hood, which will open to its full extent.
To close the hood, push it down until you feel the catch engage.

4
Fig. 350

5
6
7
8
9
10

6-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.02.41

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.6 - DAILY INTERVENTION
6.6.1 - General inspection of the tractor
1

WARNING
Wait for the engine to cool down before touching it. During maintenance operations, apply the parking brake and
chock the wheels. On completion of the work, replace the side panels, the hood and any safety guards or covers that
were removed.
2

Before starting work, inspect the tractor exterior for signs of oil leaks or other faults.
Clean all mud, straw, leaves, etc.. from the tractor.
If necessary, contact your dealer to repair any faults once you have located the source of the problem.
6.6.2 - Checking the engine oil level
WARNING
3

Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.
4

DANGER
Risk of burns when the engine is hot; wait for the engine to cool down before carrying out maintenance, inspections
or adjustments.
5

Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.

Before checking the engine oil level, run the engine for a few minutes, switch off the engine and after approximately a minute check
6

the oil level.

To check the oil level, take off the oil filler cap equipped with dipstick (1), clean the
dipstick with a lint-free rag, put it back in and take it out again to check the oil level.
If the level is between the MAX (2) and MIN (3) notches on the dipstick, it is cor-
rect.
7
8

Fig. 351

When necessary, top up to the top notch on the dipstick by pouring oil of the speci-
fied type through filler (1).
9
10

Fig. 352

6-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.02.41

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.6.3 - Checking the coolant level
CAUTION

1
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Open the hood.

Check the level of coolant in the expansion tank. The level should be between the minimum and maximum marks.

2
If the coolant level is low:
1. Wait until the engine is cold.
2. Top up the level with liquid by pouring it in through the specific hole after removing the cap.
For 130 hp, 140 hp and 160 hp tractors
1. Expansion tank

3
2. Cap
3. Minimum level
4. Maximum level

4
Fig. 353

For 175 hp tractors

5
1. Expansion tank
2. Cap
3. Minimum level
4. Maximum level

6
Fig. 354

6.6.4 - Checking the fuel level

7
Always check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank, which should never be allowed to run dry.
Use exclusively diesel fuel of a recognised make with sulphur content of less than 0.5%.
If this value is exceeded, the time intervals for oil changes, indicated in the maintenance tables, must be halved.
CAUTION
8

Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.

DANGER
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.
9
10

6-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.02.44

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Filling up with fuel at the end of the day’s work
CAUTION
1

When refuelling, switch off the engine and always clean up any diesel spilled on the tractor.

CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
2

of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

WARNING
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.
3

The fuel tank should always be filled at the end of the working day to prevent con-
densation forming during the night.
4
5

Fig. 355

Drain plug
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
6

The fuel tank is fitted with a drain plug (1) located at the front.
IMPORTANT
The fuel will drain more quickly if the filler cap is opened.
7
8

Fig. 356
9
10

6-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.02.47

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Draining water from the fuel filter
The filter is located alongside the fuel tank.

1
The filter must be drained when signalled by Infocenter or before returning the
tractor to service after the winter season.

Drain water from the fuel filter as shown below:

l Place a recipient under filter (1);
1
l Remove the sensor;

2
l Loosen drain screw (2) under the filter to drain off the liquid (fuel and water);
l As soon as clean fuel appears, retighten the drain screw and refit the sen-
2
sor.

Fig. 357

3
6.6.5 - Check the electrical system
Check that the headlights, direction indicators, sidelights, etc., all function correctly.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.02.47

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.7 - MAINTENANCE AT 50 HOURS (1ST SERVICE)
6.7.1 - Checking the braking distance
1

CAUTION
Periodically the brake fluid level.

The user should operate the brakes to test the braking action.
2

If the brakes work badly, call a service centre.

6.7.2 - Checking engine belt tension
To adjust belt tension, proceed as follows:
WARNING
3

Before doing any maintenance or repair work, stop the engine and take out the ignition key.

CAUTION
Inspect the belts over their entire length. If damaged, they must be renewed immediately.
4

CAUTION
If the fan belt (or belts) is (are) broken, do not start the engine for any reason whatsoever as the engine cooling system
will be disabled.
5

Engine belt
Front view of engine
1. Crankshaft pulley
2. Camshaft pulley
3. Fuel lift pump pulley
4. Alternator pulley
6

5. Water pump pulley

6. Belt tensioner
7

Fig. 358

The operator need not adjust belt tension since spring tensioner (6) keeps the belt at the correct tension.
Air conditioning compressor belt
Front view of engine
8

1. Crankshaft pulley
2. Cab air conditioning compressor pulley

2
9

Fig. 359
10

6-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.02.48

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
To tighten the air conditioning compressor belt (1)
l Loosen screws (2) and (3).

1
l To tighten the belt, turn tensioning screw (4).
l The tension is correct when, pressing the belt in the middle with your thumb,
the belt deflects by 15 mm.
l After adjusting the tension, re-tighten the screws.

2
Fig. 360

6.7.3 - Changing the engine oil

3
WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING

4
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

Procedure for changing the engine oil

1. Park the tractor on level ground and wait for the engine to cool down.
2. Place a suitable container under the drain plug on the right-hand side of the oil sump.

5
3. Unscrew drain plug (1) located on the right-hand side of the tractor and
the drain plug (2) located under the oil sump, also on the right-hand side
of the tractor.
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause se-

6
vere burns.

7
Fig. 361
4. When all the oil has drained from the sump, inspect the drain plug seals
and, if necessary, renew them before screwing the drain plugs back in.
8
9

Fig. 362
10

6-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.02.48

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
5. Pour oil of the prescribed quality into the sump through the oil filler (1) until
the level is between the MAX (2) and MIN (3) notches on the dipstick.
1

Restart the engine and let it idle for a few minutes, checking the seal of the
drain plug.
Switch off the engine, wait for it to cool down, check the oil level again and,
if necessary, top up through the filler.
WARNING
2

Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to

that already present.

Fig. 363

6.7.4 - Changing the engine oil filter cartridge

3

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

WARNING
4

Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.
5

Procedure for changing the engine oil filter cartridge

1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Place a suitable container under the filter on the right-hand side of the tractor.
3. Unscrew cover (1).
6

CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any
fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be dis-
posed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
7

Fig. 364
8

4. Remove the old filter cartridge and replace it with a new one.
5. Screw on the cover.
6. Restart the engine and let it idle for a few minutes, checking the seals for
leaks.
Switch off the engine, wait for it to cool down, check the oil level again and,
if necessary, top up through the filler (1).
9

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to
that already present.
10

Fig. 364

6-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.02.49

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.7.5 - Checking that the radiator/coolers are clean
WARNING

1
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

Radiator and coolers located at the front of the tractor

1. Air conditioning condenser

2
2. Intercooler
3. Transmission oil cooler
4. Fuel cooler
5. Engine cooling system radiator

3
Fig. 365

Coolers located on right-hand side of the tractor

4
1. Hydraulic oil cooler

5
Fig. 366

Opening the radiator/coolers pack

6
To open the radiator/coolers pack, proceed as follows:
l Push release lever (1) to the left.
l Pull handle (2).

7
8
Fig. 367

When the pack is open, the radiator/coolers are held in place by two stays (3)
located at the side of the pack.
To close the pack, push handle (2) until you feel the catch engage.
9
10

Fig. 368

6-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.02.52

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Engine cooling system radiator
Clean with a compressed air jet, or, if necessary, a steam jet (max. pressure 6 bar) or a water jet.
1

If you intend to clean the engine at the same time, protect the air cleaner, alternator and starter motor. Once all the removed ������
compo-
nents have been refitted, run the engine for a few minutes so that it heats up and dries any parts that are still wet.
Cleaning with detergents
When cleaning with detergents, choose commercial products that dissolve oil.
The detergent/water solution can be applied by spray gun or brush.
2

After applying the solution, wait after few minutes, then rinse off with clean water.
Cleaning with compressed air
This cleaning method is only suitable for removing dust. Always clean the grilles in the engine compartment and grilles over the cab
filters by directing the air jet in the opposite direction to the normal air flow.
Cleaning the transmission oil cooler and intercooler
3

The transmission oil cooler and the intercooler are located forward of the engine cooling radiator.
Clean with a compressed air jet, or, if necessary, a steam jet (max. pressure 6 bar) or a water jet.
Cleaning the air conditioning condenser and fuel cooler
The air conditioning condenser and the fuel cooler are located in front of the transmission oil cooler and the intercooler.
Clean with a compressed air jet, or, if necessary, a steam jet (max. pressure 6 bar) or a water jet.
4

6.7.6 - Changing the fuel filter

CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
5

WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
6

WARNING
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.

DANGER
7

Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.

CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
8

of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

CAUTION
Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.
9

CAUTION
When refuelling, switch off the engine and always clean up any diesel spilled on the tractor.
10

6-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.02.53

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
IMPORTANT:
Before refitting the fuel filter make sure it is filled with fuel

1
The fuel filter is located on the RH side of the tractor.
To change the fuel filter proceed as shown below:
l Park the tractor on level ground.

2
l Place a recipient under the filter.
l Remove cartridge (1) by unscrewing it and replace it with a genuine new
cartridge of the same type.
l Check that the seal between the new cartridge and the cover is perfect.

3
Fig. 369

6.7.7 - Checking the parking brake lever

4
CAUTION
When applying the parking brake, the lever must always be pulled up all the way

The parking brake adjustment must be checked by a specialised service centre.

IMPORTANT

5
If it is necessary to park on a steep gradient - more than 15° (33% gradient) - put chocks under the rear wheels to
immobilise the tractor. It is anyhow recommended not to park the tractor on a steep gradient.

6.7.8 - Checking the window washer system

Check the level of screen wash liquid in the plastic reservoir (1) located on the

6
rear of the tractor.
To top up the level, remove the cap (2).

7
Fig. 370
8

Clean blocked screen washer jets using a pin. If necessary , adjust the direction of the jets so that the spray hits the screen at the top
of the arc described by the wiper blade.
During winter, it is advisable to add a suitable antifreeze or methyl alcohol to the screenwash fluid.
6.7.9 - Cleaning the cab ventilation system filters
WARNING
9

The filter of cab ventilation system must be of the “paper” type; replace it with the “Activated carbon” filter only for
pesticide spraying.

DANGER
10

Change the active carbon filter after 200 hours of use or after 36 months. If the odours of any toxic substances used
become noticeable inside the cab, immediately change the filter and check the seal.

6-19

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 19 20/09/2012 19.02.53

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
1

disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

The ventilation system filters are located in the cab pillars.

To remove the filters proceed as follows:
l loosen knob (1);
2

l remove fixing frame (2) to access the filter.

3

Fig. 371

Clean the filters as follows:

Blow compressed air (max 3 bar) through the filter in the opposite direction to the normal air flow in order to completely remove
4

all dust.
l When refitting the filter ensure that it reaches the upper and lower edges of the filter housing.
IMPORTANT:
The filter must be renewed if damaged and, in any case, after 6 cleaning cycles.
5

Cleaning the “active carbon” air filter”

For removal and refitting operations proceed as for normal filters.
Note that these filters can never offer total protection against toxic substances.
After every use these filters should always be removed and replaced with the regular filters.
6

Use protective gloves when changing the activated carbon filters.

Spent filters must be taken to specialised waste disposal centres.
In any case, observe the manufacturer’s instructions regarding the handling and disposal of spent filters.
6.7.10 - Checking the oil pipelines
7

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
8

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

WARNING
9

Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

Inspect the pipes for cracks or breaks and check for leaks from the pipe fittings or from the control valve.
10

6-20

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 20 20/09/2012 19.02.54

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.7.11 - Maintenance of the compressed air braking system
Draining water from the air reservoir

1
The compressed air reservoir is mounted on the left-hand side of the tractor, between the gearbox and the cab.
WARNING
Before carrying out maintenance operations, discharge the compressed air from the tank.

2
The automatic drain valve (1) is located on the underside of the reservoir.
The automatic drain valve does not require any maintenance although it must be
checked, especially in the presence of freezing temperatures.

3
Fig. 372

4
To discharge the compressed air from the reservoir proceed as follows:
l turn the starter key one position to power up the electrical system, with the engine switched off;
l repeatedly depress the brake pedal until the pressure falls below 2 bar, check the pressure value on the pressure gauge.
Checking the compressed air couplers

5
The compressed air couplers must be perfectly clean. Always replace the protec-
tion cap after use.
In case of poor sealing, renew the seals or the couplers.
The contact surfaces of the couplers connecting the hoses between the tractor
and trailer must be perfectly clean before use. If the seal at a coupler is faulty,
replace the seals or the coupler itself.

6
7
Fig. 373

8
9
10

6-21

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 21 20/09/2012 19.02.54

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.8 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 50 HOURS
6.8.1 - Checking the transmission oil level
1

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

To check the oil level correctly, put the tractor into the following condition:
2

l the tractor must be parked on level ground;

l the engine must be switched off at least 5 minutes beforehand and the parking brake must be applied;
l the 3-point linkage must be lowered;
l all hydraulic cylinders must be retracted.
The oil level can be checked through the sight glass (1) located to the right of the
3

rear PTO output shaft.

The oil level is normal when it is visible below the lower mark (2).
Top up to upper notch (3) if the maximum oil level is needed for specific require-
ments.
4

Fig. 374
5

If it is necessary to top up the oil level, proceed as follows:

l Remove the plug (1) and pour oil through the hole (2).
l Top up as necessary with the oil indicated in the Lubricants table in the
prescribed quantities until then oil reaches the required level.
l Refit the filler plug.
l Restart the engine and leave it idling for a few minutes, then switch off the
6

engine and check the oil level again.

Fig. 375
7

6.8.2 - Greasing the front axle

Greasing the steering joint bearings
Inject grease through upper grease nipples (1) using a grease gun.
8
9

Fig. 376
10

6-22

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 22 20/09/2012 19.02.55

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Inject grease through lower grease nipples (2) using a grease gun.

1
2
Fig. 377

Greasing the front axle support

3
Inject grease into the support through the grease nipple (1).

4
Fig. 378

5
6.8.3 - Checking the brake reservoir oil level
Checking the brake reservoir oil level
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-

6
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.

WARNING 7
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.
8

The hydrostatic control system obviates need to adjust the positions of the brake pedals.
To check the level:
l Park the tractor on level ground.
l Check that the oil level reaches the MAX mark.
l If oil is needed, unscrew the filler plug and top up with the oil indicated in the Fluids and Lubricants table.
9
10

6-23

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 23 20/09/2012 19.03.01

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
For 130 hp, 140 hp and 160 hp tractors
1. Reservoir
1

2. Cap
2

Fig. 379

For 175 hp tractors

3

1. Reservoir
2. Cap
4

Fig. 380

The level of oil in the reservoir is monitored by a warning light on the instrument panel.
5

If the warning light illuminates, add oil to bring the level up to the MAX notch.
6

In the case of poor braking action, contact an authorized service centre .

6.8.4 - Check the battery
WARNING
The terminals and some components of the battery contain lead or lead compounds. In some countries the legislation
considers these substances as a cause of cancer, birth defects and damage to the reproductive system. Wash your
7

hands after handling the battery.

WARNING
Wear safety goggles when charging or topping up the battery.
8

WARNING
Only use 12 volt chargers to charge the battery.

DANGER
9

The gases given off by the battery are highly explosive. Never cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery.
Batteries must be stored and charged in a well-ventilated environment. Take care that the acid electrolyte does not
come into contact with your skin or clothes.
CAUTION
10

Always disconnect the battery before carrying out any work on the electrical system. Always disconnect the battery
and all the electronic control units before carrying out any welding on the tractor or any of the equipment connected
to the tractor.

6-24

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 24 20/09/2012 19.03.02

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The battery does not require special maintenance.
Check that the battery acid level is between the MIN and MAX marks.

1
At the start of the winter season, check the battery charge level. Re-charge if
necessary.

2
Fig. 381

6.8.5 - Front lift maintenance

3
There are five grease nipples on each side of the lift.
IMPORTANT
Clean the front power lift before greasing.

4
Lubricate all grease nipples regularly, stop pumping as soon as excess grease seeps out.
The grease nipples are located as follows:
1. Lifting cylinder upper mounting
2. Lift cylinder
3. Lifting arm bolts
4. Swinging arm support

5
6
Fig. 382

After greasing the lift:

l Check the tightness of hydraulic fittings (during this operation the hydraulic system must not be pressurised);
l Check that the pipes and hoses are in perfect condition.

6.8.6 - Greasing the rear 3-point linkage

7
There are five grease nipples on each side of the lift.
IMPORTANT
Clean the 3-point linkage before greasing.
8

IMPORTANT
After cleaning the tractor using a high-pressure water jet, all open lubrication points should be lubricated to remove
any moisture that may have penetrated them.

Lubricate all grease nipples regularly, stop pumping as soon as excess grease seeps out.
9
10

6-25

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 25 20/09/2012 19.03.03

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The grease nipples are located as follows:
1. Upper lifting cylinder
1

2. Lower lifting cylinder

3. Lift arm
4. Lifting rod
5. Side stabiliser
2

Fig. 383

6.8.7 - Checking wheels and tyres

3

WARNING
For wheel changing operations and certain maintenance and repair work, the tractor must be raised from the ground
on specific safety stands.

Periodically check the condition of the tyres. Change them if necessary. The tyres should be inflated to the pressure specified by the
manufacturer in accordance with the conditions of use.
4

When fixing the wheels, observe the recommended tightening torques.

5
6
7
8
9
10

6-26

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 26 20/09/2012 19.03.04

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.9 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 250 HOURS
6.9.1 - Checking the oil level of the rear axle final drives

1
WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

WARNING

2
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-

3
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.

4
The oil level check is performed through the hole after removing the relative plug
(1).
The level is correct when the oil reaches the lower rim of the filler hole.

5
IMPORTANT:
Renew the oil seal each time the plug is removed.

6
Fig. 384

6.9.2 - Front axle oil level check

Differential oil level check

7
WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

WARNING
8

Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-
9

pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.
10

6-27

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 27 20/09/2012 19.03.04

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The oil level check is performed through the hole after removing the relative plug
(1).
1

The level is correct when the oil reaches the lower rim of the filler hole.
IMPORTANT:
Renew the oil seal each time the plug is removed.
2

Fig. 385

Checking the oil level of the final drives and planetary reduction unit
3

Rotate the hub so that filler/level plug is aligned horizontally with the centre of the
hub.
The level is correct when the oil reaches the lower rim of the filler hole.
IMPORTANT:
Renew the oil seal each time the plug is removed.
4

Fig. 386
5

Checking the breather valve

Clean breather valve (1) regularly.
6
7

Fig. 387

6.9.3 - Check front PTO oil level

DANGER
8

Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.
9

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.
10

6-28

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 28 20/09/2012 19.03.10

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-

1
turer’s manual.

Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.

2
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.

3
Check the oil level through hole (1) on the LH front side of the PTO housing. Top
up, if necessary, through the same hole.
The level is correct when the oil reaches the lower rim of the filler hole.

4
5
Fig. 388

6
7
8
9
10

6-29

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 29 20/09/2012 19.03.10

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.10 - MAINTENANCE AT 500 HOURS
6.10.1 - Changing the transmission oil
1

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

IMPORTANT:
2

Dispose of used oil and filters in compliance with applicable regulations. DO NOT dump oil on the ground, in sewers
or containers that are not sealed. Respect the environment.

IMPORTANT:
Change the filters at the same time as the oil.
3

Procedure for changing the transmission oil

1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Remove the oil filler cap (see “Checking the transmission oil level”).
4

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death.
High-pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER
use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate
attention from medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
3. Place a suitable receptacle under the gearbox and remove plugs (1).
5

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause se-
vere burns.
6

Fig. 389
7

4. Renew the oil filter positioned on the RH side of the gearbox.

See para. 6.11.2 - Changing the gearbox a... - page 6-32
5. Screw in the drain plugs (1) and pour oil into the gearbox through hole (2)
until the level reaches the mark on sight glass (3) located at the rear of the
tractor.
WARNING
8

Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to

that already present.
9

Fig. 390
6. After filling, screw in the oil filler plug and run the engine for a few minutes.
7. Check the oil level through sight glass (3) and top up if necessary.
The tractor is equipped with an oil cooler for the oil used by the gearbox. Clean the cooler.
See para. 6.7.5 - Checking that the radi... - page 6-17
10

6-30

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 30 20/09/2012 19.03.11

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.11 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 500 HOURS
6.11.1 - Changing the fuel prefilter

1
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING

2
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
WARNING

3
Never fill the diesel tank when there are naked flames or in closed premises. Do not smoke while refuelling and always
switch off the engine beforehand.

DANGER
Take care not to cause dangerous sparks when working nearby stores of diesel or flammable materials.

4
CAUTION
Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

5
CAUTION
Observe safety regulations when storing fuel in tanks.

CAUTION

6
When refuelling, switch off the engine and always clean up any diesel spilled on the tractor.

IMPORTANT:
Before fitting the fuel prefilter, make sure that it is full of diesel fuel

The fuel prefilter is located on the right-hand side of the tractor. 7

To change the fuel prefilter, proceed as follows:
l Park the tractor on level ground;
8
l Place a recipient under the filter;
l Loosen locking ring (1) by turning it to the left (open padlock symbol) until
the filter cartridge can be removed;
l Remove filter (2);
9

Fig. 391
10

6-31

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 31 20/09/2012 19.03.12

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
l Loosen drain screw (3) and screw it into the new filter;
l Clean seal surface (4) and fill the new filter with clean fuel;
1
2

Fig. 392

l Position the new filter and tighten the locking ring by turning it to the right (closed padlock symbol);
Bleed the air from the filter.
3

6.11.2 - Changing the gearbox and rear axle oil filter

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.
4

WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.
5

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-
6

pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
The tractor is equipped with an interchangeable cartridge filter (1) located on the
right-hand side.
7
8

Fig. 393

Changing the transmission oil filter

9

1. Park the tractor on level ground.

10

6-32

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 32 20/09/2012 19.03.12

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the filter.
Unscrew the cartridge.

1
2
Fig. 394
3. Remove cartridge cover (1).
Change the filter element (2).

3
Replace the cover.

4
Fig. 395
4. Screw the cartridge on by hand.

5
6
Fig. 396
5. On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seals.

7
6. Check the transmission oil level.
See para. 6.8.1 - Checking the transmiss... - page 6-22
8
9
10

6-33

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 33 20/09/2012 19.03.12

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.11.3 - Changing the Load Sensing oil filter
DANGER
1

Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.
2

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.
3

WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
4

The tractor is equipped with an interchangeable cartridge filter (1) located on the
right-hand side.
5
6

Fig. 397

Changing the oil filter

1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the filter.
3. Unscrew the cartridge.
7
8

Fig. 398
9
10

6-34

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 34 20/09/2012 19.03.13

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
4. Apply oil of the same type as that used for the gearbox to the new filter
cartridge seal as shown in figure.

1
2
Fig. 399
5. Screw the new cartridge on by hand.

3
4
Fig. 400
6. On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seal.

5
7. Check the transmission oil level.
See para. 6.8.1 - Checking the transmiss... - page 6-22

6.11.4 - Changing the hydrostatic steering supply line filter

DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause severe burns.

6
WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

7
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

WARNING
8

Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
9
10

6-35

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 35 20/09/2012 19.03.13

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The tractor is equipped with an interchangeable cartridge filter (1) located on the
right-hand side.
1
2

Fig. 401

Changing the oil filter

3

1. Park the tractor on level ground.

2. Place a suitable receptacle under the filter.
3. Unscrew the cartridge.
4
5

Fig. 402
4. Apply oil of the same type as that used for the gearbox to the new filter
cartridge seal as shown in figure.
6
7

Fig. 402
5. Screw the new cartridge on by hand.
8
9

Fig. 403
6. On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seal.
7. Check the transmission oil level.
10

See para. 6.8.1 - Checking the transmiss... - page 6-22

6-36

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 36 20/09/2012 19.03.13

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.11.5 - Checking the differential lock system
The operator performs this check. Test the controls and check that the differential lock is engaged and disengaged correctly.

1
6.11.6 - Changing front PTO oil and oil filter cartridge
1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Unscrew the cover and clean the final drive unit.
3. Position a suitable receptacle under the drain hole.
WARNING

2
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

4. Unscrew plug (1) to drain the oil.

3
4
Fig. 404
5. Remove fixing screw (2) and cover plate (3).
Remove nut (4), magnet coil (5), solenoid valve (6) and screw (7).

5
6
Fig. 405
6. Extract oil filter (8).

7
8

Fig. 406
7. Fit the new filter and all the parts removed, working in reverse with respect to the removal sequence.
9

IMPORTANT:
Tighten the solenoid valve to a torque of 20 Nm
10

6-37

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 37 20/09/2012 19.03.14

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8. Refit the drain plug and fill the PTO housing with oil.
WARNING
1

Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

Cleaning the breather

Churning of the oil causes pressure to build inside the PTO housing. It is therefore
2

important to clean breather (1) regularly.

3

Fig. 407
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-38

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 38 20/09/2012 19.03.15

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.12 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 1000 HOURS OR AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR
6.12.1 - Fuel injection pump maintenance

1
WARNING
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity when refuelling or servicing the fuel injection system.

WARNING

2
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death. High-
pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER use your
hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from
medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.

3
6.12.2 - Cleaning engine air filter - Changing air filter cartridge and internal safety car-
tridge
The air is filtered by two pleated paper filters protected by a case and housed in a plastic cylinder behind the radiators.
CAUTION

4
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

IMPORTANT:
The inner element is designed to prevent solid particles from entering the inlet manifold and must never be cleaned.
It must, however, be renewed after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.

5
IMPORTANT:
Periodically check the efficiency of the air filter dust ejector valve.

6
IMPORTANT:
Check regularly that the engine air cleaner housing and element are not damaged. Do not wash or brush the element.

IMPORTANT:

7
Periodically inspect the condition of the air cleaner casing and filter element.

IMPORTANT:
Do not use the tractor without the main air cleaner element fitted.
8

IMPORTANT:
Never use petrol, oil, kerosene or solvents to clean the element. Never attempt to blow the element clean using ex-
haust gas. Never add oil to the dry filter. Never use an element that shows signs of damage.
9
10

6-39

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 39 20/09/2012 19.03.15

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Procedure for disassembling the air cleaner
1. Release the three retaining clips (1) to remove cover (2) from the air clean-
1

er housing.
2

Fig. 408
2.
3

Extract the main filter element (3).

4

Fig. 409
5

3. If necessary (after the main filter has been cleaned 3 times) remove the
safety element (4) and renew it.
The safety element must never be cleaned, only renewed.
6
7

Fig. 410
4. Refit the filter elements in the housing by carrying out the above operations in reverse order.
Replace the air cleaner cover and secure with the clips.
8
9
10

6-40

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 40 20/09/2012 19.03.16

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Cleaning the dry air filter
When the clogged air filter warning light comes on, clean the filtering element to prevent the engine losing power or, worse, the engine

1
getting damaged.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the warning light is always working correctly. To check its operation, start the engine and temporarily
obstruct the air filter intake tube (do not use your hands). The filter element must always be in perfect working order;
if it is not, clean or wash it.

2
Cleaning the engine air filter using compressed air
Use this cleaning method when the filter is clogged with dust. Direct a jet of compressed air (max. pressure 6.8 bar) from the inside
to the outside of the element, moving the jet along the pleats in the paper until all the dust is removed.
Washing the engine air filter in water
This cleaning method is particularly recommended when the filter element is clogged with oily substances. It consists of washing the

3
element with clean water. Wash the element using a jet of clean water (max. pressure 2.9 bar) directed from the inside to the outside
of the element. Leave the element to dry in a dust free environment for 24 hours.
Procedure for washing the filter
1. Washing the filter element

4
5
Fig. 411
2. Cleaning the filter element using compressed air

6
7
Fig. 412
3. Eliminating residues remaining on the filter element by means of a water jet
8
9

Fig. 413
10

6-41

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 41 20/09/2012 19.03.16

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
4. Inspecting the paper element for holes or tears using a light.
1
2

Fig. 414

Refitting the element

3

Wipe the air filter casing with a dry rag, and check that the element is not deformed. Hold a light inside the paper element to check
for tears or holes in the paper fabric. If no suitable light source is available simply check the filter element by observing the outer
surface of the pleated paper.
The filter element must be replaced after being cleaned 6 times, unless any small holes or tears are detected sooner, in which case
it must be renewed immediately.
4

The inner safety element must never be cleaned. It must, however, be replaced after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.
Cleaning the intake system of the engine air cleaner
Make sure that air intake grilles (1) and (2), are always unobstructed so that the
engine’s supply of combustion air is unrestricted.
5
6

Fig. 415

6.12.3 - Bleeding the fuel circuit

This operation must be carried out when air has entered the fuel circuits (before the injection pumps).
7

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

WARNING
8

If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
CAUTION
9

Never continue to run the engine until the fuel tank is completely empty. If the engine stops because the tractor runs
of fuel, it will then be necessary to bleed the air from the fuel injection system.

WARNING
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity when refuelling or servicing the fuel injection system.
10

6-42

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 42 20/09/2012 19.03.17

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
The causes may be:
l disassembly of components

1
l fuel tank completely drained
l poor sealing of pipes and fittings.
Under these conditions, the engine either fails to start completely or stops once it has started.
IMPORTANT
Never loosen the unions of the fuel lines connecting the pumps and the injectors, as these need to be retightened to

2
a specific torque setting against the special copper seals, which must be renewed whenever the fittings are discon-
nected.
To bleed the air from the fuel filter proceed as shown below:
l Place a recipient under the filter;
l Unscrew bleed screw (1);

3
l Activate the manual fuel pump until exclusively fuel without air bubbles
comes out of the bleed outlet;
l Tighten the bleed screw and start the engine.

4
Fig. 416

IMPORTANT
The fuel pump lever should offer some resistance when operated by hand. If not, turn over the starter motor in order

5
to determine the pump priming position (cam lobes on camshaft at top dead centre).

Fuel lift pump

WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure

6
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
The fuel lift pump is installed on the delivery line upstream from the fuel prefilter
and is located alongside the fuel tank.

7
The pump can be operated manually by pressing forcefully as shown by the arrow.

Fig. 417

6.12.4 - Starter motor maintenance

9

This maintenance operation must be carried out by an authorised service centre.

DANGER
Never start the engine by shorting across the terminals of the starter motor as the tractor could suddenly move off, with
a consequent risk of injury to the operator.
10

6-43

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 43 20/09/2012 19.03.17

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.12.5 - Changing the rear axle final drives oil
CAUTION
1

Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.
2

WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.
3

WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
4

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to that already present.

Procedure for changing the rear final drives oil

5

1. Park the tractor on level ground.

2. Remove plugs (1) to drain off the oil rapidly from the final drives.
6
7

Fig. 418
3. Remove plugs (2) at the bottom of the final drive to drain off the oil, after
placing a container under the final drive to collect the oil.
DANGER
8

Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause se-
vere burns.
9

Fig. 419
10

6-44

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 44 20/09/2012 19.03.18

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
4. Refit plugs (2) and refill the final drives with oil.
See para. 6.9.1 - Checking the oil level... - page 6-27

1
IMPORTANT
Renew the oil seals each time the plugs are removed.

6.12.6 - Changing the differential oil and final drives oil (4WD)

2
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING

3
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.

WARNING
If fuel or oil under pressure hits the skin or eyes, it can cause serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure
fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks; never use your hands. Wear

4
safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate attention from medical personnel
with experience of this particular problem.
Changing the differential oil (4WD)
1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Position a suitable receptacle under the drain hole.

5
WARNING
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an authorised disposal centre.

3. Remove plug (1) on the left-hand side of the axle to drain off the oil.

6
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause se-
vere burns.

7
Fig. 420
4. After draining all the oil, refit plug (1).
8

IMPORTANT:
Renew the oil seal each time the plug is removed.
9
10

6-45

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 45 20/09/2012 19.03.19

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
5. Remove plug (2) and pour in oil until reaching the lower rim of the hole.
Refit the filler plug.
1

IMPORTANT:
Renew the oil seal each time the plug is removed.

WARNING
2

Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to

that already present.

Fig. 421

Changing the final drives oil (4WD)

3

1. Park the tractor on level ground.

2. Position a suitable receptacle under the drain hole.
3. Rotate the hub so that plug (1) is at the bottom.
Remove the plug to drain off the oil.
4
5

Fig. 422
4. Once all the oil has drained off, rotate the hub so that plug (1) is aligned
horizontally with the centre of the hub.
6
7

Fig. 423
5. Pour in oil until reaching the lower rim of the hole.
Refit the filler plug. (1)
IMPORTANT:
8

Renew the oil seal each time the plug is removed.

6.12.7 - Cab air conditioning system maintenance

WARNING
9

The refrigerant in the air conditioning system can cause severe lesions.

DANGER
10

Should the air-conditioning system piping develop a visible leak, do not approach with a naked flame, refrigerant gas
is inflammable and on combustion produces highly toxic substances.

6-46

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 46 20/09/2012 19.03.23

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
CAUTION
All repairs to the air conditioning system must be referred to an authorised service centre.

1
The air conditioning system consists of a compressor driven by the engine and a condenser equipped with an electric cooling fan
located in the front compartment under the engine hood.
When performing the maintenance tasks, remember to carry out also the following operations:

2
l Cleaning the radiator
See para. 6.7.5 - Checking that the radi... - page 6-17
l Cleaning the cab air filter
See para. 6.7.9 - Cleaning the cab venti... - page 6-19
Air conditioning compressor
The compressor (1) must be securely fixed to the tractor. The refrigerant circuit is

3
pressurised and must therefore never be opened. The air conditioner is charged
with R 134a ecological refrigerant.

Always take the following safety precautions:

l any work on the air conditioning system must be undertaken exclusively

4
wearing protective eyewear and gloves
l avoid direct contact with skin, as this can cause frost burns
l avoid contact with eyes; should the refrigerant enter your eyes, seek medi-
cal assistance immediately 1
l any welding either directly on the refrigerant circuit or in the immediate
vicinity is strictly prohibited. The refrigerant must not be exposed to tem- Fig. 424

5
peratures in excess of 80°C.

Valve for charging and maintenance of the A/C circuit

System recharging must be carried out at a specialised service centre.
The air conditioning system service valves (1) are located on the left-hand side of
the engine near the compressor.

6
1

7
1

Fig. 425
8
9
10

6-47

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 47 20/09/2012 19.03.24

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6.13 - MAINTENANCE EVERY 1000 HOURS OR AT LEAST EVERY TWO YEARS
6.13.1 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit
1

Flush the cooling circuit using a specific detergent.

WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is still hot. The radiator is under pressure when hot, and if opened,
boiling liquid and steam can escape and cause serious injury to yourself and anyone else in the vicinity. Before remov-
ing the radiator cap, stop the engine and wait for the circuit to cool down.
2

Procedure for changing the coolant and flushing the circuit

1. Park the tractor on level ground.
The engine must be switched off and the coolant cold.
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the drain plug.
3. Drain the cooling system by unscrewing plug (1) on the RH side of the
3

engine.
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any
fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be dis-
posed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
4

Fig. 426
5

4. Refit the previously removed plugs and fill the circuit with detergent mixture via filler (2) located on reservoir (1).
5. For 130 hp, 140 hp and 160 hp tractors
5.1. Expansion tank
5.2. Cap
6
7

Fig. 427
6. For 175 hp tractors
6.1. Expansion tank
6.2. Cap
8
9

Fig. 428
7. Start the engine run it at idle speed for approximately one and a half hours;
IMPORTANT:
When the engine is running, check that the detergent mixture level does not below the minimum mark on the
10

expansion tank.

6-48

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 48 20/09/2012 19.03.25

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8. Switch off the engine, drain the system and then fill it with water; then start the engine again bring it up to a speed of approx.
1000 rpm. and leave it running for 5 minutes;

1
9. Drain the system once again;
10. Refill the circuit with coolant, run the engine for a few minutes and then top up the system if necessary.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

6-49

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 49 20/09/2012 19.03.25

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

6-50

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 50 20/09/2012 19.03.25

 1
2
3
4
7 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS

5
6
7
8
9
10

7-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.03.25

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.1 - TOWING THE TRACTOR
1
2
3

Fig. 429
The tractor can be towed only for short distances, such as, for example, from inside to outside a building.
4

A broken down tractor should be towed for the minimum indispensable distance to remove it from potentially dangerous conditions.
Observe all legal provisions as envisaged in the highway code relative to national legislation regarding towing manoeuvres.
WARNING
We recommend transporting the tractor on a low loader in the case of longer transport distances. Comply with the
maximum width and height regulations for road transport. Check that the loader is suitable for the weight of the tractor
5

to be transported.
WARNING
An operator must always be at the tractor’s controls when the tractor is being towed.
6

DANGER
NEVER permit other persons to access the tractor operator position during towing.

7.1.1 - Towing with the engine running

7

Towing with the engine running can be performed if forced gearbox lubrication is ensured:
l Engine speed between 1200 - 1300 rpm.
l Maximum towing speed 8 km/h
l Maximum towing distance 1 km
For towing the tractor use only a standard bar applied to the front towing hitch approved by the manufacturer.
8

Make sure to use the correct pin for the towing hitch and that it is secured with its locking pin.
Clean all lights required for road use, front and rear, and make sure they are in working order.
Before starting towing check the following conditions:
l Unhitch any implement from the tractor;
l Lock the two brake pedals together with the connecting latch;
9

l Disengage the power take-off and differential locks;

l Set the shuttle control lever and gear lever to neutral;
l Move the range lever to the “fast” position;
l Move the creeper lever to neutral;
l Display the SMV (Slow Moving Vehicle) sign and turn on the rotating beacon and hazard lights
10

7-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.03.26

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
CAUTION
Switch on the hazard warning lights and revolving warning lights. Affix suitable notices indicating that the tractor is

1
being towed. Observe and follow the relevant national regulations. Observe local safety regulations.

During road transfers observe the following instructions:

l Wait until traffic thins before joining the road. Exert caution in the proximity of unregulated intersections. Slow down until you
have a clear view in both directions.
Keep in your lane and drive as close as possible to the kerb. If a tailback builds up behind you pull into a lay-by as soon as

2
l

possible to allow the traffic to pass

l When stopping the tractor (in any circumstances) apply the parking brake.
l Travel speed must ALWAYS be such as to allow complete control and stability of the tractor in all conditions.
DANGER
Never attempt to tow the tractor with ropes (including steel ropes) because rope breakage can cause serious injury.

3
7.1.2 - Towing with the engine off
IMPORTANT
With engine stopped and with forced gearbox lubrication system inoperative the tractor can be transferred to a service

4
centre only when loaded onto a transporter.

With engine stopped and with forced gearbox lubrication system inoperative the tractor should not be towed except when safety is
at risk.

5
6
7
8
9
10

7-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.03.26

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.2 - SAFE TRANSPORT OF THE TRACTOR
DANGER
1

Do not enter the loading area when the tractor is being loaded onto a transporter.

Load and unload the tractor on level solid ground that provides a sound support for the wheels. Use suitably robust ramps set at an
appropriate angle and height. The loader bed must be kept clean and free of clay, oil or other slippery material.
2

Before loading or unloading the tractor, make sure that the transporter parking brake is applied and the wheels are chocked. Use an
assistant signalman in a safe position to keep an eye on the ramps, the load bed, the tractor, and the operator.
Ideally the tractor should be loaded on and unloaded from the transporter by a specialist operator. The tractor operator may ������
be in-
sufficiently experienced.
Load the tractor complete with the four tyres on the truck bed or trailer.
3

Once the tractor has been loaded proceed as follows:

l Make sure the engine hood, doors, front and rear hatch and cab roof hatch (if present) are secured.
l Lock the tractor by engaging the parking brake and other devices such as PARK LOCK, PARK BRAKES, if available. If the
tractor is equipped with a mechanical gearbox select first gear. Place chocks under the four wheels.
l Secure the tractor with chains or straps.
l Do not attach straps or chains to the steering hydraulic cylinders or front drive shaft or other tractor components that can be
4

damaged.
l On models equipped with a turbocharger, cover the exhaust pipe terminal to prevent the rotor from being caused to rotate by
wind action, resulting in damage to bearings which, in this condition, are not lubricated.
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.03.26

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.3 - LIFTING THE TRACTOR
Use a lifting device of adequate capacity for the weight of the tractor (including the weight of all installed accessories).

1
Before lifting the tractor, make sure the doors, cab, hatches and other mobile parts are firmly secured.
Keep a safe distance from the tractor during lifting operations.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.03.26

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.4 - ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 48
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The engine fails to start or starts with dif- Incorrect start-up procedure. Review the start-up procedure.
ficulty Low level or lack of fuel. Check the fuel level.
Air in the fuel pipes. Bleed the fuel system.
Low ambient temperature. Use the cold start device.
2

Fuel system contaminated. Clean and bleed the fuel system.

Wrong engine oil viscosity. Use oil of the right viscosity.
Fuel filter(s) obstructed. Renew the filter.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
Inefficient fuel pump. Check the pump works properly.
Fuel unsuited to the working temperature. Use fuel of the right type for the tempera-
3

ture conditions.
Battery cut-off device turned on. Turn off the device.
Low starter motor speed. Check the starter motor and the battery.
Wrong type of fuel. Drain the tank and the system completely.
Contact your fuel supplier.
The engine turns irregularly and/or stalls Fuel filter(s) obstructed. Renew the filter.
4

Fuel system contaminated. Clean and bleed the fuel system.

Fuel cap breather obstructed. Wash the cap in clean diesel and check the
breather is clear.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
The engine pings Incorrect injection pump timing and syn- Contact an authorised dealer.
chronization.
Low engine oil level. Top up with oil as needed.
5

The engine lacks power Engine overload. Shift down gear, reduce the tow load.
Air filter clogged. Service the air filter.
Fuel filter(s) obstructed. Renew the filter.
Inadequate fuel. Use the right type of fuel.
Wrong engine valve clearance. Contact an authorised dealer.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
6

Injection pump operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

Fast idle speed set too low. Contact an authorised dealer.
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Check and adjust or contact an authorized
fold. dealer.
Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
Incorrect implement adjustment. Refer to the implement operator’s manual.
Feed pipe obstructed. Contact an authorised dealer.
7

Air in the fuel system. Bleed the fuel system.

Engine overheating Low level of refrigerant. Check whether there are any leaks in the
cooling system.
Faulty thermostat(s). Contact an authorised dealer.
Radiators dirty or obstructed. Clean.
Engine overload. Shift down gear, reduce the tow load.
8

Faulty pressurized plug on the radiator. Renew the plug.

Cooling system obstructed. Contact an authorised dealer.
Fan belt slack or worn. Check the tension of the belt and renew it
if worn out.
Temperature transmitter or indicator oper- Contact an authorised dealer.
ating trouble.
9

Grilles on the casing obstructed. Clean.

Low engine operating temperature Thermostat operating trouble. Renew the thermostat(s).
Temperature sensor or indicator faulty. Contact an authorised dealer.
Low engine oil pressure Low oil level. Top up with oil as needed.
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Oil pump broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
10

Oil pressure sensor broken. Contact an authorised dealer.

7-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.03.26

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Engine oil consumption too high Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

1
Oil seepage outside. Contact an authorised dealer.
Engine oil level too high. Reduce the oil level as needed.
Valve guides or seals worn. Contact an authorised dealer.
Dust intake. Check the air intake system, filter and man-
ifolds.
Fuel consumption too high Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

2
Engine overload. Shift down gear, reduce the tow load.
Air filter clogged. Service the air filter.
Inadequate fuel. Use the right type of fuel.
Wrong engine valve clearance. Contact an authorised dealer.
Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.
Incorrect implement adjustment. Refer to the implement operator’s manual.
Injection pump operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

3
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Check and adjust or contact an authorized
fold. dealer.
Engine timing off. Contact an authorised dealer.
Engine emits white smoke Inadequate fuel. Use the right type of fuel.
Preheating system trouble. Check the preheating system.
Turbocharger operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

4
Engine emits black smoke Injector operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

5
6
7
8
9
10

7-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.5 - GEARBOX TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to solve problems associated with the tractor gearbox.
1

Table 49
TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Gearbox working temperature too high High oil level. Check the oil level.
Gearbox oil cooler obstructed or dirty Clean.
(where applicable).
Incorrect oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
2

Noisy gearbox Low oil level. Check the oil level and top up if necessary.
Incorrect oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Bearings worn or parts damaged. Consult an authorized dealer.
Difficulty in engaging gears The clutch fails to disengage completely. Consult an authorized dealer.
External control coupling incorrectly ad- Adjust the coupling, renew the worn parts,
justed or worn. or consult an authorized dealer.
3

Gear engagement forks or synchronizers Consult an authorized dealer.

worn.
Air in the clutch control system. Consult an authorized dealer.
Tractor does not move Check that all controls have been activated Consult an authorized dealer.
correctly.
The error code will indicate the origin of Consult an authorized dealer.
4

the fault (for versions with an electronically

controlled gearbox).
Little control when using the clutch pedal The time for filling the gearbox clutches Consult an authorized dealer.
is set wrongly (for versions with hydraulic
shuttle).
Control mechanism malfunctioning. Consult an authorized dealer.
5

Gear kicks out spontaneously or cannot be Worn synchronizers/couplings. Gear en- Consult an authorized dealer.
disengaged gagement coupling incorrect adjustment.
External control coupling incorrectly ad- Adjust the coupling, renew the worn parts,
justed or worn. or consult an authorized dealer.
Gear engagement forks or synchronizers Consult an authorized dealer.
worn.
6

Bearings worn. Consult an authorized dealer.

Services or gearbox lubrication oil low Gearbox oil filter clogged. Change the filter.
pressure Incorrect oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with the correct oil.
Oil pump inefficient/broken. Consult an authorized dealer.
Shuttle direction clutch engagement is The clutch engagement must be calibrated. Consult an authorized dealer.
abrupt or excessively modulated
7

Clutch screeches during modulation Limited screeching is to be considered nor- -

mal with a cerametallic clutch plate.
High and sudden screeching. Consult an authorized dealer.
The Powershift gearbox is sharp, jerks or The Powershift gearbox must be adjusted. Consult an authorized dealer.
the tractor stops
8
9
10

7-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.6 - FRONT AND REAR POWER TAKE-OFF TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to solve problems associated with the tractor front and rear

1
PTOs.
Table 50
TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The clutch slips Check the clutch unit engagement device. Overhaul the engagement device. Consult
an authorized dealer.

2
Possible wear of clutch plates. Overhaul the clutch assembly.
The clutch fails to disengage PTO fails to stop when disengaged. Overhaul the engagement device. Consult
an authorized dealer.
Overhaul the PTO braking device. Consult
an authorized dealer.
Check the clutch unit engagement device. Overhaul the engagement device. Consult
an authorized dealer.

3
Piston seized or piston completes a full Overhaul the clutch assembly.
stroke.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.7 - FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 51
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Excessive wear of universal joint cross Oil leaks. Renew the faulty seals.
journals
Early tyre wear Wrong tyre pressure. Check the pressure of the tyres.
Wheel toe-in. Contact an authorised dealer.
2

Rolling or mechanical ratio. Contact an authorised dealer.

Wheel oscillation. Check steering knuckles for wear and re-
new them if necessary. Contact an autho-
rised dealer.
Continued use of the front-wheel drive dur- Avoid using the front-wheel drive when
ing transport by road. possible.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.8 - BRAKES TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.

1
Table 52
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Brake pedal travel too great Leakage from the brake bleed valve. Contact an authorised dealer.
Oil leakage from the pipes. Contact an authorised dealer.
Brake discs worn. Contact an authorised dealer.
Air in the system. Bleed the system. Contact an authorised

2
dealer.
Brake piston gaskets defective. Contact an authorised dealer.
Transmission breather device obstructed. Clean/renew the breather. Contact an au-
thorised dealer.
Leakage in the control system. Contact an authorised dealer.
The brake pedal moves down Leakage in the pump control system. Contact an authorised dealer.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.9 - LIFT TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 53
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The lift does not move when the control le- No oil flow/pressure in the hydraulic circuit. Contact an authorised dealer.
ver is operated Incorrect use of the control. Review the procedure for using the lift.
The error code will indicate the origin of the Contact an authorised dealer.
fault (for versions with an electronic lift).
2

Lifting height limit control positioned incor- Adjust the lifting height limit control.
rectly.
Fault in the lift position sensor circuit. Contact an authorised dealer.
The external control of the lift does not External control switch(es) broken (for ver- Contact an authorised dealer.
work sions with an electronic lift).
Control linkage badly adjusted or broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
3

The lift fails to rise completely or rises Lifting height limit control positioned incor- Adjust the lifting height limit control.
slowly rectly.
Excessive load on attachment. Reduce the load.
The lift lowers slowly Down speed control positioned incorrectly. Adjust the lowering speed control.
The lift responds slowly to changes in load Position/draft control set incorrectly. Adjust the position/draft control.
in draft control mode Lowering speed too slow. Adjust the lowering speed control.
4

Implement not adjusted correctly. Contact an authorised dealer.

The lift response is too sensitive in draft Position/draft control set incorrectly. Adjust the position/draft control.
control mode
The implement fails to reach the required Lift rods too short. Adjust the lift rods.
working depth No implement soil penetration. Refer to the implement operator’s manual.
After parking the tractor and stopping the Internal leakage in the circuit. Contact an authorised dealer.
5

engine, the lift lowers too quickly

6
7
8
9
10

7-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.10 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.

1
Table 54
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The hydraulic system does not work The error code will indicate the origin of the Contact an authorised dealer.
fault.
Oil level low. Top up with oil as needed.
Hydraulic filter clogged. Clean and if necessary renew the oil

2
filter(s).
Internal seepage. Contact an authorised dealer.
The hydraulic oil overheats Incorrect hydraulic oil level. Check and adjust the oil level as required.
Hydraulic oil cooler obstructed. Clean.
Remote control valve activated, not in neu- Check the position of the control levers.
tral position.

3
Hydraulic load not suited to the tractor. Contact an authorised dealer.
High-pressure internal blow-by. Contact an authorised dealer.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.11 - HYDRAULIC REMOTE VALVES TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 55
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The kick out of the remote valve disengag- Pressure of oil delivered to the connected Contact an authorised dealer.
es too soon equipment too high.
Block time set wrongly. Set the time correctly.
Mechanical fault with the remote valve. Contact an authorised dealer.
2

The cylinder of the remote controlled im- Incorrect setting of the flow regulator Set the flow regulator.
plement works too slowly (where applicable).
Hoses connected incorrectly. Connect the hoses correctly.
The load is greater than the capacity of the Reduce the load or use a cylinder of an
system. adequate size (ask an authorized dealer).
Limited movement of the remote valves Adjust the tie rods or ask an authorized
3

control lever. dealer.

Travel of the remote controlled cylinder too Incorrect flow rate. Adjust the flow rate (if possible).
fast or too slow
Direction of travel of the remote controlled Incorrect hose fittings. Reverse the hose fittings.
cylinder reversed
The hoses do not match Incorrect hose male fittings. Renew them with fittings to ISO standards.
4

The remote valve control lever fails to re- Lever mechanism broken. Contact an authorised dealer.
lease
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.12 - CAB TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to solve problems associated with the tractor cab.

1
Table 56
TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Dust gets into the cab Inefficient seal around the filter cartridge Check the state of the seal.
(or cartridges).
Filter defective or missing. Change the filter.
Filter(s) clogged. Clean or change the filters.

2
Seals damaged on the perimeter of the Renew the seal(s).
doors, windows or openable roof.
Excessive air loss. Eliminate air leaks.
Fan air stream too weak. Consult an authorized dealer.
Low pressure stream Filter(s) clogged. Clean or change the filters.
Evaporator or heater pack obstructed. Consult an authorized dealer.

3
Air conditioner fails to produce cold air Heating on. Check the heating controls.
Drive belt slips or is worn or damaged. Check the state of the belt. Consult an au-
thorized dealer.
Insufficient refrigerant level. Consult an authorized dealer.
Condenser obstructed. Clean the condenser.
Compressor jammed. Consult an authorized dealer.

4
The heater does not work Faulty control. Consult an authorized dealer.
Seat suspension does not work Blown fuse. Renew the fuse.
The radio does not work Blown fuse. Renew the fuse.

5
6
7
8
9
10

7-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.13 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.
1

Table 57
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Low start-up speed - the engine is turned Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean and tighten the connections.
over too slowly loose.
Low battery output. Contact an authorised dealer.
Wrong engine oil viscosity. Use oil of the right viscosity for the ambient
2

temperature.
The starter motor does not work Battery or starter motor connections cor- Clean and tighten the connections.
roded or loose.
Battery completely flat. Charge or renew the battery.
Start-up signal switch (or switches) tripped. Run the start-up procedure again. Contact
an authorised dealer.
3

Blown fuse. Change the fuse.

Control levers in wrong position Run the start-up procedure again. Contact
an authorised dealer.
The alternator warning light stays on when Low engine idling speed. Increase the engine idling speed.
the engine is running Drive belt broken or slack. Check/renew the belt.
Alternator operating trouble. Have the alternator checked by an autho-
4

rised dealer.
The battery fails to charge Alternator operating trouble. Have the alternator checked by an autho-
rised dealer.
Terminals loose or corroded. Clean and tighten the connections.
Drive belt slack or worn. Check the belt. Renew the belt if neces-
sary.
5

Battery operating trouble. Contact an authorised dealer.

The lighting system does not work, where- Blown fuse. Change the fuse.
as the rest of the electrical system does
work
The entire electrical system does not work Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean and tighten the connections.
loose.
6

Battery cut-off switch disconnected. Reactivate the switch.

Battery sulphated or worn. Check the level and density of the electro-
lyte.
Blown fuse. Change the fuse.
Faulty fan The fan does not work. Check all the fan fuses. Contact an autho-
rised dealer.
7
8
9
10

7-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.14 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
This section describes potential faults, causes and corrective actions to help solve problems associated with the front and rear PTO.

1
Table 58
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The tractor swings or jerks Wrong quantity of water in the tyres (if Check the level. Contact an authorised
added). dealer.
Possible tyre ovality Check the tyre centring. Contact an autho-

2
rised dealer.
Incorrect weight distribution on the tractor. Check the weight distribution. Contact an
authorised dealer.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.03.27

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.15 - ENGINE ALARMS
CAUTION
1

If an alarm message appears on the display, stop the tractor and contact your dealer or local authorised workshop.

IMPORTANT:
Some alarms listed below do not display on the on-board display because they are not enabled for the tractor’s actual
2

equipment.

The following table lists the engine alarm messages which display on the on-board display.
Table 59
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
3

Engine, EGR - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the EGR actuator is short-circuiting to battery positive
Engine, EGR - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the EGR actuator is short-circuiting to ground
Engine, EGR - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the EGR actuator signal
Engine, EGR - disconnected The control unit detects that the EGR actuator is disconnected
Engine, EGR - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the EGR actuator signal is not valid or outside the limits
Engine, acc. pedal - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the accelerator pedal position sensor is shorting to battery
positive
4

Engine, acc. pedal - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the accelerator pedal position sensor is shorting to ground
Engine, acc. pedal - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the accelerator position signal
Engine, acc. pedal - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the accelerator pedal position signal is not valid or outside
the limits
Engine, hand. throttle - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the hand throttle position sensor is shorting to battery posi-
tive
5

Engine, hand. throttle - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the hand throttle position sensor is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine, hand. throttle - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the accelerator position signal
Engine, hand. throttle- Signal not valid The control unit detects that the hand throttle position signal is not valid or outside the
limits
Engine, CAN error - Device out of order The engine control unit has detected that the CANBUS controller is damaged
6

Engine, CAN error - FMI 14 The engine control unit has detected an unidentifiable error on the CANBUS
Engine,CAN error - Failure not ident The engine control unit has detected an unidentifiable error on the CANBUS
Engine,CAN error - Failure not ident The engine control unit has not been able to read or send a message on the CANBUS
Engine,Internal error - Short-circuit high The control unit has detected that the 5V power supply of circuits is shorting to battery
positive or over the minimum value
Engine,Internal error - Short-circuit high The control unit has detected an abnormally high input voltage in the ECU
Engine,Internal error - Short-circuit high The control unit detects a problem during the control unit initialization
7

Engine,Internal error - Grounding short- The control unit has detected that the 5V power supply of circuits is shorting to ground
circuit or under the minimum value
Engine,Internal error - Grounding short- The control unit has detected an abnormally low input voltage in the ECU
circuit
Engine,Internal error - Grounding short- The control unit detects a problem during the control unit initialization
circuit
8

Engine, Internal error - Device out of order The control unit detects that the motor start signal is shorting to battery positive or the
starter switch is faulty
Engine, Internal error - Device out of order The control unit detects a fault with the control unit
Engine, Internal error - Device out of order The control unit detects a problem involving the internal serial interface
Engine, Internal error - Device out of order The control unit detects a problem during the control unit initialization
Engine,Internal error - FMI 14 The engine control unit has detected an unidentifiable error
9

Engine,Internal error - FMI 14 The engine control unit detects an internal error on the ECU power supply test circuit
Engine, internal error - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the 5V power supply of the
circuits
Engine, internal error - Failure not ident The control unit detects a problem involving the internal serial interface
Engine, internal error - Failure not ident The control unit detects a problem during the control unit initialization
Engine, internal error - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the ECU
10

Engine, internal error - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the ECU power supply test circuit
Engine, internal error - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the engine start command signal
Engine, internal error - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem

7-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.03.28

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
Engine, Internal error - Signal not valid The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the engine start command signal
Engine,Water in fuel - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the water in the fuel filter presence sensor is shorting to

1
battery positive
Engine,Water in fuel - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the water in the fuel filter presence sensor is shorting to
circuit ground
Engine,Water in fuel - Device out of order The control unit detects that the fuel filter is filled with water
Engine,Water in fuel - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the water in the fuel filter presence
sensor signal

2
Engine,CAN message - Device out of order The engine control unit has not been able to read or send a message on the CANBUS
Engine,CAN message - Failure not ident The engine control unit has not been able to read or send a message on the CANBUS
Engine, E2P parameters - Device out of The engine control unit has detected an error in writing the parameters
order
Engine, E2P parameters - Failure not ident The engine control unit has detected an unidentifiable error in reading and writing the
parameters in E2PROM

3
Engine,Preheating - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the preheating relay is shorting to battery positive
Engine,Preheating - Grounding short-cir- The control unit detects that the preheating relay is shorting to ground
cuit
Engine,Preheating - Grounding short-cir- The control unit detects that the preheating active signal is shorting to ground
cuit
Engine,Preheating - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the preheating relay

4
Engine,Preheating - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the preheating active signal
Engine, Preheating - disconnected The control unit detects that the preheating control relay is disconnected
Engine, Preheating - disconnected The control unit detects that the preheating active signal is disconnected
Engine, Preheating - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the preheating active signal is not valid
Engine, Atmos. Pressure. - Short circuit The control unit detects that the atmospheric pressure sensor is shorting to battery
high positive
Engine, Atmos. Pressure. - Grounding The control unit detects that the atmospheric pressure sensor is shorting to ground

5
short-circuit
Engine, Atmos. Pressure. - Failure not The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the atmospheric pressure sensor
ident signal
Engine, Atmos. Pressure. - Signal not valid The engine control unit detects that atmospheric pressure is outside the permissible
limits
Engine, oil. pressure - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the engine oil pressure sensor is shorting to battery positive

6
Engine, oil. pressure - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the engine oil pressure sensor is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine, oil. pressure - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the engine oil pressure sensor
Engine, oil. pressure - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the engine oil pressure sensor signal is not valid
Engine, oil. pressure - Signal too low The control unit detects that the engine oil pressure sensor signal is lower than the
minimum permissible limit

7
Engine, oil. pressure - Signal too high The control unit detects that the engine oil pressure sensor signal is higher than the
maximum limit
Engine,fuel pressure - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the fuel low pressure sensor is shorting to battery positive
Engine,fuel pressure - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the fuel low pressure sensor is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine,fuel pressure - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the fuel low pressure sensor signal
8

Engine,fuel pressure - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the fuel low pressure signal is not valid or outside the limits
Engine,rail pressure - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure sensor is shorting to battery positive
Engine,rail pressure - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure sensor is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine,rail pressure - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the rail fuel pressure sensor
Engine,rail pressure - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the engine oil pressure sensor signal is not valid due to
9

malfunctioning of one or more injectors

Engine,rail pressure - Signal too low The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure sensor signal is lower than the mini-
mum permissible limit
Engine,rail pressure - Signal too low The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure is below the specific operating curve
in relation to engine revs
Engine,rail pressure - Signal too high The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure sensor signal is higher than the maxi-
10

mum limit

7-19

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 19 20/09/2012 19.03.28

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
Engine,rail pressure - Signal too high The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure is outside the specific operating
curves in relation to fuel flow rate or engine revs
1

Engine, Turbo pressure. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the turbocharger pressure and air temperature sensor is
shorting to battery positive
Engine, Turbo pressure. - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the turbocharger pressure and air temperature sensor is
circuit shorting to ground
Engine, Turbo pressure. - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the turbocharger pressure and air
temperature sensor
2

Engine, Turbo pressure. - Signal not valid The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the turbocharger pressure and air
temperature sensor
Engine,start relay - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the start relay is shorting to battery positive
Engine,start relay - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the start relay is shorting to ground
Engine,start relay - Device out of order The control unit detects that the motor starter is on also if it has not received the start
command, or the motor has already been started
3

Engine,start relay - Failure not ident The control unit detects that the motor starter is on also if it has not received the start
command, or the motor has already been started
Engine,start relay - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the start relay
Engine,start relay - disconnected The control unit detects that the start relay is disconnected
Engine,main relay - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the RL70 relay is shorting to battery positive
Engine,main relay - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the main relay is shorting to ground
4

Engine,main relay - Mechanical defect The control unit detects that the main relay is faulty or disconnected
Engine,main relay - Device out of order Alarm available but not utilized
Engine,main relay - Device out of order The control unit detects that the main relay is faulty or short-circuited to ground
Engine,main relay - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the main relay
Engine,main relay - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the main relay
Engine, acc. sensor - Device out of order The control unit detects a problem on the camshaft and crankshaft speed sensor signal
Engine, acc. sensor - FMI 14 The engine control unit detects that the engine is or has been running in overspeed
5

conditions
Engine, acc. sensor - Incorrect frequency The control unit detects that the signal of one of the camshaft and crankshaft speed
sensors is incorrect or absent
Engine, acc. sensor - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the camshaft and crankshaft
speed sensor signal
Engine, acc. sensor - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the camshaft and crankshaft speed sensor signals are out
6

of phase
Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit has detected that the power supply of injector circuit stage A is shorting
to battery positive or over the minimum value
Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector block N° 1 (of injectors N°1, N°3 and N°5) is short-
ing to battery positive
Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector block N° 2 (of injectors N°2, N°4 and N°6) is short-
7

ing to battery positive

Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector N° 1 is shorting to battery positive
Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector N° 2 is shorting to battery positive
Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector N° 3 is shorting to battery positive
Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector N° 4 is shorting to battery positive
Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector N° 5 is shorting to battery positive
8

Engine,injection system - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that injector N° 6 is shorting to battery positive
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector block N° 1 (of injectors N°1, N°3 and N°5) is short-
circuit ing to ground
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector block N° 2 (of injectors N°2, N°4 and N°6) is short-
circuit ing to ground
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector N° 1 is shorting to ground
9

circuit
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector N° 2 is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector N° 3 is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector N° 4 is shorting to ground
10

circuit

7-20

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 20 20/09/2012 19.03.28

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector N° 5 is shorting to ground
circuit

1
Engine,injection system - Grounding short- The control unit detects that injector N° 6 is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine,injection system - Device out of or- The engine control unit has detected a fault in the injector circuit stage A
der
Engine,injection system - Device out of or- The engine control unit has detected a fault in the injector circuit stage B
der

2
Engine,injection system - FMI 14 The engine control unit has detected an unidentifiable error in the injector circuit stage A
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving injector block N° 1 (of injec-
tors N°1, N°3 and N°5)
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving injector block N° 2 (of injec-
tors N°2, N°4 and N°6)
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem affecting injector N° 1

3
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem affecting injector N° 2
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem affecting injector N° 3
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem affecting injector N° 4
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem affecting injector N° 5
Engine,injection system - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem affecting injector N° 6
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector block N° 1 (of injectors N°1, N°3 and N°5) is not

4
calibrated
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector block N° 1 (of injectors N°2, N°4 and N°6) is not
calibrated
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector N° 1 is not calibrated
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector N° 2 is not calibrated
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector N° 3 is not calibrated
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector N° 4 is not calibrated

5
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector N° 5 is not calibrated
Engine,injection system - Out of calibration The control unit detects that injector N° 6 is not calibrated
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector block N° 1 (of injectors N°1, N°3 and N°5) is dis-
connected
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector block N° 2 (of injectors N°2, N°4 and N°6) is dis-
connected

6
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector N° 1 is disconnected
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector N° 2 is disconnected
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector N° 3 is disconnected
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector N° 4 is disconnected
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector N° 5 is disconnected
Engine,injection system - disconnected The control unit detects that injector N° 6 is disconnected

7
Engine,injection system - Signal not valid The engine control unit has detected an error in reading the power supply of injector
circuit stage A
Engine, Intake. air temp. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the turbocharger pressure and air temperature sensor is
shorting to battery positive
Engine, Intake. air temp. - Grounding The control unit detects that the turbocharger pressure and air temperature sensor is
short-circuit shorting to ground
8
Engine, Intake. air temp. - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the turbocharger pressure and air
temperature sensor
Engine, Intake. air temp. - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the turbocharger pressure and air temperature sensor
signal is not valid
Engine, Intake. air temp. - Signal too high The control unit detects that the turbocharger pressure and air temperature sensor
signal is higher than the maximum permissible limit
9

Engine,temperature - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the coolant temperature sensor is shorting to battery posi-
tive
Engine,temperature - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the coolant temperature sensor is shorting to ground
circuit
Engine,temperature - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the coolant temperature sensor
Engine,temperature - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the coolant temperature sensor signal is not valid
10

Engine, temperature - Signal too high The control unit detects that the coolant temperature sensor signal is higher than the
maximum permissible limit
Engine, batt. voltage. - Failure not ident The control unit has detected that the power supply is higher than the safety limits

7-21

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 21 20/09/2012 19.03.29

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
Engine, batt. voltage. - Signal not valid The control unit has detected that the power supply is higher than the safety limits
Engine, batt. voltage. - Signal too low The control unit has detected that the power supply is lower than the operating limits
1

Engine, batt. voltage. - Signal too high The control unit has detected that the power supply is higher than the operating limits
Engine,FCU valve - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the fuel metering unit is shorting to battery positive
Engine,FCU valve - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the fuel metering unit is shorting to ground
Engine,FCU valve - Device out of order The control unit detects that the fuel metering unit is faulty
Engine,FCU valve - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem involving the fuel metering unit
Engine,FCU valve - disconnected The control unit detects that the fuel metering unit is disconnected
2

Engine,rail valve - Device out of order The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure is not compatible with the engine
speed due to the fuel circuit relief valve
Engine,rail valve - FMI 14 The engine control unit has detected an unidentifiable error in the rail fuel pressure due
to the fuel circuit relief valve
Engine,rail valve - Failure not ident The control unit detects an unidentifiable problem on the rail fuel pressure sensor signal
due to the fuel circuit relief valve
3

Engine,rail valve - Signal not valid The control unit detects that the rail fuel pressure sensor signal is not valid due to the
fuel circuit relief valve
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-22

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 22 20/09/2012 19.03.29

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.16 - TRANSMISSION ALARMS
The transmission control unit performs tractor self-diagnostics at set intervals. In the presence of malfunctions, the control unit alerts

1
the operator by means of the instrument panel, the transmission display, and, if relevant, an audible alarm signal.
Depending on the seriousness of the fault, the transmission control unit changes the driving program automatically.
7.16.1 - Display of alarms
The transmission display signals the fault by flashing of warning light (1).
The type of fault is signalled by code (2) composed of two characters (the code

2
displayed in the figure is 0x24).

3
Fig. 430

A message (1) appears on the on-board display.

4
The following example is shown in the figure:
1. Main clutch excess speed

5
Fig. 431

6
7.16.2 - Operating programs in the event of transmission errors or faults
In the event of transmission errors or faults, the control unit automatically activates
an operating program that handles transmission management.
The program code (1) is shown in the transmission display.

7
8

Fig. 432

The possible operating programs are shown below:

l Limited operation program
m Allows the operator to complete the current task although certain functions may not be available.
9

l Alternative operation program

m Work may continue although with limited transmission functions (POWERSHIFT gearbox disabled); the APS operating

mode also falls within this program.

10

7-23

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 23 20/09/2012 19.03.29

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
l LIMP-HOME operation program
The moment this program is activated, the transmission is put in NEUTRAL. The following two conditions must be
1

satisfied in order to use the shuttle:

m Tractor stationary
m Shuttle control lever in NEUTRAL POSITION; for at least 1 second

l TC-SHUTDOWN operation program

m Tractor operation not possible. The EMERGENCY-DRIVE mode also comes within this operating program.

7.16.3 - List of error codes

2

Table 60
ALARM CODE MESSAGE DISPLAYED ON THE INSTRU- ALARM DESCRIPTION
MENT PANEL
0x10 10-Main. clutch. calib. Out of calibration The control unit detects errors in the main clutch calibration val-
ues
3

0x11 11-Main. clutch. calib. Out of calibration The control unit detects errors in the main clutch calibration val-
ues
0x12 12-Temperature sensor short circuit to The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the
+12V transmission oil temperature sensor.
0x13 13-Temperature sensor short circuit to The control unit detects a problem with the power input to the
ground temperature sensor
4

0x14 14-Neutral switch signal not valid The control unit detects a discrepancy between the speeds
sensed at the main clutch input and at the transmission output,
indicated by the status of the start enable sensor (which indicates
whether the transmission is in neutral or a mechanical gear is
engaged)
0x18 18-Hydraulic circuit Signal not valid The control unit detects a discrepancy between the oil pressure
5

reading and the operating status of the transmission

0x21 21-Speed sensor. nAB Signal too high The control unit detects a ground speed higher than the permis-
sible limit
0x22 22-Shuttle. mode temp. Signal too high The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher
than the permissible limit with the tractor operating in “FIELD”
mode
6

0x23 23-Transport. mode temp. Signal too high The control unit detects a transmission oil temperature higher
than the permissible limit with the tractor operating in “ROAD”
mode.
0x24 main clutch overspeed The control unit detects the main clutch running overspeed.
0x25 25-Speed input Signal too high The control unit detects a conflict between the information on the
engine speed via CANBUS and that read by the nLse pick-up
7

sensor
0x36 36-Gearbox SV 2 not connected The control unit detects that solenoid Y4 is either not connected
or faulty
0x37 37-Gearbox SV 2 Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is
short-circuiting to ground
0x38 38-Gearbox SV 2 Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y4 is
8

short-circuiting to battery positive

0x39 39-Gearbox SV 1 not connected The control unit detects that solenoid Y2 is either not connected
or faulty
0x40 40-Gearbox SV 1 Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is
short-circuiting to ground
0x41 41-Gearbox SV 1 Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the control line of solenoid Y2 is
9

short-circuiting to battery positive

0x47 47-Speed sensor. nAB Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is disconnected
+12V or short-circuiting to positive.
0x48 48-Speed sensor. nAB Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nAb is short-circuit-
ground ing to ground
0x4B 4B-Speed sensor. nAB Device faulty The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the
10

rpm sensor nAb

7-24

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 24 20/09/2012 19.03.29

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ALARM CODE MESSAGE DISPLAYED ON THE INSTRU- ALARM DESCRIPTION
MENT PANEL
0x50 50-Speed sensor. nHK Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is disconnected

1
+12V or short-circuiting to positive
0x51 51-Speed sensor. nHK Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nHk is short-circuit-
ground ing to ground
0x52 52-Speed sensor. nHK Device faulty The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the
rpm sensor nHk
0x53 53-Speed sensor nLSA Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLsa is disconnected

2
+12V or short-circuiting to positive
0x54 54-Speed sensor nLSA Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLsa is short-circu-
ground iting to ground
0x55 55-Speed sensor nLSA Device faulty The control unit detects unreliable information coming from the
rpm sensor nLsa
0x5F 5F-FRRS sensor Not calibrated The control unit detects that the calibration values of the field/

3
road position sensor are incorrect
0x60 60-FRRS calibration Not calibrated The control unit detects that the calibration values of the field/
road position sensor are incorrect
0x61 61-FRRS sensor Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the field/road position sensor is
shorting to a positive feed (+5V).
0x62 62-FRRS sensor Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the field/road position sensor is

4
shorting to battery positive (+12V).
0x63 63-FRRS sensor Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the field/road position sensor is dis-
connected or shorting to ground
0x64 64-Clutch pedal Signal not valid The control unit detects a conflict in the information received from
the clutch pedal position sensor and clutch pedal depressed sen-
sor, regarding the position of the pedal

5
0x65 65-Clutch pedal Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is
disconnected or shorting to ground
0x66 66-Clutch pedal Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is
shorting to a positive feed
0x67 67-Sens. AU1. AU1 Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the power input to the clutch pedal
position sensor is less than the prescribed value

6
0x68 68-Sens. AU1. AU1 short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the power input to the clutch pedal
position sensor is higher than the correct value
0x69 69-Clutch pedal Signal not valid The control unit detects one or more threshold values of the
clutch pedal position sensor out of range.
0x70 70-Clutch pedal E2P Not calibrated The control unit detects that the calibration values of the clutch
pedal have not been saved correctly due to a defect in the EE-

7
PROM memory locations, or that the clutch pedal has never been
calibrated
0x73 73-Clutch open. button Grounding short- The control unit detects that the “Comfort Clutch” button is dis-
circuit connected or short-circuiting to ground
0x74 74-Clutch open. button. Short circuit high The control unit detects that the “Comfort Clutch” button is short-
circuiting to battery positive
8

0x76 76-Proportional SV not connected The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve oper-
ating the main clutch is disconnected
0x77 77-Proportional SV Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the proportional solenoid valve oper-
ating the main clutch is short-circuiting to ground
0x79 79-Forward travel. SV not connected The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid Y3 is dis-
connected
9

0x80 80-Forward travel. SV - Short circuit to The control unit detects that the forward travel solenoid Y3 is
ground shorting to ground
0x82 82-Reverse travel. SV not connected The control unit detects that the reverse travel solenoid Y1 is dis-
connected
0x83 83-Reverse travel. SV - Short circuit to The control unit detects that the reverse travel solenoid Y1 is
10

ground shorting to ground

0x85 85-Shuttle lever Signal not valid The control unit detects a problem involving the shuttle control
lever

7-25

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 25 20/09/2012 19.03.29

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ALARM CODE MESSAGE DISPLAYED ON THE INSTRU- ALARM DESCRIPTION
MENT PANEL
0x87 Encoding pins do not correspond to type The control unit detects that the type of vehicle has not been
1

of vehicle programmed correctly

0x89 89- VPS1 feed Signal not valid The ECU determines that the power absorption of the main clutch
solenoid and travel solenoids Y1 and Y3 is incorrect
0x90 90-VPS2 feed Signal not valid The ECU determines that the power absorption of powershift so-
lenoid valves Y2, Y4, Y5 and Y65 is not correct
0x91 91-Speed sensor. NHK Signal not valid The ECU determines a discrepancy between the data read by the
2

NLSA and NHK sensors, the position of the clutch pedal and the
position of the creeper lever
0x92 92-Battery voltage Short-circuit to +12V The control unit has detected an abnormally high input voltage
0x93 93-Battery voltage Short-circuit to ground The control unit has detected an abnormally low input voltage
0x94 94-Proportional SV Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the main clutch solenoid valve is
shorting to a positive feed
3

0x95 95-Forward travel. SV Short circuit to The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid valve Y6
ground is short-circuiting to positive
0x96 96-Reverse travel. SV Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid Y7 is
shorting to battery positive
0x97 97-Program error Signal not valid The control unit detects that the transmission ECU software has
not been programmed correctly
4

0x98 98-Config. error Signal not valid The control unit detects that transmission configuration data have
not been programmed correctly.
0x99 99-Vehicle config. Not calibrated The control unit detects that machine configuration data have not
been saved correctly (CHECKSUM ERROR)
0xB0 B0-Speed sensor. nLSE Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is disconnected
ground or short-circuiting to positive
5

0xB1 B1-Speed sensor. nLSE Short circuit to The control unit detects that the rpm sensor nLse is short-circu-
+12V iting to ground
0xB2 B2-Speed sensor. nLSE Device faulty The control detects unreliable information coming from the rpm
sensor nLse
0xB3 B3-FRRS field SV not connected The control unit detects that the “Field” mode selector solenoid
Y5 is disconnected
6

0xB4 B4-FRRS field SV Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the “Field” mode selector solenoid
Y5 is shorting to a positive feed
0xB5 B5-FRRS field SV Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the “Field” mode selector solenoid
Y5 is shorting to ground
0xB6 B6-FRRS road SV not connected The control unit detects that the “Road” mode selector solenoid
Y6 is disconnected
7

0xB7 B7-FRRS road SV Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the “Road” mode selector solenoid
Y6 is shorting to a positive feed
0xB8 B8-FRRS Road SV Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the “Road” mode selector solenoid
Y6 is shorting to a ground
0xB9 B9-Neutral lock SV not connected The control unit detects that the gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7
is disconnected
8

0xBA BA-EV Neutral lock Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7
is shorting to a positive feed
0xBB BB-EV Neutral lock Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the gearbox neutral lock solenoid Y7
is shorting to ground
0xC0 C0-PTCTL1 Msg Signal not valid The transmission control unit detects an error in the information
received by the HLHP control unit regarding the request for range
9

gear engagement
0xC1 C1-PTCTL1 Msg Signal not valid The transmission control unit detects an error in the information
received by the HLHP control unit regarding the travel direction
selection request
0xC3 C3-EEC1 message Signal not valid The transmission control unit detects an error in the information
received by the ECU regarding the communication of engine
10

speed

7-26

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 26 20/09/2012 19.03.29

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ALARM CODE MESSAGE DISPLAYED ON THE INSTRU- ALARM DESCRIPTION
MENT PANEL
0xC6 C6-EEC1 message Signal not valid The transmission control unit detects an error in the information

1
received by the HLHP control unit regarding the value of the APS
potentiometer
0xC9 C9-PTCTL1 Msg Signal not valid The transmission control unit detects an error in the information
received by the HLHP control unit regarding the APS control in-
formation
0xCB CB-EEC1 message Update error The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS line

2
0xCF CF-EEC1 message Update error The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS line
0xD0 D0-PTCTL1 Msg Update error The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS con-
troller
0xD1 D1-LIMITATION Msg Update error The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS con-
troller
0xD2 D2-HPSACTRL Msg Update error The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS con-

3
troller
0xD3 D3-HPSACTRL Msg Update error The transmission control unit detects a fault on the CANBUS con-
troller

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-27

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 27 20/09/2012 19.03.29

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.17 - REMOTE CONTROL VALVE ALARMS
CAUTION
1

If an alarm message appears on the display, stop the tractor and contact your dealer or local authorised workshop.

IMPORTANT:
Some alarms listed below do not display on the on-board display because they are not enabled for the tractor’s actual
2

equipment.

The following table lists the remote control valve alarm messages which display on the on-board display.
Table 61
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
3

??-Control valve Y - Unidentified alarm The HLHP control unit detects that control valve “Y” transmitted an alarm message with
“??” code not acknowledged between the identifiable alarms.
11-Control valve Y - CAN Rx Msg1 error Control valve “Y” informs the HLHP control unit that a communication problem has oc-
curred on the CAN line and that it has not received message 1.
12-Control valve Y - CAN Rx Msg2 error Control valve “Y” informs the HLHP control unit that a communication problem has oc-
curred on the CAN line and that it has not received message 2.
4

13-Control valve Y - Wrong CAN Rx Msg1 Control valve “Y” informs the HLHP control unit that a communication problem has
occurred on the CAN line and that it has received message 1 with implausible values.
14-Control valve Y - Wrong CAN Rx Msg2 Control valve “Y” informs the HLHP control unit that a communication problem has
occurred on the CAN line and that it has received message 2 with implausible values.
15-Control valve Y - SetPoint Fault Control valve “Y” informs the HLHP control unit that a communication problem has
occurred on the CAN line and that it has not received the SetPoint message or has
5

received the message but with implausible values.

16-Control valve Y - EEPROM inconsistent Control valve “Y” detects a discrepancy between the parameters written in EEPROM.
17-Control valve Y - Valve switched off The control valve signals that it has detected a problem that has been solved.
21-Control valve Y - UnderVoltage supply Control valve “Y” detects that the power supply was below the set limits during tractor
normal operation.
22-Control valve Y - OverVoltage supply Control valve “Y” detects that the power supply was above the set limits during tractor
normal operation.
6

23-Control valve Y - Spool Deflection low Control valve “Y” detects a spool delay in reaching the position required by the HLHP
control unit.
24-Control valve Y - Spool deflection high Control valve “Y” detects that the spool has surpassed the position requested by the
HLHP control unit, or that the spool is no longer able to return to the NEUTRAL position.
25-Control valve Y - Float not reached Control valve “Y” detects a spool delay in reaching the FLOATING position required by
the HLHP control unit.
7

26-Control valve Y - Manual operation Control valve “Y” detects that spool manual operation has been carried out.
31-Control valve Y - UnderVoltage Shut Off Control valve “Y” detects that the power supply was below 8V during tractor normal
operation.
32-Control valve Y - OverVoltage Shut Off Control valve “Y” detects that the power supply was above 36V during tractor normal
operation.
41-Control valve Y - HIGH OverVoltage Control valve “Y” detects that the power supply was above 45V during tractor normal
8

operation.
42-Control valve Y - Out Stage Fault Control valve “Y” detects that control valve pilot stage is disconnected or short-circuiting.
43-Control valve Y - Pos. Transducer Fault Control valve “Y” detects that control valve spool position sensor is disconnected or
faulty.
81-Control valve Y - Cannot go to Neutral Control valve “Y” detects that the spool is no longer able to return to the NEUTRAL
position.
9

82-Control valve Y - No NEUTRAL when Control valve “Y” detects that the spool is not in the NEUTRAL position when the valve
on is powered.
83-Control valve Y - Memory error Control valve “Y” detects an error in reading EEPROM data.
FF-Control valve Y - Distrib. disconnected The HLHP control unit detects that control valve “Y” is disconnected or receiving power
incorrectly.
10

7-28

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 28 20/09/2012 19.03.30

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7.18 - HLHP ECU ALARMS
CAUTION

1
If an alarm message appears on the display, stop the tractor and contact your dealer or local authorised workshop.

IMPORTANT:
Some alarms listed below do not display on the on-board display because they are not enabled for the tractor’s actual

2
equipment.

The following table lists the HLHP ECU alarm messages which display on the on-board display.
Table 62
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION

3
Hand throttle - Device out of order The engine control unit has detected an error in the value of the hand throttle signal
(via CANBUS).
Sensor. 5V power - Signal not valid The control unit detects a short-circuit in the 5V sensors power supply line.
Sensor. 8V power - Signal not valid The control unit detects a short circuit in 8V sensor power feed.
Shuttle control -Signal not valid The transmission control unit has detected an error in the value of the shuttle lever
signal (via CANBUS).
4WD SV. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the 4WD solenoid is shorting to battery positive.

4
4WD SV. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the 4WD solenoid is shorting to ground.
4WD SV. - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the 4WD
solenoid.
4WD SV. - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the 4WD
solenoid.
4WD SV. - disconnected The control unit detects that the 4WD engagement solenoid is not connected.

5
4WD SV. - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the 4WD
solenoid.
Armrest CAN error - message timeout Detection of the absence of a connection via the CANBUS to the armrest
CAN Engine error - message timeout No connection via the CANBUS to the engine control unit detected.
CAN TCU error - message timeout No connection via the CANBUS to the transmission control unit detected.
Memory error - Block 0 The control unit signals that EEPROM used to store the system parameters is dam-

6
aged.
Differential SV -Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the differential lock solenoid is shorting to a positive feed.
Differential SV -Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the differential lock solenoid is shorting to ground.
Differential SV - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the dif-
ferential lock solenoid.
Differential SV - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the dif-

7
ferential lock solenoid.
Differential SV - disconnected The control unit detects that the diff lock solenoid is not connected.
Differential SV - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the dif-
ferential lock solenoid.
Lift DOWN SV - Short-circuit Detection: lift DOWN solenoid valve is short-circuited
Lift DOWN SV - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the lift DOWN solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
Lift DOWN SV - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the lift DOWN solenoid is shorting to ground.
8

Lift DOWN SV - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power supply to the
lift ‘down’ solenoid.
Lift DOWN SV - disconnected The control unit detects that the current draw of the lift DOWN solenoid valve is exces-
sive.
Suspens. DOWN SV. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the front axle suspension ‘down’ solenoid is shorting to a
positive feed.
9

Suspens. DOWN SV. - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the front axle suspension ‘down’ solenoid is shorting to
circuit ground.
Suspens. DOWN SV. - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
axle suspension ‘DOWN’ solenoid.
Suspens. DOWN SV. - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
10

axle suspension ‘DOWN’ solenoid.

Suspens. DOWN SV. - disconnected The control unit detects that the front axle suspension ‘down’ solenoid is disconnected.

7-29

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 29 20/09/2012 19.03.30

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
Suspens. DOWN SV. - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
axle suspension ‘DOWN’ solenoid.
1

Load sensing susp. SV. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the front axle suspension lock command solenoid is short-
ing to a positive feed.
Load sensing susp. SV. - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the front axle suspension lock command solenoid is short-
circuit ing to ground.
Load sensing susp. SV. - Device out of or- The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the rear axle suspension
der lock command solenoid.
2

Load sensing susp. SV. - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the rear axle suspension
lock command solenoid.
Load sensing susp. SV. - disconnected The control unit detects that the front axle suspension lock command solenoid is dis-
connected.
Load sensing susp. SV. - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the rear axle suspension
lock command solenoid.
3

1000 PTO SV - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the PTO 1000 selector solenoid is shorting to a positive
feed
1000 PTO SV - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the PTO 1000 selector solenoid is shorting to ground
1000 PTO SV - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
1000 PTO SV - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
1000 PTO SV - disconnected The control unit detects that PTO 1000 selector solenoid is not connected
4

PTO 1000 SV - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
540E PTO SV - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the PTO 540E selector solenoid is shorting to a positive
feed
540E PTO SV - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that PTO 540E selector solenoid is shorting to ground
PTO 540E SV - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
540E PTO SV - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
5

540E PTO SV - disconnected The control unit detects that PTO 540E selector solenoid is not connected
540E PTO SV - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
Front PTO SV - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
Front PTO SV - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid is shorting to ground.
Front PTO SV - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
PTO solenoid.
Front PTO SV - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
6

PTO solenoid.
Front PTO SV - disconnected The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid is not connected.
Front PTO SV - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
PTO solenoid.
Rear PTO SV - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the front PTO solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
Rear PTO SV - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is shorting to ground.
7

Rear PTO SV - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the rear
PTO solenoid.
Rear PTO SV - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the rear
PTO solenoid.
Rear PTO SV - disconnected The control unit detects that the rear PTO solenoid is not connected.
Rear PTO SV - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the rear
8

PTO solenoid.
Lift UP SV - Short-circuit Detection: lift UP solenoid valve is short-circuited
Lift UP SV - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the lift DOWN solenoid is shorting to battery positive.
Lift UP SV - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the lift UP solenoid is shorting to ground.
Lift UP SV - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power supply to the
lift ‘up’ solenoid.
9

Lift UP SV - disconnected The control unit detects that the current draw of the lift UP solenoid valve is excessive.
Suspens. UP SV. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the front axle suspension ‘UP’ solenoid is shorting to bat-
tery positive.
Suspens. UP SV. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the front axle suspension ‘up’ solenoid is shorting to ground.
Suspens. UP SV. - Device out of order The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
axle suspension ‘UP’ solenoid.
10

Suspens. UP SV. - Failure not ident The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
axle suspension ‘up’ solenoid.
Suspens. UP SV. - disconnected The control unit detects that the front axle suspension ‘UP’ solenoid is disconnected.

7-30

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 30 20/09/2012 19.03.30

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
Suspens. UP SV. - Signal not valid The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit on the power feed to the front
axle suspension ‘up’ solenoid.

1
PTO brake - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the PTO brake solenoid is shorting to a positive feed
PTO brake - Short circuit ground The control unit detects that the PTO brake solenoid is shorting to ground
PTO brake - Device faulty The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
PTO brake - Unidentified fault The control unit detects an internal ECU fault
PTO brake - disconnected The control unit detects that the PTO brake solenoid is not connected
PTO brake - Invalid signal The control unit detects an internal ECU fault

2
LCO Valve 1 - Short-circuit The control unit detects a short-circuit in the control line of the SV solenoid
LCO Valve 1 - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the SV solenoid is shorting to a positive feed
LCO Valve 1 - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the SV solenoid is shorting to ground
LCO Valve 1 - Device out of order The ECU detects an internal current acquisition error
LCO Valve 1 - Failure not ident The ECU detects a measurement pin current when the valve is not excited
LCO Valve 1 - Out of calibration The ECU detects that the PWM stage has not been calibrated
LCO Valve 1 - disconnected The control unit detects an excessive current draw by the SV solenoid

3
LCO Valve 2 - Short-circuit The control unit detects a short-circuit in the control line of the SV solenoid
LCO Valve 2 - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the SV solenoid is shorting to a positive feed
LCO Valve 2 - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the SV solenoid is shorting to ground
LCO Valve 2 - Device out of order The ECU detects an internal current acquisition error
LCO Valve 2 - Failure not ident The ECU detects a measurement pin current when the valve is not excited
LCO Valve 2 - Out of calibration The ECU detects that the PWM stage has not been calibrated

4
LCO Valve 2 - disconnected The control unit detects an excessive current draw by the SV solenoid
Lift lever - Short-circuit high The ECU detects that the Elobau joystick is shorting to ground
Lift lever - Grounding short-circuit The ECU detects that the Elobau joystick is disconnected
Accelerator pedal - Device out of order The engine control unit has detected an error in the value of the accelerator pedal signal
(via CANBUS).
Clutch pedal - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the clutch pedal sensor is shorting to a positive feed

5
Clutch pedal - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the clutch pedal sensor is shorting to ground
Maximum height pot. - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the maximum lift height potentiometer is shorting to a posi-
tive feed
Maximum height pot. - Grounding short- The control unit detects that the maximum lift height potentiometer is shorting to ground
circuit
Depth pot. - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the depth control potentiometer is shorting to a positive

6
feed
Depth pot. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the depth control potentiometer is shorting to ground
Draft/position pot. - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the control mode potentiometer is shorting to a positive
feed
Draft/position pot. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the control mode potentiometer is shorting to ground
Down speed pot. - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the rate-of-drop potentiometer is shorting to a positive feed
Down speed pot. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the rate-of-drop potentiometer is shorting to ground

7
Wheelslip pot. - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the wheelslip control potentiometer is shorting to a positive
feed
Wheelslip pot. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the wheelslip control potentiometer is shorting to ground
Lift down button - Short circuit to ground The control unit detects that the lift ‘Down’ control button in the cab is continually pressed
Lift UP button - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the lift ‘Up’ control button in the cab is continually pressed
Man. lift DOWN button - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the lift ‘DOWN’ control buttons on the rear fenders are
8

continuously pressed.
Man. lift DOWN button - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the lift ‘UP’ control buttons on the rear fenders are continu-
ously pressed.
Lift STOP button - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the lift STOP button is continually pressed
Front PTO button. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the rear PTO button has been held down for more than 7
seconds
9

External PTO button - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the rear PTO control buttons on the rear fenders are con-
tinuously pressed.
Rear PTO button. Short circuit high The control unit detects that the rear PTO control buttons on the rear fenders are con-
tinuously pressed.
Shuttle input signal - Invalid signal The ECU detects an invalid signal on the FNR input from the armrest
Steering sensor - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the steering angle sensor is shorting to a positive feed.
10

Steering sensor - Grounding short-circuit The ECU detects that the steering angle sensor is disconnected.
Lift pos. sensor - Short circuit to +12V The control unit detects that the lift position sensor is shorting to a positive feed
Lift pos. sensor - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the lift position sensor is shorting to ground.

7-31

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 31 20/09/2012 19.03.30

 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ON-BOARD DISPLAY ALARM ALARM DESCRIPTION
Lift pos. sensor - Device malfunction The control unit detects an internal fault in the control unit in the input signal of the lift
position sensor.
1

Lift pos. sensor. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the front axle suspension position sensor is shorting to a
positive feed.
Lift pos. sensor. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the front suspension position sensor is disconnected.
Radar sensor - Device out of order The control unit detects that the radar, when installed, does not send any signals when
the travel speed exceeds 2 km/h.
RH draft sensor - Short-circuit high The control unit detects that the RH draft sensor is shorting to a positive feed.
2

RH draft sensor - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the RH draft sensor is shorting to ground.
LH draft sensor. - Short circuit high The control unit detects that the LH draft sensor is shorting to a positive feed.
LH draft sensor. - Grounding short-circuit The control unit detects that the LH draft sensor is shorting to ground.
PTO Speed sensor - Device malfunction The control unit detects a problem on the rear PTO speed sensor.
Front lift DOWN button - Grounding short- At ignition, the button is held down for more than 3 seconds or is held down continu-
circuit ously for more than 30 seconds
3

Front lift UP button - Grounding short-cir- At ignition, the button is held down for more than 3 seconds or is held down continu-
cuit ously for more than 30 seconds
Battery voltage -Signal not valid The control unit has detected that the battery voltage is lower or higher than the operat-
ing limits (lower than 10.0V or higher than 15.0V).
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-32

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 32 20/09/2012 19.03.30

 1
2
3
4
8 - WHEELS

5
6
7
8
9
10

8-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.03.31

 WHEELS
8.1 - INTRODUCTION
8.1.1 - General information regarding tyres
1

Alternative tyres
If the tractor is equipped with alternative tyres, observe the permissible load and speed specifications! For information on alternative
tyres and the relative type approval, load capacity, inflation pressure, track width, etc. always ask your nearest dealer for information,
given the very large number of different tyre types!
WARNING
2

Tyre changing operations can be dangerous and must be carried out by specialised personnel using specific equip-
ment in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturers of the tyres and wheels. Mismatched tyres
and wheels can cause damage and may cause the tyre to explode with the consequent risk of serious injury or death.
Never fit or use damaged tyres or rims.
Correct procedure for tyre fitting
3

Tyres must always be oriented in accordance with the tractor’s direction of forward
travel; you can change the track width in the case of rims welded to the flange by
shifting the wheel from left to right and vice versa, always ensuring that the “V”
cleats on the tyre tread point in the direction of forward travel, as shown in the
figure.
4
5

Fig. 433

WARNING
Only allow trained personnel to change tyres. Tyre failure is usually the result of incorrect use, incorrect inflation pres-
sure, overloading or speeds in excess of the maximum permitted speed. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer
and check the inflation pressure frequently.
6

Do not carry out any welding on the rim or flange without first removing the tyre: the heat could cause the tyre to
explode.
Do not use inflammable materials in repair operations.
Do not carry out any inspections of a tyre or hit a tyre without previously deflating it.
WARNING
7

Always check that the tyre is seated correctly on both sides. If not, deflate the tyre completely and lubricate the seat
on the rim, then re-inflate the tyre. Do not increase the pressure to help seat the tyre on the rim. Doing so can be
extremely dangerous, and can lead to serious or even fatal injury.
Adjustment of the steering angle
Check the steering angle each time that the front wheels are changed.
8

Proceed as follows:
l Apply the handbrake.
l Immobilise the tractor using the wheel chock.
l Raise the front of the tractor.
l Turn the steering wheel full lock to the left and subsequently to the right or
9

vice versa and pivot the axle to its position of maximum oscillation.
10

Fig. 434

8-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.03.32

 WHEELS
When the front axle is in the condition of maximum oscillation and the wheels are turned to the maximum steering angle, there must
be no interference between the fenders and engine hood.

1
If necessary, adjust the steering angle using adjusting bolts (1).
Inflation pressure
DANGER
Keep the tyres at the right pressure. Inflation pressure must be calculated and adjusted in relation to the load sup-
ported by the tyres and the operating conditions (consult tyre manufacturer load-pressure scales).

2
WARNING
Never inflate tyres above the pressure of 2.5 bar.

3
WARNING
When carrying out any operations on the tyres, always stand clear of the area in which the rim and flange could be pro-
pelled in the event of explosion. Always use metal safety cages or tyre retainers on the rims and flange when inflating
tyres; under some circumstances the trajectory of the rim and flange in case of explosion could change unexpectedly,
with SERIOUS DANGER OF INJURY AND DEATH.

4
Radial tyre inflation pressure
WARNING
For the tyre bead to seat correctly on the rim, the inflation pressure must never exceed 2 bar (29 psi) If the tyre is not
seated correctly on the rim, deflate it and repeat the operation. Higher inflation pressures may cause the tyre/rim to
explode. We recommend using all the appropriate safety devices when inflating tyres.

5
WARNING
A tire inflated to less than 80% of the recommended inflation pressure can be damaged internally during use and
explode on inflation to the optimal pressure WITH DANGER OF SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

IMPORTANT

6
When working on agricultural land in conditions requiring maximum grip, the rear tyre inflation pressure may be re-
duced. Check the manufacturer’s minimum specified pressure before partially deflating the tyres.

Tyres for non-driving front wheels: 2.3 bar;

Tyres for driving front wheels: 1.4 bar;
Rear tyres: 1.6 bar.

7
Conventional tyre inflation pressure
Tyres for non-driving front wheels: 3.0 bar;
16” to 30” tyres: 2.0 bar;
32” to 48” tyres: 2.2 bar.
8
IMPORTANT
If the tractor is fitted with this sort of tyres, the pressure must be checked and restored more frequently than indicated
in the service table.

8.1.2 - Punctures
9

This tractor may be equipped with two different types of tyres:

l Radial tyres (identifiable by the letter “R” in the tyre reference marking). These tyres may be of the tubeless type (marked
“Tubeless”).
l All conventional tyres have an inner tube.
If the tyre has become partially deflated stop the tractor immediately unless you are driving on an urban road, in which case stop at
10

the earliest opportunity in a lay-by before taking action to repair the tyre.

8-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.03.32

 WHEELS
DANGER
Do not attempt to continue driving on a fully deflated tyre. This action will damage the tyre irreparably and can result
1

in loss of control of the tractor.

The final decision of whether a tyre can be repaired or should be changed must be taken by a suitably trained tyre specialist.
IMPORTANT:
All tyre repair operations must be carried out at specialised workshops and by qualified personnel.
2

Ensure all the necessary tools are available before removing the tractor wheel; follow the instructions below for safe ope-
����
ration:
l Park the tractor on stable and level ground in a traffic free area and then chock the wheels and engage the parking brake.
l Position a jack under the tractor, inserting a sturdy wooden block between the jack and the ground.
3

l Operate the jack and raise the tractor enough to relieve most of the load from the wheel to be removed, fully unscrew the studs
and remove the wheel.
IMPORTANT:
Never leave the tractor unattended with the wheel removed. Do not allow unauthorised persons to approach the trac-
tor.
4

8.1.3 - Wheel nut/bolt tightening torques

To safeguard the vehicle, its operator and passenger, as well as other vehicles, it is essential to ensure that the wheel discs are
correctly fixed to the wheel hubs .
IMPORTANT:
5

After the first 10 operating hours, retighten all the wheel nuts and bolts. Every 50 operating hours all the wheel bolts
and nuts must be tightened again to the specified torque.

After adjusting the track width or changing the wheels, tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified tightening torques.
Table 63
6

DESCRIPTION CLASS TIGHTENING TORQUES TOLERANCE

Screw M 14x1.5 8.8 120 Nm (12.2 kgm) ±5%
Screw M 16x1.5 8.8 184.5 Nm (18.8 kgm) ±5%
Screw M 16x1.5 10.9 271 Nm (27.6 kgm) ±5%
Screw M 18x1.5 10.9 395 Nm (40.3 kgm) ±5%
Screw M 20x1.5 10.9 550 Nm (56 kgm) ±5%
7

Nut M 14x1.5 8 120 Nm (12.2 kgm) ±5%

Nut M 18x1.5 10 395 Nm (40.3 Kgm) ±5%
Nut M 20x1.5 10 550 Nm (56 kgm) ±5%
Nut M 22x1.5 10 745 Nm (76 kgm) ±5%
8
9
10

8-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.03.32

 WHEELS
8.2 - TYRE COMBINATIONS
8.2.1 - Permissible tyre combinations

1
These tractors can be fitted with the following transmission ratio for 4WD:
l 130-140 hp tractors: 1.3657
l 160 hp tractors: 1.3255
IMPORTANT:

2
On urban roads legal requirements stipulate that the maximum width of the tractor must not exceed X + 800 (dimen-
sion X refers to the position of the tractor’s sidelights).

WARNING
Use only the permitted tyre combinations compatible with the transmission ratio between front and rear wheels. Use
of unauthorised tyre combinations can lead to rapid tyre wear. Overloads caused by incorrect tyre combinations may

3
also damage the axles and transmission.
Permissible tyre combinations with fixed rims
Table 64
ID FRONT 130 140 160 TRACK WIDTH WIDTH (1) MM

4
REAR
1 420/85R24” X X 1820 2283
460/85R38” 1800 2304
2 480/70R24” X X 1820 2323
520/70R38” 1800 2364
3 540/65R24” X X 1920 2498
600/65R38” 1850 2471

5
4 420/85R28” X 1920 2383
520/85R38” 1900 2470
5 480/70R28” X 1920 2423
520/85R38” 1900 2470
6 480/70R28” X 1920 2423
580/70R38” 1900 2506
7 540/65R28” X 1920 2498

6
650/65R38” 1850 2527
For each market, only the homologated tyre combinations specific to the region are available.
(1) - Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.
The value may vary according to the make of tyre and the inflation pressure.

7
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.
Permissible tyre combinations for rims with Waffle track width adjustment (65 km\h)
Table 65
ID FRONT 130 140 160 TRACK WIDTH WIDTH (1) MM
REAR
1 420/85R24” X X 1828 2291
8

460/85R38” 1806 2310

2 480/70R24” X X 1726 2229
520/70R38” 1696 2238
3 480/70R28” X 1970 2473
580/70R38” 1900 2506
4 540/65R28” X 1870 2448
9

650/65R38” 1786 2463

For each market, only the homologated tyre combinations specific to the region are available.
(1) - Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track setting.
The value may vary according to the make of tyre and the inflation pressure.
ID: The numbers in the first column 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on the following pages.
10

8-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.03.33

 WHEELS
8.2.2 - Calculation of the mechanical lead
To ensure that the tractor offers the best possible performance, especially in field work, the front wheels perform a small additional
1

rotation with respect to the rear wheels; this function is defined MECHANICAL LEAD (A) and it is measured as a percentage value
between the speed of the front tyres compared to that of the rear tyres.
For correct measurement of mechanical lead, it is essential to consider:
l the mechanical ratio (RM) of the tractor in question
l the rolling circumferences of the front and rear tyres (refer to the tyre manufacturer’s catalogue)
2

All combinations of tyres present on SDFG tractors are checked and validated. The recommended mechanical lead value is between
+0.5% and +5.0%.
An incorrect lead value can result in:
l difficult engagement and disengagement of 4WD
l uneven and rapid wear of the front tyres when lead is > 5.0%
3

l uneven and rapid wear of the rear tyres when lead is < 0%
l transmission fatigue
Calculation of the mechanical lead
If different tyres are fitted in terms of brand and/or dimensions, the lead value must be checked.
The rolling circumference may be:
4

l Declared by the manufacturer

l Not declared by the manufacturer
Rolling circumference declared by the tyres manufacturer.
For the mechanical lead calculation use the formula shown alongside.
l RP = tyres ratio
5

l Rc(ant) = rolling circumference of the tyre on the front axle

l Rc(post) = rolling circumference of the tyre on the rear axle
l RM=mechanical ratio between front and rear axles
l A% = percent lead (calculated)
6

Fig. 435

Rolling circumference not declared by the tyres manufacturer.

7

IMPORTANT
After calculating the rolling circumference values, use the above formula to calculate the mechanical lead.

The rolling circumference can be measured in the field as follows:

8

1. disengage four-wheel drive (independent rotation of front and rear wheels);

2. mark the side of the tyres in correspondence with the centre of the footprint area;
3. mark the ground in correspondence with the reference marks made on the tyres;
4. move the tractor forward for at least 5 revolutions of the front and rear wheels;
5. now mark the references on the ground at the end of the established number of wheel revolutions;
6. measure the distance travelled by the front and rear wheels.
9

Calculation of Rc (ant) = distance travelled by front wheels / N° of revolutions = a / 5

Calculation of Rc (post) = distance travelled by rear wheels / N° of revolutions = a / 5
10

8-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.03.33

 WHEELS

1
2
Fig. 436

1. Distance “a” after 5 revolutions of the front wheels

3
2. Distance “p” after 5 revolutions of the rear wheels
3. Forward travel of at least 5 revolutions
Field measurement of the mechanical ratio
The measurement is performed as indicated below:
1. engage four wheel drive

4
2. mark the side of the tyres in correspondence with the centre of the footprint area
3. move the tractor forward for at least 5 revolutions of the rear wheels
4. calculate the corresponding number of complete revolutions + the fraction of a revolution of the front tyres (count, in the
direction of travel, the number of tread cleats included between the cleat at the centre of the footprint area and the cleat cor-
responding to the mark made at the start of the measurement, and divide the result by the total number of cleats)
Calculation of RM=(N° front wheel revolutions + Fraction of revolution) / N° rear wheel revolutions

5
6
7
Fig. 437

1. Initial reference to count number of revolutions travelled by rear tyres

2. Reference for calculation of fraction of revolution
3. Distance corresponding to 5 revolutions of the rear wheels
4. Forward travel of at least 5 rear wheel revolutions
8

CAUTION
SDFG always advises users to check the effective rolling circumference of the tyres in the field in order to obtain the
most accurate possible values for use in the calculation.

CAUTION
9

SDFG declines all liability relating to anomalous tyre wear or damage to the transmission caused by the use of tyre
combinations that are not expressly authorised.
10

8-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.03.33

 WHEELS
8.3 - TRACK WIDTH CALCULATION
8.3.1 - Minimum track width
1

Rear track width

Depending on the width of the tyres, it may not be possible to use all the track width settings listed here as the tyre may foul the
fender. Choose a track width setting that ensures sufficient clearance between the fender and the tyre.
Front track width
When the minimum front track width setting is used and the tractor is fitted with wide tyres, the steering angle will be very limited.
2

Check that the clearance between the engine hood and the fenders is sufficient. To do this, raise the tractor, and then raise and lower
the steered front wheel; swing the axle and check that there is no interference.
Front axle width (without wheels)
The width of the front axle is 1710 mm
3
4

Fig. 438

Rear axle width (without wheels)

5

The width of the rear axle is 1640 mm

6
7

Fig. 439

8.3.2 - Track width adjustment

Changing the track width
The track width can be adjusted to adapt the tractor for work in different crop row spacings or with different implements, e.g. plough,
etc.
8

The tractor is available with either fixed rim wheels or adjustable track wheels. Depending on the type of tyres installed you ��������
can cho-
ose from among 8 available track width combinations.
The distance from the outer edge of the area illuminated by the direction indicators, the running lights, the rear sidelights and upper
reflectors to the outer edge of the tyres must not exceed 400 mm; this rule applies internationally.
The data contained in the vehicle registration document regarding the maximum track widths for use on both urban and rural public
9

roads must be respected.

CAUTION
After any adjustment to the track width and after changing the wheels, tighten the nuts and bolts to the prescribed
tightening torques.
10

Every 50 hours of work all the bolts and nuts fixing the front and rear wheels must be tightened again to the prescribed torque values.
Before changing the wheels, immobilise the tractor so that it cannot move and use suitable supports.

8-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.03.33

 WHEELS
When working with compressed air to bed in the tyre on the rim always use an extension line of sufficient length to allow you to remain
at the side of the tyre. This operation should be carried out by specially trained personnel only.

1
WARNING
When changing wheels or carrying out maintenance and repair operations, raise and support the tractor using specific
equipment only.

Fixed track wheels

2
With fixed rims the wheels can be installed in two different configurations thus providing two alternative front track widths and two
alternative rear track widths.
IMPORTANT
To alter the track width, swap over the left and right wheels. In this the tyres’ direction of travel remains the same.

3
Assembly diagram for front wheels
The figure shows the different ways of fitting the wheels and therefore obtaining
two alternative front track widths.

4
5
Fig. 440

Assembly diagram for rear wheels

The figure shows the different ways of fitting the wheels to obtain the 2 front track
widths.

Fig. 441
6
7
WARNING
8

When it is necessary to extend the track width, avoid overloading the tractor.

Calculation of track widths obtainable with fixed rim

Table 66
9

COMBINATION 1 - FRONT 420/85R24” - REAR 460/85R38”

TRACK WIDTH 1 2
420/85R24” - 1820
460/85R38” - 1800
All measurements are given in mm
10

8-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.03.33

 WHEELS
Table 67
COMBINATION 2 - FRONT 480/70R24” - REAR 520/70R38”
1

TRACK WIDTH 1 2
480/70R24” - 1820
520/70R38” - 1800
All measurements are given in mm
Table 68
COMBINATION 3 - FRONT 540/65R24”- REAR 600/65R38”
2

TRACK WIDTH 1 2
540/65R24” - 1920
600/65R38” - 1850
All measurements are given in mm
Table 69
3

COMBINATION 4 - FRONT 420/85R28” - REAR 520/85R38”

TRACK WIDTH 1 2
420/85R28” - 1920
520/85R38” - 1900
All measurements are given in mm
Table 70
4

COMBINATION 5 - FRONT 480/70R28” - REAR 520/85R38”

TRACK WIDTH 1 2
480/70R28” - 1920
520/85R38” - 1900
All measurements are given in mm
Table 71
5

COMBINATION 6 - FRONT 480/70R28” - REAR 580/70R38”

TRACK WIDTH 1 2
480/70R28” - 1920
580/70R38” - 1900
All measurements are given in mm
6

Table 72
COMBINATION 7 - FRONT 540/65R28” - REAR 650/65R38”
TRACK WIDTH 1 2
540/65R28” - 1920
650/65R38” - 1850
All measurements are given in mm
7

IMPORTANT:
If the tractor is equipped with a hybrid air braking system, the change in track width must be made so that there is a
gap of approximately 3 cm on each side between the braking system air tanks and the inside of the wheel rim.

Variable track wheels

8

This type of adjustment is possible only when fitting wheels whose disc is screwed onto the rim.
1. Lug
2. Rim
3. Lug width
4. Disc
9
10

Fig. 442

8-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.03.34

 WHEELS
Support lug (1) on rim (2) is welded in an offset position with respect to the centreline of the drop centre (and hence also with respect
to the tyre).

1
During fitting, the bracket can be mounted in contact with wheel (4) on either side, thus making it possible to achieve two alternative
track widths.
Two more track widths can be achieved by inverting rim (2) with respect to disc (1).
This means that there are 4 possible ways in which rim (2) can be assembled on disc (4).
If you then fit the assembled rim onto the hub (or rear half shaft) with the bell facing inwards or outwards you can achieve 8 different

2
configurations for the distance between the centreline of the wheel and the contact surface of the rim on the wheel hub or half shaft
flange. There are therefore 8 possible track widths.
Disc-rim assembly diagram for front wheels
The figure shows the 8 different ways of fitting the disc to the rim to obtain 8 different front track widths.

3
4
5
Fig. 443
Disc-rim assembly diagram for rear wheels
The figure shows the 8 different ways of fitting the disc to the rim to obtain 8 different front track widths.

6
7
8

Fig. 444

WARNING
When it is necessary to extend the track width, avoid overloading the tractor.
9

Calculation of track widths obtainable with adjustable rims

Table 73
COMBINATION 1 FRONT 420/85R24” REAR 460/85R38”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
10

420/85R24” - - - - - 1828 2010 2112

460/85R38” - - - - - 1806 1900 2010
All measurements are given in mm

8-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.03.34

 WHEELS
Table 74
COMBINATION 2 FRONT 480/70R24” REAR 520/70R38”
1

TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
480/70R24” - - - - 1726 1828 2010 2112
520/70R38” - - - - 1696 1806 1900 2010
All measurements are given in mm
Table 75
2

COMBINATION 3 FRONT 480/70R28” REAR 580/70R38”

TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
480/70R28” - - - - - - 1970 2074
580/70R38” - - - - - - 1900 2010
All measurements are given in mm
3

Table 76
COMBINATION 4 FRONT 540/65R28” REAR 650/65R38”
TRACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIDTH
540/65R28” - - - - - 1870 1970 2074
650/65R38” - - - - - 1786 1920 2030
4

All measurements are given in mm

IMPORTANT:
If the tractor is equipped with a hybrid air braking system, the change in track width must be made so that there is a
gap of approximately 3 cm on each side between the braking system air tanks and the inside of the wheel rim.
5

8.3.3 - Adjustment of steering front fenders

Adjust the fender on the basis of track width setting, so that the fender is positioned centrally over the tyre.
The distance between fender and tyre must be approximately 60 mm.
The front edge of the fender must be vertical over the centre of the tyre.
This tractor can be equipped with front fenders of the following sizes:
6

l 420 mm wide
l 470 mm wide
l 540 mm wide
The fender has the following adjustments:
longitudinal adjustment;
7

l
l height adjustment;
l Fender cover adjustment.
IMPORTANT:
After adjusting the fenders, check that there is no interference between the fenders and the tractor side panels in all
conditions of axle oscillation.
8
9
10

8-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.03.34

 WHEELS
Fender longitudinal adjustment
Loosen fixing screw (1) to release bracket (2).

1
Move the bracket to a distance of approximately 60 mm from the fender.
Retighten the fixing screw.

2
Fig. 445

3
Fender height adjustment
Loosen fixing screw (1) to release bracket (2).
Adjust the bracket height.
Retighten the fixing screw.

4
5
Fig. 446

Fender cover adjustment

Loosen fixing nut (1) to release the fender cover (2).
Adjust the cover position.

6
Retighten the fixing nut.

Fig. 447 7
8.3.4 - Adjustment of fixed front fenders
8
Adjust the fender on the basis of track width setting, so that the fender is positioned centrally over the tyre.
The distance between fender and tyre must be approximately 60 mm.
The front edge of the fender must be vertical over the centre of the tyre.
This tractor can be equipped with front fenders of the following sizes:
l 320 mm wide
9

l 420 mm wide
l 470 mm wide
l 540 mm wide
The fender has the following adjustments:
l longitudinal adjustment;
10

l height adjustment;
l Fender cover adjustment.

8-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.03.35

 WHEELS
IMPORTANT:
After adjusting the fenders, check that there is no interference between the fenders and the tractor side panels in all
1

conditions of axle oscillation

Fender longitudinal adjustment

Loosen fixing screw (1) to release bracket (2).
Move the bracket to obtain the required distance between the fender and the tyre
2

using slots (3)

Retighten the fixing screw.
3

Fig. 448

Fender height adjustment

4

Loosen fixing screw (1) to release bracket (2).

Adjust the bracket height.
Retighten the fixing screw.
5

Fig. 449
6

Fender cover adjustment

Loosen fixing nuts (1) to release the fender cover (2).
Adjust the cover position.
Retighten the fixing nut.
7
8

Fig. 450
9
10

8-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.03.35

 WHEELS
8.4 - BALLASTING
8.4.1 - Handling ballast weights

1
DANGER
We recommend using all the appropriate safety devices when handling the ballast weights.

In compliance with the requirements of statutory legislation, the load that can be lifted by a person is 30 kg for men and 20 kg for

2
women.
The tractor can be equipped with different types of ballast:
l Cast iron “suitcase” blocks;
l Cast iron blocks fixed with screws;
l Intermediate plates;
Monolithic blocks;

3
l
l Metal discs for wheels;
Fitting methods for the various types of ballast weights.
Cast iron “suitcase” blocks
This type of ballast can be installed by one operator. To install the ballasts, place them on the front support.

4
DANGER
Check the weight of each block. If the weight exceeds the maximum load to be lifted (30 kg for men and 20 kg for
women) use suitable mechanical lifting devices.

Cast iron blocks fixed with screws

This type of ballast must be installed by at least two operators, one lifting and keeping the blocks in position, the other fixing the

5
blocks with the screws.
DANGER
Check the weight of each block. If the weight exceeds the maximum load to be lifted (30 kg for men and 20 kg for
women) use suitable mechanical lifting devices.

6
Intermediate plates
Intermediate plates must be installed by at least two operators, one lifting and keeping the plate in position, the other fixing the plate
with the screws.
DANGER

7
Check the weight of the intermediate plates. If the weight exceeds the maximum load to be lifted (30 kg for men and
20 kg for women) use suitable mechanical lifting devices.

Monolithic blocks
The installation of the single block must be carried out by at least two operators, proceeding as shown below:
lower the front lift arms;
8
l
l drive the tractor slowly forward to the block;
l raise the lift arms slowly until the hooks engage the lateral fixing pins;
l connect the top link to the monolithic block upper pin.
IMPORTANT:
To remove the block, perform the above procedure in reverse order.
9
10

8-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.03.35

 WHEELS
Metal discs for wheels
Metal discs must be installed by at least two operators, one lifting and keeping the discs in position, the other fixing the discs with
1

the screws.
DANGER
Check the weight of each block. If the weight exceeds the maximum load to be lifted (30 kg for men and 20 kg for
women) use suitable mechanical lifting devices.

8.4.2 - Ballast for tractor

2

Front ballast
WARNING
An unbalanced tractor can overturn and cause injury and death. Make sure that the front ballast support, the ballast
weights, and the weights and the ballast on the wheels all comply with the specifications o f the manufacturer. DO
3

NOT add ballast to compensate for an overloaded tractor; reduce the load instead. Always keep all parts of your body
within the confines of the driving position when operating the tractor.
The front ballast can be supplied on request in 2 different versions:
l ballast support with cast-iron blocks
l 600 kg or 1000 kg one-piece ballast block (tractors with front lift only).
4

Rear ballast
The rear ballast can be supplied on request:
l One-piece ballast block
Ballast for wheels
5

The ballast for wheels can only be of one type:

l introduction of water into the tyres

8.4.3 - Front ballast with cast-iron blocks

This type of ballast is comprised of a ballast support, two types of intermediate plates and cast-iron blocks.
6

The ballast support must be fixed directly to the tractor.

The support weight is 330 kg.
1. Ballast support;
2. Fixing bolts
7

Fig. 451
8

The intermediate plate (330 kg) is installed on the ballast support.

The support weight is 330 kg.
1. Intermediate plate;
2. Fixing bolts;
3. Towing pin.
9
10

Fig. 452

8-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.03.36

 WHEELS
The intermediate plate (100 kg) is installed on the ballast support.
The support weight is 100 kg.

1
1. Intermediate plate;
2. Fixing bolts;
3. Towing pin.

2
Fig. 453

The cast-iron blocks can be installed on the ballast support and on the intermedi-
ate plate.

3
A maximum of 6 cast-iron blocks with the 100 kg intermediate plate or a 10 blocks
with the 330 kg intermediate plate can be fitted. Each block weighs 40 kg.
1. Ballast weights;
2. Fixing bolt;

4
Fig. 454

The possible ballast configurations are listed here:

5
l Ballast support - Total 330 kg
l Ballast support weighing 330 kg, 10 ballast blocks - Total 730 kg
l Ballast support, 100 kg intermediate plate - Total 430 kg
l Ballast support, 330 kg intermediate plate - Total 660 kg
l Ballast support, 100 kg intermediate plate, 6 ballast blocks - Total 670 kg
l Ballast support, 330 kg intermediate plate, 10 ballast blocks - Total 1060 kg

6
8.4.4 - Front one-piece ballast block
IMPORTANT
During tractor operation, it is recommended that the ballast weight be set at the highest position (hydraulic cylinders
fully retracted) so as to maintain the centre of gravity of the tractor unchanged and ensure optimum grip of the wheels

7
on the ground.
The ballast block can be of 3 different types:
l 600 kg block
l 1000 kg concrete block
l 1000 kg cast-iron block
8
This type of ballast is composed of a block that must be fitted to the front 3-point linkage.
600 kg one-piece block
1
2
1. One-piece ballast block
2. Hitching point on the top link of the front lift
3. Hitching point on the link arms of the front lift
4. Emergency tow pin
9

600 k
g
4

3
10

Fig. 455

8-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.03.37

 WHEELS
1000 kg one-piece concrete block
1. One-piece ballast block
1

2. Hitching point on the top link of the front lift

3. Hitching point on the link arms of the front lift
4. Emergency tow pin
2

Fig. 456

1000 kg one-piece cast-iron block

3

1. One-piece ballast block

2. Hitching point on the top link of the front lift
3. Safety pin
4. Hitching point on the link arms of the front lift
5. Emergency tow pin
4

Fig. 457

8.4.5 - Ballast for wheels with water-filled tyres

5

This type of ballast consists of introducing water into the tyres.

IMPORTANT
The amount of liquid in the tyre must not exceed 75% of the total tyre volume.
6

To prevent the water from freezing and damaging the tyres, use additives to obtain a neutralised solution of calcium chloride.
To prepare the solution, proceed as follows:
l fill a container with the quantity of water that you wish to introduce into the tyres;
l slowly pour in calcium chloride (approx. 30 kg to every 100 litres of water), stirring continuously;
l after filling the tyres, wash all the equipment used with plenty of clean water.
7

IMPORTANT
Do not pour water into concentrated calcium chloride as this may cause a violent chemical reaction.

CAUTION
8

When ballasting the tractor, load the front axle so as to ensure safe steering (the load on the front axle must not be
less than 20% of the tractor weight)

WARNING
Remember that steering, braking and performance in general will be greatly influenced by any implements/trailers
9

attached or ballast applied to the tractor.

IMPORTANT
The antifreeze solution cannot be used at temperatures below -20°C.
10

8-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.03.38

 WHEELS
Fill the tyres with the solution by means of the specific adaptor for water injection
and extraction.

1
2
Fig. 458

Filling the tyres with water.

3
To introduce water into the tyre, proceed as follows:
l Raise the tractor from the ground.
l Turn the wheel to bring the valve to the highest position.
l Unscrew the inner part of the valve.
l Fit the special adaptor for adding water ballast to the valve.
l Connect the water hose and fill until the water starts to come out of the

4
breather at the bottom of the valve.
l Remove the adapter and screw in the inner part of the valve.
l Fill the tyre with air to the specified pressure.
1. AIR
2. WATER
Fig. 459

5
CAUTION
While mixing the antifreeze solution and filling the tyres with liquid ballast, it is essential to wear safety goggles and
protective clothing. Pour the calcium chloride into the water and not vice versa.

Draining water from the tyre

6
To drain water from the tyre, proceed as follows:
l Raise the tractor from the ground.
l Turn the wheel to bring the valve to the lowest position.
l Unscrew the inner part of the valve and allow the water drain out.
l Screw the special adaptor into the valve.

7
l Inflate the tyre.
l The pressure will force all remaining water out through the breather.
l Unscrew the special adapter and screw in the inner part of the valve.
l Fill the tyre with air to the specified pressure.
1. AIR
2. WATER
8

Fig. 460
9
10

8-19

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 19 20/09/2012 19.03.38

 WHEELS
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

8-20

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 20 20/09/2012 19.03.38

 1
2
3
4
9 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5
6
7
8
9
10

9-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.03.39

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.1 - BATTERY
9.1.1 - Battery
1

The battery is of the “Low Maintenance” type and therefore, under normal conditions of use, the electrolyte does not need topping
up. Periodic checks are anyhow necessary to see that the level of electrolyte is between the MIN and MAX reference marks on the
battery.
At the start of the winter season, check the battery charge level. Re-charge if necessary.
WARNING
2

The terminals and some components of the battery contain lead or lead compounds. In some countries the legislation
considers these substances as a cause of cancer, birth defects and damage to the reproductive system. Wash your
hands after handling the battery.
Accessing the battery
3

To access the battery on the tractor RH side behind the cab access steps,
proceed as follows:
l remove the lock screws
l remove cover (1)
4

Fig. 461
5

WARNING
Only use 12 volt chargers to charge the battery.

Removing and refitting the battery

6

WARNING
Wear safety goggles when charging or topping up the battery.

CAUTION
7

Always disconnect the battery before carrying out any work on the electrical system. Always disconnect the battery
and all the electronic control units before carrying out any welding on the tractor or any of the equipment connected
to the tractor.
DANGER
8

The gases given off by the battery are highly explosive. Never cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery.
Batteries must be stored and charged in a well-ventilated environment. Take care that the acid electrolyte does not
come into contact with your skin or clothes.
9
10

9-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.03.39

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To remove the battery, proceed as follows:
l loosen screws (1) sufficiently to remove bracket (2) securing the battery;

1
l partially extract the battery;
l first, disconnect the earth lead from the negative terminal;
l disconnect the positive lead from the positive terminal;
l remove the battery from the support.

To refit the battery, proceed as follows:

2
l fit the battery in the support;
l connect the positive lead to the positive terminal;
l connect the earth lead to the negative terminal;
Fig. 462
l fit battery retaining bracket (2) and retighten screw (1).

Battery disconnect switch

3
The function of the battery disconnect switch is to disconnect the power supply to the electrical system by interrupting
the connection to the battery, with the following advantages for the safety and operation of the vehicle:
l protects the electrical system against short circuit;
l reduces battery self-discharge during extended periods of non-use of the tractor;
l enables maintenance and repair work to be carried out in conditions of safety.

4
Turn the knob to “OFF” to disconnect the battery and back to “ON” to resume
normal operation.
The battery disconnect (1) is located on the right-hand side of the tractor behind
the cab access steps.

5
Fig. 463

6
Putting the battery disconnect in safety condition
The battery disconnect knob may be removed for safety purposes.
Removal of the knob
l Turn the knob to “OFF” position;

7
l Press the knob in and continue to turn it counter-clockwise as far as it will go.
l Remove the knob.
Refitting the knob
l Refit the knob.
l Push in the knob and turn it clockwise, positioning it at “OFF”.
8
9
10

9-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.03.39

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.2 - CAB FUSE BOX
9.2.1 - Fuse box
1

The fuse box can be accessed via the cover (1) on the right of the operator’s seat.
Always disconnect the power supply before checking the fuse box or relays. If
necessary, consult the fuse box electrical diagram under cover (2) located under
the fuse box.
2
3

Fig. 464

Before changing a blown fuse:

l disconnect the power supply
l eliminate the fault that caused the fuse to blow
l replace the blown fuse.
4

Fuse box diagram

5
6
7
8

Fig. 465 - Fuse box diagram

1. Fuse area
2. Relay area
9
10

9-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.03.40

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Fuses and relays on the engine
To access the fuses and relays located on the left-hand side of the engine, remove

1
the cover (1) after unscrewing the retaining screws (2).

2
Fig. 466

3
The following units are located on the left-hand side of the engine:
1. Preheating control unit relay
2. Starter motor relay
3. Starter motor fuse
4. Preheating control unit fuse

4
Fig. 467

5
9.2.2 - Key to fuse symbols in fuseholder box
Key to fuse symbols
General electronics

6
Engine control unit

7
Sidelights
8

Full beam headlights

9
10

9-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.03.40

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Warning beacon
1

Interior courtesy light, door switch and radio system

2

Fuse + 30 HLHP
3

+ 30 terminal fuse for ignition

4
5

Gearbox control unit

6

Front worklights on cab roof

7

Worklights or repeater headlights

8

Hazard warning system

9

Front worklights on engine hood

10

9-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.03.40

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Engine control unit

1
12V trailer socket and cigar lighter

2
Running lights

3
Trailer sidelights

4
5
Rear sidelights

6
Low-beam headlights

7
Air conditioning compressor

Gearbox control unit

9

Gearbox sensor
10

9-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.03.40

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Range selector lever
1

Shuttle lever and NAB sensor

2

Rear worklights on cab roof

3

Rear worklights on cab roof

4
5

12V trailer socket

6

R3 and R4 relays
7

Tractor and trailer brake lights

8

General electronics
9

12V trailer socket

10

9-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.03.41

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Rear window wiper

1
Windscreen wiper and horn

2
Radio

3
Trailer brakes pressure

4
5
Heater fan

6
Direction indicators

7
Front loader

Control electronics
9

Seat compressor
10

9-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.03.41

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Engine hood low beam/high beam headlights switch
1

Control electronics
2

Switch for rear worklights on cab roof

3

Key to relay symbols

4

Engine control unit +30 relay

5

Low-beam headlight, repeater headlights

6

Low-beam headlight
7

Full beam headlights

8

Sidelights
9
10

9-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.03.41

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Brake light

1
Rear worklights on cab roof

2
Relay for terminal 15, ignition on

3
Relay for terminal 15, ignition on

4
5
Worklights on engine hood

6
Front worklights on cab roof

7
Colour of fuse box wires
Table 77
M - brown V - green Z - purple
N - black S - pink R - red
C - orange A - light blue B - white
8

L - blue G - yellow H - grey

9
10

9-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.03.41

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.3 - LIGHTS FOR ROAD USE
9.3.1 - Lights for road use
1

IMPORTANT:
Clean the outside of the lights with water or specific commercial products.

IMPORTANT
2

Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

The tractor is equipped with the following lights for road use:
l 2 front lights (low and high beam headlights) on the front panel
3

l 2 light clusters composed of side lights and direction indicators at the sides
l 2 side-mounted repeater headlights
l 2 light clusters at the rear above the fenders
CAUTION
When driving at night on public roads with a front-mounted implement, the headlights will not give sufficient illumina-
4

tion (as they will be partially obscured by the implement) and it is therefore necessary to use the auxiliary driving lights.

Note:
Switch off the front and rear lights before cleaning them.
5

Front lights
The front lights for road use are equipped with bulbs type H4 12V 55/60W, so they
can provide both field and depth lighting.
1. low and high beam headlights
6
7

Fig. 468

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
8
9
10

9-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.03.42

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l lift the engine hood;

1
l extract the connector (1) of the bulb;
l remove the protective rubber cap (2);
l slightly rotate spring clip (3) that holds bulb (4) in its seat and detach it from
reflector (5);
l change the bulb, inserting the new one by making the positioning teeth tally
with the notches in the crown of the reflector (5);

2
l turn the spring clip (3) to lock it;
l replace the rubber cap (2), making sure that it fits snugly against the edge
of the reflector;
l insert the connector (1) on the terminals of the bulb; Fig. 469
l close the hood.

IMPORTANT

3
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

Side lights and side direction indicators

The side lights and direction indicators are composed of two separate

4
bulbs enclosed in a single container on each side of the tractor:
l side light (1) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-R19/5 12V 5W
l direction indicator (2) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W

5
Fig. 470

6
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

7
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) fixing the trans-
parent yellow-white plate (2);
l gently remove the transparent plate to access the bulbs;
l lightly press on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn it anti-
clockwise as far as it will go;
8

l change the bulb by inserting it fully in with a light pressure and turning it
clockwise until it stops;
l fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.

Fig. 471
9

IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.
10

9-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.03.42

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Repeater headlights
The repeater headlights for road travel are composed of two separate bulbs
1

enclosed in a single cluster on each side of the tractor:

l sidelight equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-T8/4 12V 4W
l low beam headlight equipped with bulb type H4 12V 55/60W
2

Fig. 472
3

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
4

To access the bulbs, proceed as follows:

l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove two screws (1) fixing reflector (2);
l remove the reflector to access the bulbs;
l extract the connector (1) of the bulb;
5

Fig. 473
6

To replace the high beam headlight bulb proceed as follows:

l extract the connector (1) of the bulb;
l remove the protective rubber cap (2);
l slightly rotate the spring clip (3) that holds the bulb (4) in its seat and detach
it from the reflector;
7

l change the bulb, inserting the new one by making the positioning teeth tally
with the notches in the crown of the reflector (5);
l turn the spring clip (3) to lock it;
l replace the rubber cap (2), making sure that it fits snugly against the edge
of the reflector;
l insert the connector (1) on the terminals of the bulb;
8

Fig. 474

To replace the sidelight proceed as follows:

l remove bulbholder (1);
l lightly press on the bulb to be changed (2) and at the same time turn it anti-
clockwise as far as it will go;
9

l change the bulb by inserting it fully in with a light pressure and turning it
clockwise until it stops;
l refit the bulbholder .
10

Fig. 475

9-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.03.43

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

1
Rear lights
The rear lights are composed of two separate bulbs enclosed in a single
container on each fender of the tractor:

2
l side light - brake light (1) indicating tractor braking equipped with bulb type
DIN 72601-P25-2 12V 21W
l direction indicator (2) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W

3
Fig. 476

Bulb replacement

4
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

5
l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) fixing the trans-
parent yellow-red plate (2);
l gently remove the transparent plate to access the bulbs;
l lightly press on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn it anti-
clockwise as far as it will go;
l change the bulb by inserting it fully in with a light pressure and turning it
clockwise until it stops;

6
l fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.

Fig. 477

9.3.2 - Lights for road use, North America

7
IMPORTANT:
Clean the exterior of the lights with water or specific commercial products.

IMPORTANT
8

Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

The tractor is equipped with the following lights for road use:
l 2 front lights (low and high beam headlights) on the front panel
9

l 2 light clusters composed of direction indicators at the sides

l 2 side-mounted repeater headlights
l 2 light clusters at the rear above the fenders
CAUTION
When driving at night on public roads with a front-mounted implement, the headlights will not give sufficient illumina-
10

tion (as they will be partially obscured by the implement) and it is therefore necessary to use the auxiliary driving lights.

9-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.03.43

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Note:
Switch off the front and rear lights before cleaning them.
1

IMPORTANT
To replace the headlight and repeater headlight bulbs, refer to “Lights for road use”.
2

Side direction indicators

The direction indicators are composed of a bulb enclosed in a housing on
each side of the tractor:
l bulb type DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W
3
4

Fig. 478

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
5

Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) securing the
transparent orange plate (2);
6

l gently remove the transparent plate to access the bulbs;

l lightly press down on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn
it anti-clockwise as far as it will go;
l fit the new bulb by inserting it fully in with light pressure and turning it clock-
wise until it stops;
l fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.
7

Fig. 479

IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.
8
9
10

9-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.03.44

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Rear lights
The rear lights are composed of two separate clusters on each fender of

1
the tractor:
l brake light (STOP) (2) indicating tractor braking equipped with bulb type
DIN 72601-P25-2 12V 21W
l direction indicator (1) equipped with bulb type DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W
l reflector

2
Fig. 480

3
Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

4
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws (1) securing the trans-
parent plate (2);
l Without using excessive force, remove the lens to access the bulb;
l lightly press down on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn
it anti-clockwise as far as it will go;

5
l fit the new bulb by inserting it fully in with light pressure and turning it clock-
wise until it stops;
l fit the transparent plate back on and secure it with the two screws.

Fig. 481

6
9.3.3 - Headlight alignment
WARNING
The figure is applicable to countries in which vehicles circulate on the right of the road, in the case of countries with
left-hand traffic circulation the dark area on the wall must be symmetrical to the situation shown in the figure (i.e. the

7
points of the dark area entering the light area must always be facing the kerb).
To adjust the headlight aim, the tractor, in normal road transport condition, with the tyres inflated to the recommended pressures and
the front wheels in the straight-ahead position, must be parked on level ground at a distance of 10 m from a vertical wall with the low
beam headlights switched on.
8
9
10

9-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.03.44

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5

Fig. 482 - Diagram showing headlight alignment for driving on public roads
l 1 - points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights
l A - distance between headlights
l H - height of headlights
6

l h - distance from beam centre with respect to horizontal axis

l x - distance from headlights to wall
Turn the adjuster screws indicated by the arrows in the figure to move the beam in a vertical or horizontal direction.
WARNING
In order to determine the points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights, bring the tractor up to the
7

wall with the dipped headlights on, mark the centres (1) on the wall and then reverse to a distance of 10 m from the
wall.
Headlight horizontal adjustment
With the headlights switched on, the centres of the beams should be apart the distance A indicated in the figure.
Headlight vertical adjustment
8

With the headlights on, the lines delimiting the light and dark zones on the wall should be 10 cm apart as shown in the figure by (h).
9.3.4 - Adjusting the repeater headlights
WARNING
The figure is applicable to countries in which vehicles circulate on the right of the road, in the case of countries with
9

left-hand traffic circulation the dark area on the wall must be symmetrical to the situation shown in the figure (i.e. the
points of the dark area entering the light area must always be facing the kerb).
To adjust the headlight aim, the tractor, in normal road transport condition, with the tyres inflated to the recommended pressures and
the front wheels in the straight-ahead position, must be parked on level ground at a distance of 10 m from a vertical wall with the low
beam headlights switched on.
10

9-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.03.45

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 483 - Diagram showing repeater lights alignment
l A - distance between headlights
l H = Height of the centres of the lights from the ground
l h = Height of the line delimiting the light and dark zones (2/3 of height H)

6
l x - distance from headlights to wall
To adjust the beam angle adjust the repeater lights, which feature vertical and horizontal adjustment facilities.
WARNING
In order to determine the points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights, bring the tractor up to the
wall with the dipped headlights on, mark the centres on the wall and then reverse to a distance of 10 m from the wall.

7
Headlight horizontal adjustment
With the headlights switched on, the centres of the beams should be apart the distance A indicated in the figure.
Headlight vertical adjustment
With the headlights on, the lines delimiting the light and dark zones on the wall should be 10 cm apart as shown in the figure by (h).
8
9
10

9-19

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 19 20/09/2012 19.03.45

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.4 - WORKLIGHTS
9.4.1 - Worklights
1

IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

The tractor is equipped with the following worklights:

2

l 2 front worklights at the top of the cab

l 2 rear worklights at the top of the cab
l 2 rear worklights located at bottom of cab
l 2 worklights on the front grille panel
Front worklights at the top of the cab
3

The front worklights at the top of the cab are equipped with bulbs type DIN 72601-
H3 12V 55W.
4

Fig. 484
5

Rear worklights at the top of the cab

The rear worklights at the top of the cab are equipped with bulbs type DIN 72601-
H3 12V 55W.
6
7

Fig. 485

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
8

Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

This procedure for changing the bulbs applies to the following worklights:
l front worklights at the top of the cab
rear worklights at the top of the cab
9

l
10

9-20

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 20 20/09/2012 19.03.45

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l carefully clean the outside of the light unit to avoid the risk of dirt getting on

1
the reflector during bulb replacement;
l using a screwdriver, unscrew the two side screws (1) of the protective cap
(2) to reach the bulb;
l extract the connector (3) of the bulb;
l slightly rotate the spring clip (4) that holds the bulb (5) in its seat and detach
it from the reflector, disconnect also the lead connected directly to the bulb;

2
l change the bulb, inserting the new one by making the positioning teeth
tally with the notches in the crown of the reflector (6), connect the lead con-
nected to the bulb;
l turn the spring clip (4) to lock it; Fig. 486
l insert the connector (3) on the terminals of the bulb;
l fit the protective cap back on and secure it with the two screws.

3
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

Rear worklights located at the bottom of the cab

4
The rear worklights at the bottom of the cab are equipped with bulbs type DIN
72601-H3 12V 55W.

5
6
Fig. 487

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.

7
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
l carefully clean the outside of the light unit to avoid the risk of dirt getting on
the reflector during bulb replacement;
l using a screwdriver, unscrew the two side screws (1) of the protective cap
(2) to reach the bulb;
8

l extract the connector (3) of the bulb;

l slightly rotate the spring clip (4) that holds the bulb (5) in its seat and detach
it from the reflector, disconnect also the lead connected directly to the bulb;
l change the bulb, inserting the new one by making the positioning teeth
tally with the notches in the crown of the reflector (6), connect the lead con-
nected to the bulb;
9

l turn the spring clip (4) to lock it; Fig. 487

l insert the connector (3) on the terminals of the bulb;
l fit the protective cap back on and secure it with the two screws.

IMPORTANT
10

Avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no foreign material gets inside the reflector.

9-21

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 21 20/09/2012 19.03.46

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Worklights on the front grille
The worklights (1) on the front panel are equipped with bulbs type ECE 37 HB3
1

12V 55W.
2

Fig. 488
3

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
4

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

l lift the engine hood;
l remove fixing screws (1);
l remove bulbholder (2) from cover (3);
l change bulb (4);
l refit bulbholder (2) and fix retaining screws (1);
5

l close the hood.

Fig. 489
6

9.4.2 - Interior courtesy light

The tractor is equipped with the following interior courtesy lights:
l Courtesy light
l Controls illumination light
7

Replacing the courtesy light bulb

1. The courtesy light is equipped with a bulb type 12V 10W
8
9

Fig. 490
2. IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
10

9-22

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 22 20/09/2012 19.03.46

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
3. Remove the body of the light fitting (1) by pulling it outwards.

1
2
Fig. 491
4. Change the bulb (2).

3
4
Fig. 492
5. Reposition the light fitting (3) in its seating.

5
6
Fig. 493

7
8
9
10

9-23

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 23 20/09/2012 19.03.46

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Controls illumination light
This light is equipped with a bulb type DIN 72601 -TB/4 12V 4W
1
2

Fig. 494
3

Bulb replacement
IMPORTANT:
Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specification as those originally fitted.
4

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

l using a screwdriver, loosen and remove the two screws (1) fixing plate (2);
l to access the bulb remove plate (2) without applying excessive force;
5

Fig. 495
6

l lightly press down on the bulb to be changed (3) and at the same time turn
it anti-clockwise as far as it will go;
l fit the new bulb by inserting it fully in with light pressure and turning it clock-
wise until it stops;
l refit the plate on and secure it with two screws (1).
7
8

Fig. 495
9
10

9-24

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 24 20/09/2012 19.03.47

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.5 - ACCESSORIES
9.5.1 - Power outlet sockets - diagnosis

1
The tractor is equipped with different power outlet sockets or diagnosis sockets.
Sockets at the rear of the tractor on the hydraulic control valves
1. Trailer power outlet socket;
2. Supplementary socket for external equipment.

2
3
Fig. 496

Sockets in the cab to the driver’s RH side, near the fusebox

1. Outlet socket;
2. ISO 11786 diagnostic data transmission socket;

4
3. External implement power outlet socket.

5
Fig. 497

Sockets located at the front of the tractor

1. Power outlet socket for implements.

Fig. 498 6
7
Trailer power outlet socket, implement power outlet socket
8
Standard version socket
The trailer power outlet is provided on a 7-pin socket.
Explanations of each pin are given below:
1. LH direction indicator
2. Not utilised
9

3. Ground
4. RH direction indicator
5. RH tail light and number plate light
6. Brake light
7. LH tail light
10

Fig. 499

9-25

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 25 20/09/2012 19.03.47

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
North America version socket
The trailer power outlet is provided on a 7-pin socket.
1

Explanations of each pin are given below:

1. Ground
2. Worklights
3. LH rear light and rear direction indicator
4. Brake light
5. RH rear light and rear direction indicator
2

6. Rear sidelight
7. Outlet socket

Fig. 499
3

Supplementary socket for external equipment

The supplementary power outlet socket can be used to connect hand-held lamps,
etc.
4
5

Fig. 500

Power outlet socket in the cab

Explanations of each pin are given below:
6

1. Not utilised
2. Ground
3. 12V power supply, max. 25A
7

Fig. 501

ISO 11786 diagnostic data transmission socket

8

Explanations of each pin are given below:

1. Actual speed (only with wheel sensor) 130 pulse/m
2. Theoretical speed 130 pulse/m
3. PTO speed 6 pulse/rev
4. 3-point linkage lift signal (on/off)
9

5. 3-point linkage position signal

6. 12V outlet socket
7. Ground
10

Fig. 502

9-26

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 26 20/09/2012 19.03.47

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
External implement power outlet socket
Explanations of each pin are given below:

1
1. Ground
2. Signal from external sensor
3. Power supply
4. Not utilised

2
Fig. 503

3
9.5.2 - On-board radar
DANGER
To avoid damage to your sight, do not expose your eyes in the radar emission area when the radar is in operation.
Carry out maintenance of the radar sensor only when the radar is switched off.

4
WARNING
The radar is automatically activated when the key is inserted in the ignition. Turn the starter key to stop position in
order to deactivate the radar before performing any work within its range of action.

The on-board radar emits low intensity microwaves and measures the transmission and return frequency.
The frequency of the reflected signal will vary according to the speed of impact with the obstacle (DOPPLER effect) and the nature

5
and condition of the ground and is thus able to convey specific signals to the electronic control unit.
On the basis of the data received from the radar, the computer determines the true ground speed of the tractor.
The radar is located on the right-hand side of the tractor near the battery.

Fig. 504 6
7
To be sure of obtaining accurate readings from the radar, keep the cover clean at
all times.
8
9

Fig. 505
10

9-27

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 27 20/09/2012 19.03.48

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Note:
Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the radar sensor; use water only.
1

9.5.3 - Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment

The tractor is equipped with electronic parts and components whose functioning may be disturbed by electromagnetic emissions from
other equipment. These emissions may put people in danger if the following safety guidelines are not followed.
2

In the case of installation of additional electrical or electronic components that are connected to the tractor’s electrical system, the
user is responsible for checking that the installation does not release emissions which interfere with the operation of the existing
electronic or other components of the tractor.
This is particularly a problem with the following types of equipment:
l Radio
CB radio receiver
3

l
l Mobile telephone (ETACS, GSM, etc.)
In particular, it is important to check that any supplementary electrical or electronic devices installed comply with the current directives
75/322 MOD 2001/3 and that they bear the CE marking.
As regards the installation of additional mobile telecommunications systems (e.g.: radio, telephone), the following sup-
����
plementary indications must be observed:
4

l Install only equipment licensed in conformance with the applicable regulations in your country (e.g: the BZT licence in Ger-
many).
l Ensure that the device/s are firmly fixed.
l The use of portable or mobile equipment inside the vehicle is permitted only if it is connected to an antenna firmly secured to
the outside of the vehicle.
Radio transmission components must be installed separately from the vehicle’s electronic components.
5

The antenna must be fitted in a professional manner and there must be a good connection between the antenna and the vehicle
earthing point. The wiring, the installation and the maximum current draw must conform to the applicable requirements.
6
7
8
9
10

9-28

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 28 20/09/2012 19.03.48

 1
2
3
4
10 - TECHNICAL DATA

5
6
7
8
9
10

10-1

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.03.49

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Fig. 506
9

The data given in the declaration of conformity are listed below:

1. Manufacturer
2. Type of tractor
3. Tractor model
4. Tractor serial number
10

10-2

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.03.49

 TECHNICAL DATA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Fig. 507
The data given in the declaration of conformity are listed below:
9

1. Manufacturer
2. Type of tractor
3. Tractor model
4. Tractor serial number
10

10-3

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.03.49

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.2 - TECHNICAL DATA OF THE TRACTOR
10.2.1 - Technical data
1

X - Standard O - Optional
Table 78 - Technical data
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001
2

01 - ENGINE
Engine model Deutz TCD 2012 L06 2V DCR Deutz TCD 2012 L06 2V DCR Deutz TCD 2012 L06 2V DCR
Cylinders/Cylinder capacity n°/cc 6 / 6057 6 / 6057 6 / 6057
Natural aspiration X X X
Aspiration Turbo Intercooler X X X
Max. homologated power kW/hp 97/132 106,5/145 120/163
Maximum torque Nm/kgm 574/58,5 655/66,8 527/53,7
3

Maximum torque speed (rpm) 1600 1600 1600

Torque increase 31 26 26
Minimum speed rpm 750 ÷ 100 750 ÷ 100 750 ÷ 100
Maximum power engine speed 2100 2100 2100
Maximum speed in rpm (nominal) 2200 2200 2200
Electronic engine regulator X X X
Liquid cooled X X X
4

Oil cooler X X X
Air cleaner with dust ejector X X X
Silencer with exhaust on cab pillar X X X
02 - CLUTCH
Electro-hydraulically controlled X X X
5

clutch
Mechanical flexible coupling X X X
03 - TRANSMISSION
6 speed gearbox X X X
Underdrive O O O
Electro-hydraulically controlled X X X
6

shuttle
Forced lubrication X X X
Oil cooler X X X
04 - REAR PTO
Oil-immersed multi-plate clutch X X X
with electro-hydraulic control
7

Shaft diameter 1” 3/8, 1” 3/4 1” 3/8, 1” 3/4 1” 3/8, 1” 3/4

PTO shaft splines 6 / 20 / 21 6 / 20 / 21 6 / 20 / 21
PTO 540 – Engine rpm: 2005 2005 2005
540 ECO PTO - Engine rpm: 1608 1608 1608
1000 PTO – Engine rpm: 1995 1995 1995
PTO 1000 ECO – Engine rpm: 1600 1600 1600
Engine revs/PTO revs ratio 540 3.713 3.713 3.713
8

Engine revs/PTO revs ratio 2.977 2.977 2.977

540ECO
Engine revs/1000 PTO revs ratio 1.995 1.995 1.995
Engine revs/1000 ECO PTO revs 1.6 1.6 1.6
ratio
Control on fender X X X
9

05 - FRONT PTO
Front PTO O O O
Oil-immersed multi-plate clutch X X X
with electro-hydraulic control
Shaft diameter 1” 3/8 1” 3/8 1” 3/8
PTO shaft splines 6 6 6
10

1000 PTO – Engine rpm: 1930 1930 1930

Engine revs/PTO revs ratio 1000 0,10555555556 0,10555555556 0,10555555556

10-4

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.03.49

 TECHNICAL DATA
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

1
06 - FRONT AXLE
Electrohydraulically operated front X X X
and rear differential lock
Automatic traction and differential X X X
control
Transmission ratio: front wheel 13.625 13.625 13.625

2
revs. per rear wheel rev.
Steering angle / 4WD steering 52° 52° 52°
radius
Steering front fenders O O O
07 - BRAKES
Integral braking on all four wheels X X X

3
(4WD)
Diameter of rear discs in mm 241 241 241
Parking brake X X X
Hydraulic trailer braking valve X X X
08 - STEERING

4
Hydrostatic, with telescopic steer- X X X
ing column for steering wheel
height adjustment
Pump capacity l/min 55 55 55
09 - REAR HYDRAULIC LIFT
Electrohydraulically controlled X X X

5
rear lift
Electronically controlled rear lift, 6200 6200 6200
maximum lifting capacity without
supplementary rams
Electronically controlled rear lift, 9200 9200 9200
maximum lifting capacity with

6
supplementary rams
Right hand lifting rod and mechani- X X X
cal top link
Hydraulic right-hand lift rod and O O O
top link
Auto hitch link arms X X X
Fender controls X X X

7
10 - FRONT LIFT
Mechanical front lift with folding O O O
link arms
Maximum lifting capacity Kg 4000 4000 4000
Quick couplers X X X
8
11 – SPOOL VALVES
Pump output at max. power engine 120 120 120
rpm l/min
Auxiliary spool valves - max n° 4 4 4
ports
Operating pressure [Bar] 200 200 200
9

Maximum quantity of oil receivable 40 40 40

at running level – Extra oil level
min/max litres
12 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage [V] 12 12 12
10

Battery, standard [V/Ah/A] 12 / 143 12 / 143 12 / 143

Battery for cold climates [V/Ah/A] 12 / 180 12 / 180 12 / 180
Alternator [V/Ah] 14 / 150 14 / 150 14 / 150

10-5

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.03.49

 TECHNICAL DATA
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

Starter motor [V/kW] 12 / 4 12 / 4 12 / 4

1

Auxiliary power socket X X X

Electrical socket amperage supp. X X X
13 - FUEL TANK
Tank capacity litres 270 270 270
14 - CAB / ROPS
2

Cab with mechanical suspension O O O

Cab with pneumatic suspension O O O
Ventilation and heating X X X
Air conditioning X X X
Maximum noise level in CAB with 75:08:00 75:08:00 75:08:00
doors open (roof hatch and rear
3

window open) db(A):

Maximum noise level in CAB with 71:01:00 71:01:00 71:01:00
doors closed db(A):
Hazardous substances protection 2 2 2
category CAB

10.2.2 - Fuel technical characteristics

4

The engines used in tractors of the SDF Group are designed to run on fuel with a minimum cetane number of 45 .
The engines are approved for use with the following fuels:
l A - European Diesel Fuel for Vehicles: EN 590 (Ann. 1)
l B - U.S. Diesel Fuel for Off-Road Applications: ASTM D 975 Grade – No 1-D (Ann. 2).
5

Using fuels with a cetane number lower than the minimum indicated number may lead to starting difficulties and noticeable emission
of white smoke, especially at low temperatures.
Diesel fuels are approved and can be used according to the following specifications:
Table 79
FUELS
6

EN 590 Annex 1
ASTM Designation: D 975 Grade-No 1-D and Grade Low Sulphur No. 1-D / Annex 2
2-D
Fuels with high sulphur content
Use only commercially available fuel with a sulphur content less than 0.5%.
7

If the recommended sulphur content value is exceeded, the time intervals for changing the oil, indicated in the maintenance tables,
must be halved.
Winter operation with diesel fuel
Addition of kerosene to diesel fuel
Special demands are made on the cold behaviour (temperature limit value of the
filterability) of fuels for winter operation. Suitable fuels are available at filling sta-
8

tions during the corresponding seasons. If only summer diesel fuel is available,
kerosene (paraffin oil) may be mixed into the diesel fuel up to 30% as shown in the
diagram, to ensure the flow capability.
9

Fig. 508

For fuel available on the U.S. market in compliance with ASTM D 975 1-D/2-D, kerosene may not be mixed.
10

A 1-1 Mixing of kerosene with Summer diesel fuel

Mixing takes place in the fuel tank: first fill with the appropriate amount of paraffin, then add the diesel fuel.

10-6

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.03.49

 TECHNICAL DATA
Mixing of normal petrol is not permissible for safety and technical reasons (cavitation on the injection system). Diesel fuels up to -44
°C are available for an Arctic climate. It is possible to add flow improvers to the diesel fuel. The choice of a suitable additive and the
necessary dosing and mixing procedure should take place in agreement with the fuel supplier.

1
Fuel additives
The use of fuel additives is not permitted. The flow improvers mentioned above are an exception. Use of unsuitable additives will
result in loss of warranty.
Ann. 1: Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) according to EN 590:2004

2
Table 80
PROPERTIES UNITS LIMIT VALUES EN TEST METHOD
590:2004
CETANE NUMBER AT LEAST 51 EN ISO 5165:1998
CETANE INDEX AT LEAST 46 EN ISO 4264:1996
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 820 - 845 EN ISO 3675:1998 EN ISO

3
12185:1996/C1:2001
Aromatic hydrocarbons weight % max. 11 EN 12916:2000
Sulphur content mg/kg 350 (until 31.12.2004) or EN ISO 20846 EN ISO 20847 EN ISO
50.00 20884
EN ISO 20846/EN ISO 20884
Flashpoint °C at least 55 EN ISO 2719:2002
Coke residue (from 10% distillation weight % max. 0.30 EN ISO 10370:1995

4
residue)
Ash content weight % max. 0.01 EN ISO 6245:2002
Water content mg/kg max. 200 EN ISO 12937:2000
Total residue mg/kg max. 24 EN 12662:1998
Corrosion effect on copper (3 hours at Degree of corrosion Class 1 EN ISO 2160:1998
50 °C)

5
Oxidation stability g/m3 max. 25 EN ISO 12205:1996
Lubricity “wear scar diameter” (wsd µm max. 460 EN ISO 12156-1:2000
1.4) at 60 °C
Viscosity at 40°C mm2/s 2.00 - 4.50 EN ISO 3104:1996
Distillation EN ISO 3405:2000
compensated at 250 °C Volume % max. 65

6
compensated at 350 °C Volume % at least 85
95 vol. % compensated by % °C 360
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester content Volume % 5 EN 14078:2003
(FAME)
Limit of filterability (CFPP) * EN 116:1997
15.04. to 30.09. °C max. 0

7
01.10. up to 15.11. °C max. -10
16.11. to 28.02. °C max. -20
01.03. to 14.04. °C max. -10
* data applies to the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may differ.
** Specifications also applicable to NATO fuel F-54
Ann. 2: Fuel Specifications (minimum requirements) according to ASTM D 975
8

Table 81
PROPERTIES UNITS. LIMIT TEST METHOD
GRADE NO. 1-D LOW GRADE NO. 2-D LOW
SULPHUR GRADE NO. SULPHUR GRADE NO.
1-D 1-D
9

Density at 15 °C kg/m3 max. 860* max. 860*

Flashpoint °C at least 38 at least 52 ASTM D 93
Water and sediments vol. % max. 0.05 max. 0.05 ASTM D 2709
Distillation range at 90% volume °C - at least 282 ASTM D 86
°C max. 288 max. 338
Viscosity at 40°C mm2/s 1.3 - 2.4 1.9 - 4.1 ASTM D 44
10

Ash weight % max. 0.01 max. 0.01 ASTM D 482

Sulphur

10-7

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 7 20/09/2012 19.03.50

 TECHNICAL DATA
PROPERTIES UNITS. LIMIT TEST METHOD
GRADE NO. 1-D LOW GRADE NO. 2-D LOW
SULPHUR GRADE NO. SULPHUR GRADE NO.
1

1-D 1-D
Grade No. 1/2-D weight % max. 0.50 max. 0.50 ASTM D 129
Low sulphur grade No. 1/2-D max. 0.05 max. 0.05 ASTM D 2622
Copper corrosion Degree of corrosion No 3 No 3 ASTM D 130
Cetane number at least 40 at least 40 ASTM D 613
Coke residue according to Rams weight % 0.15 0.35 ASTM D 524
2

bottom from 10% distillate residue

Limit of filterability °C ** max. 338
diesel fuel according to ASTM Designation D 975-02
* Minimum SDFG requirement
** Varies according to season and region.
3

10.2.3 - Biofuels - technical characteristics

DEUTZ engines for this series of tractors are designed to use not only EN 590 fossil fuels, but also biodiesel, commercially available
in Europe and compliant with the FAME - EN 14214 standard, up to 100% (denominated B100).
They may run on biodiesel fuel in accordance with the specifications listed below.
Only biodiesel fuels according to EN 14214 (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) are permitted.
4

Table 82
FUEL TECHNICAL DATA
Biodiesel Fuel according to EN 14214 Annex 3
l The use of US biodiesel (ASTM D6751 B100 compliant), which is based on soy oil methylester, is only permissible in EN 590
diesel fuel mixtures with a biodiesel content of a max. 20% of weight.
5

l Biodiesel is subject to contamination and degradation by bacteria, hence it must not be left stagnant in the fuel tank for more
than 4-6 weeks, otherwise the engine should be started and stopped with normal diesel. Do not use biodiesel if the tractor is
to be used only for short periods during the year.
WARNING
1. Biodiesel, due to its chemical and physical characteristics, has a lower calorific power than normal diesel, and thus results in
6

lower engine performance; in the case of the B100 mixture this reduction in performance is of the order of 6-8%.
2. The lubricant to be used is the same as for normal fuel (see specifications in this user and maintenance handbook, at the
start of the maintenance section). The changeover period must be halved, however (250 hours of runtime rather than 500).
3. The fuel filter should be changed 30-50 operating hours after switching from normal diesel to BIODIESEL.
4. Pure vegetable oils (e.g. rapeseed oil) which are not transesterified must not be used The use of these oils will invalidate the
warranty.
7

Biological contamination in the supply tanks

A microbial contamination may occur in supply tanks in the case of contamination of the stored fuel by water. Water contamination is
usually caused by condensation of water in the air.
Water is very weakly fuel soluble so that the penetrated water collects at the bottom of the tank. The bacteria and fungi grow in the
watery phase at the phase boundary to the fuel phase from which they draw their nutrition.
8

Supply tanks should have water traps so that the penetrated water can easily be removed. In addition, the tanks should be installed
so that not too great temperature differences occur during the day, to minimise condensation processes.
Direct exposure to sunlight should be avoided because too high fuel temperatures favour the growth of microbes. Small supply tanks
with correspondingly low dwell times of the stored fuel are to be preferred to large tanks.
Engine fuel filters block relatively quickly when using microbially contaminated fuel; this results in degraded performance.
9

When the fuel in the supply tank has become microbially contaminated, the tank must be cleaned by specialist companies.
Ask the fuel supplier to recommend suitable specialist companies. The decision whether to use biocides (such as GrotaMar 71,
Schülke & Mayr GmbH, Norderstedt) after cleaning to kill off the rest of the bacteria should be left up to the specialist company.
The engine owner is strongly recommended not to use biocides because of their toxicity. Use of biocides without cleaning the tank is
useless because the bacteria which lead to filter blockage are not removed.
10

Water

10-8

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 8 20/09/2012 19.03.50

 TECHNICAL DATA
l Too high a water content leads to corrosion and in connection with corrosion products and sediments to sludge. This leads to
malfunctions in the fuel and injection system.

1
Sediments / soiling
l Solid sediments (dust, rust, scale) cause wear in the injection system and combustion chamber as well as valve leaks.
Cetane number / Cetane index
l The cetane number specifies the ignition willingness of the fuel. Too low a cetane number may cause starting difficulties, white
smoke, increase hydrocarbon emission and thermal and mechanical overloading of the engine. The cetane number is deter-

2
mined on a test engine. The cetane index can be used as a substitute calculated value from density and distillation behavior
and correlates well with the cetane number as a rule.
Heating value
l The lower heating value (Hu) indicates the amount of heat released when burning 1 kg of fuel.

3
Ann. 3 : Fuel specification (minimum requirements) Fatty Acid Methyl Ester (FAME) for diesel engines
in accordance with EN 14214
Table 83
PROPERTIES’ UNITS OF MEASURE- LIMIT VALUES EN TEST METHOD
MENT 14214:2003
Ester content weight % at least 96.5 EN 14103

4
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 860 - 900 EN ISO 3675 1998 EN ISO
12185:1996/C1:2001
Viscosity at 40 °C mm2/s 3,5 - 5,0 EN ISO 3104:1998/C2:1999
Flashpoint °C at least 120 prEN ISO 3679:2002
Sulphur content mg/kg max. 10.0 prEN ISO 20846:2002 prEN ISO
20884:2002

5
Coke residue (from 10% distillation weight % max. 0.30 EN ISO 10370:1995
residue)
Cetane number at least 51 EN ISO 51165:1998
Ash content (sulfate ash) weight % max. 0.02 ISO 3987:1994
Water content mg/kg max. 500 EN ISO 12937:2000
Overall soiling mg/kg max. 24 EN ISO 12662:1998

6
Corrosion effect on copper (3 h at 50 Degree of corrosion Class 1 EN ISO 2160:1998
°C)
Oxidation stability Hours at least 6 EN 14112
Acid number mg KOH/g mg/kg. 0.5 EN 14104
Iod number G Iod/100g max. 120 EN 14111
Content of linolenic acid-methylester weight % max. 12.0 EN 14103

7
Content of fatty acid-methylester with weight % max. 1
4 double bonds
Methanol content weight % max. 0.20 EN 14110
Monoglyceride content weight % max. 0.80 EN 14105
Diglyceride content weight % max. 0.20 EN 14105
Triglyceride content weight % max. 0.20 EN 14105
Content of free glycerine weight % max. 0.020 EN 14105 EN 14106
8

Content of total glycerine weight % max. 0.25 EN 14105

Content of alkaline metals (Na+K) mg/kg max. 5.0 EN 14108 EN 14109
Content of alkaline earth metals mg/kg max. 5.0 EN 14108:2002
Phosphor content mg/kg max. 10.0 EN 14107
Limit of filterability (CFPP) * EN 116:1997
15.04. up to 30.09. °C max. 0
9

* Data applies to the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may differ.
10

10-9

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 9 20/09/2012 19.03.50

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.2.4 - Coolant
Protective fluid and antifreeze
1

Use an appropriate type of coolant to avoid damage to the engine.

The antifreeze indicated in the lubricants table is a mono-ethylene glycol based fluid. Aqueous solutions of this fluid act both as an
antifreeze and refrigerant, and also inhibit corrosion of the metal parts of the engine cooling system. The antifreeze fluid does not
contain nitrites, amines or phosphates (NAP free).
The cooling system must be checked periodically.
2

Characteristics and performance

l Corrosion protection
m Reduces premature damage and consequent need for replacement of cooling-system components. Maintains the ef-

ficiency of the cooling system by guarding against the formation of deposits and encrustation.
l Optimises heat transfer
3

m Reduces the time taken for the engine to warm up thereby improving power and efficiency

l Lowers the freezing point

m Prevents expensive repairs caused by the breakage of cooling system parts.

l Raises the boiling point

m Reduces the risk of overheating in harsh conditions.

l NAP free
4

m Very low environmental impact. Advanced corrosion inhibitor technology for effective protection of engine components.

l Hard water stability

m Maintains optimal characteristics even when diluted with tap water.

l Formulated for extended life

m Allows longer intervals between coolant changes
5

Specifications
This liquid coolant meets the most recent international standards:
Table 84
BS 6580 (1992)
AFNORNFR 15-601 (1991)
6

ASTM D 3306
It is approved by or meets the specifications of the major manufacturers:
Table 85
KHD meets H-LV 0161 0188BS 6580 (1992)
MAN 324 NF
7

Mercedes Benz 325.0 ; DBL 7700.00

Scania meets TB 1451
Volvo meets 1286083
Deutsche Bundeswehr TK-BA2-3-6850-008
Typical chemical and physical characteristics
8

Table 86
CONCENTRATED LIQUID
Appearance Clear liquid
Colour Blue/green
Density at 20°C ASTM D 1122 1.120 - 1.124 g/cm3
Kinematic viscosity at 20 °C DIN 51 562 24-28 mm2/s
9

Refractive index at 20 °C DIN 51 423 TK-BA2-3-6850-008

Boiling point ASTM D 1120 >165 °C
pH ASTM D 1287 7.1 - 7.3
Reserve alkalinity - HCI N/10 ASTM D 1121 13 - 15 ml
Ash content ASTM D 1119 max. 1.5%
Water content DIN 51 777 max. 3.5%
10

Miscibility with water Totally miscible

Miscilibility with hard water No precipitation
Miscibility with other antifreezes Miscible with other commercially available products

10-10

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 10 20/09/2012 19.03.50

 TECHNICAL DATA
Freeze point ASTM D 1177 -40 °C (50% in water)
-27 °C (40% in water)
-20 °C (33% in water)

1
-17 °C (30% in water)
Setting point DIN 51 583 -45 °C (50% in water)
-23 °C (33% in water)
The level of frost protection is obtained by calculating the arithmetic mean between the freezing point and the setting point.
Foaming tendency ASTM D 1881 max 50 ml / 1 - 3 s
Rubber swelling 80 °C / 168 h - SBR and EPDM (50% in water) 0 - 3% result similar to that obtained with pure water

2
Typical chemical and physical characteristics of aqueous mixtures of the liquid coolant
Water characteristics must be as indicated in the following table.
Table 87
PARTS CONCEN- PARTS WATER (BY RESULTING DILU- FROST PROTECTION VISCOSITY AT 0°C VISCOSITY AT 80°C
TRATED LIQUID (BY VOLUME) TION (°C) MM2/S MM2/S

3
VOLUME)
1 2 33% in water -20.5 3.0 - 5.0 0.5 - 0.8
1 1 33% in water -41.5 7.0 - 10.0 0.9 - 1.1
Concentration of liquid antifreeze on handover to the customer
On handover, the tractor’s cooling system is filled with liquid coolant comprised of 45% antifreeze and 55% water. This concentration

4
provides protection at temperatures down to - 35 °C.
The percentage of antifreeze in the coolant must be as specified for the various temperatures.
IMPORTANT
For temperatures below -35 °C please consult an authorised service centre.

5
Safety information
The concentrated fluid contains inhibited mono-ethylene glycol and is classified as “harmful if ingested”. It is not classified ����������
as inflam-
mable but may burn if ignited. The concentrated antifreeze fluid contains 25 ppm by weight of an agent that confers a bitter taste as
a deterrent against accidental ingestion. This agent is only effective in the concentrated product. In the diluted form it is necessary to
add 25-30 ppm by weight to obtain the same effects.

6
10.2.5 - Noise levels
The tractor is approved in accordance with the applicable EC Directives.
To avoid increased noise levels proceed as follows:
l after maintenance operations or repairs refit all the sound-deadening panels and materials correctly;

7
l do not make changes to the tractor that may lead to an increase in noise emissions;
l beware of any anomalous noise or vibration; if you notice anomalous noise or vibration, park the tractor in a safe position and
perform the stopping procedure. Inform maintenance personnel of the situation. Avoid prolonged operation.
Reference standards for the measurement of noise levels:
l the maximum operator-perceived noise level, with the engine at normal operating temperature and measured in accordance
8
with the test method described in the European Directive 2009/76 EC (40 km/h);
l the maximum noise level measured with the tractor in motion and the tractor stationary, measured in accordance with the
method described in European Directive 2009/63 EC, Annex VI (40 km/h).
The measured noise levels are given in the following table:
Table 88 - Technical data
9

AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

NOISE LEVELS
Maximum noise level in CAB with 77,3 77,3 76,6
doors open (roof hatch and front
10

and rears window open) db(A):

Maximum noise level in CAB with 70 70 72,2
doors closed db(A):

10-11

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 11 20/09/2012 19.03.50

 TECHNICAL DATA
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

Maximum external noise level with 78 78 80

1

tractor moving, db(A)

Maximum external noise level with 76 76 77
tractor stationary, db(A)
The values declared by the manufacturer.
The manufacturer cannot influence noise emissions of the tractor in different working conditions.
2

WARNING
If the noise level during continuous tractor operation is equal to or greater than limit set by the applicable regulations,
the user must take appropriate precautions (hearing defenders, ear plugs, helmet, etc.).

10.2.6 - Vibration referred to the operator position

3

The value is referred to the amount of mechanical vibration transmitted by the tractor to the WHOLE-BODY as defined by UNI ISO
2631-1:2008.
Said value must be utilised for assessment of the vibration exposure risk, but it cannot cover all the possible conditions of use of the
tractor since it may vary in accordance with parameters that are not always related to the tractor (terrain, implements, etc.). If the risk
assessment cannot be considered to be exhaustive or if the risk may exceed the values defined in 2002/44/EC, the use of a vibration
4

meter is prescribed.
In order to minimise the vibration transmitted to the whole-body the following best practice rules should be observed:
l use the most suitable implement for the tractor and the task in hand;
l adjust the seat to suit your weight and stature;
l periodically check the condition of the cab suspensions and renew them if damaged;
l check tyre inflation pressure;
5

l use front axle suspensions, if fitted;

l during transfers, adjust tractor speed in order to minimise the vibration level.
The seat vibration values, as obtained from the seat approval in compliance with 78/764/EEC (amended by 1999/57/EC) are shown
in the following table.
Table 89 - Technical data
6

AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

VIBRATION
Grammer MSG 95A/721 seat - 55 (1,14) / 98 (1,06) 55 (1,14) / 98 (1,06) 55 (1,14) / 98 (1,06)
Driver weight kg (Vibration m/s2)
7

Grammer MSG 95G/721 seat - 55 (1,20) / 98 (1,14) 55 (1,20) / 98 (1,14) 55 (1,20) / 98 (1,14)
Driver weight kg (Vibration m/s2)
8
9
10

10-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 12 20/09/2012 19.03.50

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.3 - DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
10.3.1 - Tractor dimensions, weights and speeds

1
DANGER
When installing heavy implements, make sure that 20% of the total weight (tractor + load) is on the unloaded axle. Do
not exceed the permissible maximum axle loads.

Dimensions and weights of the tractor

2
3
4
5
Fig. 509 - Tractor dimensions diagram
Table 90 - Technical data

6
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

TYRES
With front tyres 540/65R24” 540/65R24” 540/65R28”
With rear tyres 600/65R38” 600/65R38” 650/65R38”

7
DIMENSIONS
Wheelbase (A) mm 2647 2647 2647
Length (B) mm 4523-4772 4523-4772 4545-4772
Height ( C) mm 2904-3004 2904-3004 2916-3024
Min-max width (D) 2068-2521 2068-2521 2068-2527
Ground clearance (F) mm 455-505 455-505 460-555
8

UNLADEN WEIGHT [2]

Unladen weight on front axle kg. 1803-2595 1803-2595 1992-2745
Unladen weight on rear axle kg. 3364-3640 3364-3640 3571-3770
Total unladen weight kg. 5167-6235 5167-6235 5563-6515
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT AT 40 KM/H [1]
9

Maximum permissible weight on 2430-4200 2430-4200 3600-4700

front axle kg.
Maximum permissible weight on 4480-6500 4480-6500 4480-7200
rear axle kg.
Total maximum permissible weight 6910-9500 6910-9500 8080-10300
kg.
10

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT AT 10 KM/H [1]

10-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 13 20/09/2012 19.03.51

 TECHNICAL DATA
AGROTRON M 600 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 610 -> 20001 AGROTRON M 620 -> 20001

Maximum permissible weight on 6000 6000 6500

1

front axle kg.

Maximum permissible weight on 4480-6500 4480-6500 4480-7200
rear axle kg.
Total maximum permissible weight 6910-9500 6910-9500 8080-10300
kg.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT AT 50 KM/H [1]
2

Maximum permissible weight on 2430-4200 2430-4200 3600-4550

front axle kg.
Maximum permissible weight on 4480-6500 4480-6500 4480-7200
rear axle kg.
Total maximum permissible weight 6910-8500 6910-8500 8080-9000
kg.
3

[1] IMPORTANT
The maximum permissible weights require the standard track width.
4

[2] IMPORTANT
The unladen weight of the tractor is an approximate value as it varies according to the equipment level and acces-
sories installed; the exact weight should determined by weighing the tractor.

Speeds for 130 hp and 140 hp

Table 91
5

TYRE SIZE UNIT CREEPER GEARS NORMAL

GEARS (N)
L M H S L M H
460/85R38” Forward
gears
6

1 0.40 0.48 0.57 0.68 3.24 3.89 4.65

2 0.71 0.86 1.02 1.23 5.84 7.00 8.38
3 1.15 1.37 1.64 1.97 9.36 11.22 13.43
4 1.73 2.07 2.48 2.97 14.11 16.91 20.24
5 - - - - 19.40 23.26 27.84
6 - - - - 29.68 35.59 42.60
All reverse
7

speeds are
identical
to the cor-
respond-
ing forward
speeds
8

* = electronic speed limitation to 50 km/h; with 40 km/h version on which speed is limited to 42.5 km/h.
NOTE:
To obtain the corresponding speeds in mph multiply the speed values in km/h by 0.6214
9
10

10-14

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 14 20/09/2012 19.03.51

 TECHNICAL DATA
Speed of 160 hp tractor
Table 92

1
TYRE SIZE UNIT CREEPER GEARS NORMAL
GEARS (N)
L M H S L M H
580/70R38” Forward
gears
1 0.41 0.50 0.59 0.71 3.38 4.05 4.85

2
2 0.74 0.89 1.07 1.28 6.09 7.30 8.73
3 1.19 1.43 1.71 2.06 9.76 11.7 14.01
4 1.80 2.16 2.58 3.10 14.71 17.64 21.11
5 - - - - 20.23 24.25 29.03
6 - - - - 30.85 37.11 44.41
All reverse
speeds are

3
identical
to the cor-
respond-
ing forward
speeds

4
* = electronic speed limitation to 50 km/h; with 40 km/h version on which speed is limited to 42.5 km/h.
NOTE:
To obtain the corresponding speeds in mph multiply the speed values in km/h by 0.6214

5
Conversion table
When the rear tyres are changed also the corresponding speeds change. To calculate the speeds in accordance with the tyres, simply
multiply the speeds shown in the above table by the following coefficients:
Table 93
REAR TYRES WITH REFERENCE TO THE SPEED SHOWN IN THE TABLES, MULTIPLY BY:

6
FOR 130 HP AND 140 HP TRACTORS FOR 160 HP TRACTORS
460/85R38” 1 0,943
520/85R38” 1,061 1
520/70R38” 1 0,943
580/70R38” 1,061 1
600/65R38” 1 0,943

7
650/65R38” 1,061 1
Speed was calculated on the basis of tyre sizes in conformity with ETRTO.
8
9
10

10-15

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 15 20/09/2012 19.03.51

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.4 - IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT DIAGRAMS
10.4.1 - Implement coupling holes diagram (Agrotron M 600 -> 20001, Agrotron M 610 ->
1

20001)
Attachment of implements to the tractor
To allow full use in the widest possible range of applications, the structural frame of the tractor has been designed to afford a solid,
safe mounting for agricultural or semi-industrial implements; this ensures the maximum versatility of the tractor in a broad range of
operating situations.
2

In the case of particularly heavy applications, contact your authorised service centre to check suitability.
It is possible that some of the tyres we fit to the tractor are not suitable for the application in question.
Before attaching the implement, check that the tyres are capable of supporting the load.
Check the markings on the walls of the tyres and consult the tyre manufacturer’s load tables.
Implement coupling holes diagram
3
4
5
6

Fig. 510 - Implement coupling holes diagram for tractors with fixed front axles
7
8
9
10

10-16

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 16 20/09/2012 19.03.52

 TECHNICAL DATA

1
2
3
4
Fig. 511 - Implement coupling holes diagram for tractors with suspended front axle
Screw sizes
Table 94
POSITION NUMBER TYPE

5
A 6+6 M22 x 40
B 2+2 M20 x 2 x 53
C 16 M16 x 42
D 1+1 M20 x 2 x 53
E 16 M18 x 1.5 x 32
F 8 M16 x 2 x 30

10.4.2 - Implement coupling holes diagram (Agrotron M 620 -> 20001)

6
Attachment of implements to the tractor
To allow full use in the widest possible range of applications, the structural frame of the tractor has been designed to afford a solid,
safe mounting for agricultural or semi-industrial implements; this ensures the maximum versatility of the tractor in a broad range of
operating situations.

7
In the case of particularly heavy applications, contact your authorised service centre to check suitability.
It is possible that some of the tyres we fit to the tractor are not suitable for the application in question.
Before attaching the implement, check that the tyres are capable of supporting the load.
Check the markings on the walls of the tyres and consult the tyre manufacturer’s load tables.
8
9
10

10-17

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 17 20/09/2012 19.03.53

 TECHNICAL DATA
Implement coupling holes diagram
1
2
3
4

Fig. 512 - Implement coupling holes diagram for tractors with fixed front axles
5
6
7
8

Fig. 513 - Implement coupling holes diagram for tractors with suspended front axle
Screw sizes
Table 95
POSITION NUMBER TYPE
A 6+6 M22 x 40
9

B 2+2 M20 x 2 x 53
C 16 M16 x 42
D 1+1 M20 x 2 x 53
E 16 M18 x 1.5 x 32
F 8 M16 x 2 x 30
10

10-18

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 18 20/09/2012 19.03.55

 INDEX

“
“MSG95A/721” seat with pneumatic suspension and fabric upholstery 3-5

3
3-point linkage 4-40, 4-40

A
Accelerator pedal 3-49
Access to the driving position 3-3, 3-3
Accessing the engine compartment 6-9, 6-9
Accessories 9-25
Accident prevention and personal safety 2-7
Adhesive safety warning decals 2-20
Adhesive safety warning decals - North America version 2-24
Adjusting the height of the towing hitch 4-65
Adjusting the repeater headlights 9-18
Adjusting the steering wheel 3-15
Adjustment of fixed front fenders 8-13
Adjustment of steering front fenders 8-12
Air conditioning system 3-37
ASM/SBA system” 4-13
Automatic power take-off 4-22
Automatic towing hitch 4-69
Auxiliary equipment 2-11

B
Ballast for tractor 8-16
Ballast for wheels with water-filled tyres 8-18
Ballasting 8-15
Battery 9-2, 9-2
Biofuels - technical characteristics 10-8
Bleeding the fuel circuit 6-42
Boarding and alighting from the tractor 2-8
Brake pedal 3-47
Brakes troubleshooting 7-11
Braking 4-15
Braking system air pressure gauge 3-32

C
Cab 3-39
Cab air conditioning system maintenance 6-46
Cab air filter 3-38
Cab fuse box 9-4
Cab troubleshooting 7-15
Calculation of the mechanical lead 8-6
Changing front PTO oil and oil filter cartridge 6-37
Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit 6-48
Changing the differential oil and final drives oil (4WD) 6-45
Changing the engine oil 6-15
Changing the engine oil filter cartridge 6-16
Changing the fuel filter 6-18
Changing the fuel prefilter 6-31
Changing the gearbox and rear axle oil filter 6-32
Changing the hydrostatic steering supply line filter 6-35
Changing the Load Sensing oil filter 6-34
Changing the rear axle final drives oil 6-44
Changing the transmission oil 6-30
Check front PTO oil level 6-28
Check the battery 6-24
Check the electrical system 6-13

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.03.56

 INDEX
Checking engine belt tension 6-14
Checking indicator lights 2-11
Checking that the radiator/coolers are clean 6-17
Checking the brake reservoir oil level 6-23
Checking the braking distance 6-14
Checking the coolant level 6-11
Checking the differential lock system 6-37
Checking the engine oil level 6-10
Checking the fuel level 6-11
Checking the oil level of the rear axle final drives 6-27
Checking the oil pipelines 6-20
Checking the parking brake lever 6-19
Checking the transmission oil level 6-22
Checking the window washer system 6-19
Checking wheels and tyres 6-26
Cleaning engine air filter - Changing air filter cartridge and internal safety cartridge 6-39
Cleaning the cab ventilation system filters 6-19
Cleaning the tractor 2-10
Clutch control 3-46
Console switches 3-25
Control pedals 3-46
Coolant 10-10
Correspondence between the control levers and the rear hydraulic couplers 4-51
Creeper 4-9

D
Daily check of the tractor and implements 2-8
Daily intervention 6-10
Declaration of conformity 10-2
Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor 2-19
Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor 2-19
Decommissioning the tractor 2-19
Delivery and installation 1-6
Dimensions and weights 10-13
Display of alarms 7-23
Drawbar 4-66
Drawbar with Piton Fix or Ball 4-73
Driving on the road 2-13

E
Electrical system troubleshooting 7-16
Electrohydraulically controlled rear lift 4-26
Electro-hydraulically controlled shuttle 4-10
Electronic hand throttle 3-49
Emergency exits 2-16
Engaging front-wheel drive 4-12
Engine - first 50 operating hours 4-2
Engine alarms 7-18
Engine identification plate 1-4
Engine number 1-3
Engine troubleshooting 7-6
Exposure to noise 2-7
Exterior views of the tractor 3-2
External rear-view mirrors 3-16
External views 3-2

F
Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS) 2-16
Fault diagnosis 7-17
Fire extinguisher 3-43
Fluids / lubricants and fill volumes 6-4
Four-wheel drive - Differential lock 4-12
Front and rear differential lock 4-12
Front and rear power take-off troubleshooting 7-9
Front axle identification plate 1-4
Front axle oil level check 6-27
Front axle suspension 4-14
Front ballast with cast-iron blocks 8-16

II

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.03.56

 INDEX
Front hydraulic service couplers 4-54
Front lift 4-34
Front lift maintenance 6-25
Front one-piece ballast block 8-17
Front power take-off (1000 rpm) 4-24
Front PTO 4-24
Front towing hitch 4-77
Front towing hitch for tractors with front lift and front PTO 4-78
Front towing hitch on block 4-78
Front towing hitch on front support 4-78
Front-wheel drive troubleshooting 7-10
Fuel injection pump maintenance 6-39
Fuel technical characteristics 10-6
Fuse box 9-4

G
Gearbox identification plate 1-4
Gearbox troubleshooting 7-8
General information regarding tyres 8-2
General inspection of the tractor 6-10
General safety rules 2-4
GRAMMER MSG95G/721 seat with pneumatic suspension 3-9
Greasing the front axle 6-22
Greasing the rear 3-point linkage 6-25

H
Handling ballast weights 8-15
Handover of the tractor to the customer F1-1
Hazard warning triangle 3-43
Headlight alignment 9-17
Heating system 3-36
HLHP ECU alarms 7-29
Hybrid automatic-pneumatic braking device 4-15
Hydraulic front lift 4-34
Hydraulic lift 4-26
Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch 4-70
Hydraulic rear lift 4-26
Hydraulic remote valves troubleshooting 7-14
Hydraulic system 4-45, 4-45
Hydraulic system troubleshooting 7-13
Hydraulic trailer braking 4-15

I
Identification plates 1-3
Implement attachment diagrams 10-16
Implement coupling holes diagram (Agrotron M 600 -> 20001, Agrotron M 610 -> 20001) 10-16
Implement coupling holes diagram (Agrotron M 620 -> 20001) 10-17
Important F1-1
Installation of additional electronic components and/or equipment 9-28
Instrument panel 3-19
Instruments and controls 3-18
Instruments and tractor controls 3-18
Interior courtesy light 9-22
Interior rear-view mirrors 3-16
Introduction 2-2, 4-2, 8-2

K
Key to fuse symbols in fuseholder box 9-5

L
LH console 3-32

III

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.03.56

 INDEX
Lift troubleshooting 7-12
Lifting the tractor 7-5
Lights for road use 9-12, 9-12
Lights for road use, North America 9-15
List of error codes 7-24
List of model serial numbers 1-2

M
Machined drawbar 4-74
Maintenance 2-15
Maintenance and inspection schedule 6-7
Maintenance at 50 hours (1st service) 6-14
Maintenance at 500 hours 6-30
Maintenance every 1000 hours or at least every two years 6-48
Maintenance every 1000 hours or at least once a year 6-39
Maintenance every 250 hours 6-27
Maintenance every 50 hours 6-22
Maintenance every 500 hours 6-31
Maintenance intervals 6-3
Maintenance of the compressed air braking system 6-21
Maintenance operations 6-2
Mechanical Pick-up Hitch 4-76
Minimum track width 8-8
Multifunction armrest 3-32
Multifunction armrest - adjustment 3-12

N
Noise levels 10-11

O
On-board radar 9-27
Operating programs in the event of transmission errors or faults 7-23
Operation 2-11
Operation & Maintenance Manual 3-44
Operations prior to long term garaging 5-2
Operator Protective Structure (OPS) 2-17
Operator seat 3-5
Operator seats 3-5
Original spare parts 1-5
Other controls 3-46
Overturning 2-13

P
Parking brake lever 3-47
Parking the tractor 2-9
Passenger seat 3-13
Passenger seat belt 3-14
Permissible tyre combinations 8-5
Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame 4-72
Post-warranty assistance 1-7
Power outlet sockets - diagnosis 9-25
Power take-off 4-18
Practical advice on safe working procedures 2-3
Preface F1-1
Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of inactivity 5-3
Protect the Environment 2-3
Protection and safety devices 2-8
Punctures 8-3

R
Rear PTO 4-18

IV

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 4 20/09/2012 19.03.56

 INDEX
Rear PTO (540-1000 rpm) 4-19
Rear-view mirrors 3-16
Remote control valve alarms 7-28
Remote control valve operation 4-51
Remote valve 4-45
Remote valve controls 4-47
Right-hand console 3-29
Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) 2-16
ROPS identification plate 1-4

S
Safe transport of the tractor 7-4
Safety cab 2-16
Safety clothing and equipment 2-7
Safety warning notices 2-20
Seat belt 3-12
Semi-automatic towing hitch 4-75
Service intervals 6-6
Sliding Piton-Fix or ball towing hitch 4-69
Standard long hitch support frame 4-67
Standard short hitch support frame 4-75
Start 2-11
Starter motor maintenance 6-43
Starting - Stopping the engine 4-3
Starting fluids 2-11
Starting the engine: 4-3
Steering column controls 3-27
Steering wheel 3-15
Switching off the engine 4-6

T
Technical data 10-4
Technical data of the tractor 10-4
To the owner of the new tractor F1-1
Tool box 3-45
Towing devices 4-56, 4-58
Towing devices for 50 km/h tractors 4-63
Towing hitch with lock pin 4-68
Towing hitch with safety lock 4-68
Towing safely 2-12
Towing the tractor 7-2
Towing with the engine off 7-3
Towing with the engine running 7-2
Track width adjustment 8-8
Track width calculation 8-8
Tractor dimensions, weights and speeds 10-13
Tractor identification plates 1-3
Tractor serial number 1-3
Transmission 4-7, 4-7
Transmission alarms 7-23
Transmission controls 3-50
Transport 1-7
Turbocharging using the turbocharger 4-6
Types of remote control valve 4-47
Tyre combinations 8-5

U
Use of hazardous substances 2-17

V
Ventilation system 3-33
Vertical loads (Agrotron M 600 -> 20001, Agrotron M 610 -> 20001) 4-56
Vertical loads (Agrotron M 620 -> 20001) 4-57
Vibration referred to the operator position 10-12

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 5 20/09/2012 19.03.56

 INDEX

W
Warnings F1-1
Warranty 1-6
Warranty procedure 1-6
Washing the tractor/attached implements 6-3
Wheel chock 3-44
Wheel nut/bolt tightening torques 8-4
Worklights 9-20, 9-20

VI

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 6 20/09/2012 19.03.56

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 1 20/09/2012 19.03.57
 *307.U.0550.en.6.03*
09/2012

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 2 20/09/2012 19.03.57

 *307.U.0550.en.6.03*
09/2012

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.

Viale F. Cassani, 15 • 24047 Treviglio (BG) • Italy • Phone + 39.0363.4211 • Fax + 39.0363.421638
www.samedeutz-fahr.com

307.U.0550.en.6.03.indb 3 20/09/2012 19.03.57